Home

Matrox Axio Installation and User Guide

1. VA U v U Recorder AUDIO COMPONENT Deck 2 IN VIDEO oe T ON Q Al Y Ey RN H752 sync y Ooo QW Program monitor input a n VIDEO IN a YTY Typical Matrox Axio LE connections 48 X linkLE S Video connections The X linkLE breakout box does not have standard S Video connectors however you can still connect S Video devices to your X linkLE breakout box by using the two supplied X linkLE S Video adapter cables see Using the X linkLE S Video adapter cables on page 45 for more information External sync Deck 1 AUDIO S VIDEO source Deck 1 EN A 1 ln SYNC oe d 3 ON A E OUT 750g SYNC Y iF OFF S C5 B X linkLE S Video adapter cable ANALOG AUDIO N oj YICVBSIN PONIN PIC IN N matrox AUDIO Dem yes PREVIEW O Ow O a QO e IC ES O O 1 S Og HOMO PIC out cves our OUTI our2 1394 75 OHMI a WM i Dock 2 AUDIO S VIDEO ec x a T A 750g SYNC y OFF di o Jj UT OUT Program B monitor WJ input Chapter 5 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio LE 49 X linkLE digital vide
2. Co gme N Caution Use extra care when attaching the X link connectors bent pins can cause your Matrox Axio system to not perform properly Also do not bend the attached cable too sharply Excessive bending or flexing can damage internal shielded wires Connect your X link breakout box to your computer 26 Typical Matrox Axio HD and SD connections Illustrations in the following sections show some typical video connections In these illustrations we ve connected a Program monitor NTSC PAL or digital to view the signal that will be recorded as well as separate source and record decks You may however use the same deck as both your source and record device by making the input and output connections to a single deck X linkHD digital video connections OUT AUDIO R AES EBU 2m y sync 750 spi AUDIO L OFF om our VIDEO o 7 DV 1394 S VIDEO Source N Deck 1 AES EBU mie cua SDI pom L e our A gt oN Recorder Program Deck 2 monitor input Chapter 3 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio HD and SD 27 X linkSD analog component connections External sync AAA source LO IN 9 Q j ON YSYNC 752 C
3. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 165 Creating a lens flare effect rrt reri nennen annn na 168 Overview of the luma key effect eueeeeeeeese 170 Creating a luma key effect eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeere nennen nnne 171 Using the luma Key graphs exea serinin re RIA ASEEXFER CARA E SK MRNA 172 Greating a mask effect oorr rper Iter EESNUUEINSUEMESNUUMESSUES 174 Creating a mask blur effect 1 irrito r e yere anana 176 Creating a mask mosaic effect ueoseosessesseoses si nepaI essi KRENUEMARUSEE 178 Creating a move amp scale effect eese eere 180 Creating an old movie effect Leeeeeeeeeeeereeenreee 182 Creating a page curl effect ecce perse s RII DE EMEN EUR 186 Creating pari amp scan effect ice rer tase ccedee ceeded eneseceneciese 188 Creating a ripple effect inire na ru ra goa x auR FRE AE uu BRE RR 190 Creating a SHAGOW GMSCE vc ectetuer dean PR DE SR RR De SR Se RE SeEEN NS 192 Greating a shine eifect eie UR Ue nad ERU ERN PE MUN DE 194 Creating a surface finish effect 0 cceccee eee e eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 198 Creating a track matte COCK iain oer este E RARI ERASMUS KRERUEMENNE ER 201 Greating a twirl efTect ose iter pU riter RISE m ESe n ES US EPSUE 203 Creating a wipe transition ucecececcesesesse sa ku ku ka ka Rr Ro Re Ra Rr 204 Using the Matrox chroma clamper eff
4. IN 1 2 Y CVBSIN Pb YIN PrCIN IN matrox omar Ow O ool 3 b Y OUT Pr C OUT CVBSOUT OUTI our2 1394 75 OHM fii X linkLE breakout j box partial view J j c X linkLE S Video adapter cable Cy e QUT 1 2 OUT 3 40UT 5 6 Y CVBS OUT PI To S Video IN connector on record device Chapter 5 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio LE 47 Typical Matrox Axio LE connections Illustrations in the following sections show some typical video connections In these illustrations we ve connected a Program monitor NTSC PAL or digital to view the signal that will be recorded as well as separate source and record decks You may however use the same deck as both your source and record device by making the input and output connections to a single deck X linkLE analog component connections External Source COMPONENT sync Deck 1 VIDEO n source Oe o6 Ow E EX E OO ooo od a ee oy ME DI YICVESIN PDJIN PHC IN N matrox DINS pemaAUO y ey e ANALOS AES EBU wo Eel o oS o o o o oan o PREVIEW sf 22 amp amp C369 6263 ol litle WI de A A A ONO NAO A GIG 6 6 Ni N2 om oua ows oura ons oue Jour 1 2 our 3 40uT 6 6 Ycves OUT PbIY OUT P COUr CVBS OUT OUTI our2 1394 75 OHMI
5. ccccececeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenees 238 Working with HD material aseo etre eoe oe ro RE e ER REIR URRSKFSREEKKUM SESS 239 About the Matrox HD COCGCCS cccece eee ee eee cece eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeneenes 239 Using the Matrox Offline HD codec esses 240 Creating your ofine erlit id edi pee E epi aiet 240 Creating an offline HD project on a remote editing workstation 241 Recapturing your clips at full HD resolution eeeesesss 242 Offline HD codec workflow examples eeeseeeeeeeeneeene 244 Using the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec 247 MPEG 2 I frame HD codec workflow example for offline editing 247 MPEG 2 I frame HD codec workflow example for online editing 248 Using the Matrox 8 bit and 10 bit Uncompressed HD codecs 249 Matrox Uncompressed codec workflow example 249 Applying pulldown in HD projects eeeueeesee 251 1080p 23 98 fps workflow example eeeseeeeeeeeeenenen 252 Other Matrox Axio HD workflows eeeeeeeee eene 253 1080p 24 fps workflow example esses enne nnn 253 1080 workflow examijle aeterno urro rie aaa pran 254 Mixing 1080p and 1080i 25 fps source video 256 720p workflow examinple 1 aria o
6. S Video A component video signal in which the luminance Y and chrominance C information are separate S VHS videocassette recorders use the S Video format Also called Y C video sync A circuit or signal that directs the electron gun in a camera or TV picture tube to hold a picture steady on the screen It also synchronizes the electronics of other video equipment sync generator An electrical device that generates sync timing signals used to synchronize video equipment and keep pictures stable on the screen T TBC See time base corrector telecine process A process that transfers film negative or positive to SD or HD video tape The telecine process shines a light source through each frame converting the optical images to an electronic signal that is then recorded to video tape temporal redundancy reduction See inter frame compression texture mapping A display technique where bitmaps textures are placed mapped Glossary of terms 290 onto 3D surfaces to make objects look more realistic time base corrector TBC An electronic device that when connected to the output of a VTR corrects the stability and timing of the VTR s playback video This is achieved by stripping the unstable horizontal and vertical sync pulses from the video signal and replacing them with new clean sync pulses time code A sequential code number assigned to successive video frames on tape Each frame has its own time c
7. 4 Apply the Matrox pan amp scan effect to the new sequence 5 Adjust the pan amp scan settings as desired for your entire production For more information about creating nested sequences see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation gt To set up a Matrox pan amp scan effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Pan amp Scan to expand the property list Source Aspect Ratio Use this to select the aspect ratio of your source clip You can click the triangle on the right to expand the list and choose a predefined aspect ratio or use the Source Aspect Ratio slider to select a custom aspect ratio e Destination Aspect Ratio Use this to select the new aspect ratio that you want for your clip You can click the triangle on the right to expand the list and choose a predefined aspect ratio or use the Destination Aspect Ratio slider to select a custom aspect ratio Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 189 Note Ifyou are working in HD your output will always be 16 9 Therefore if you choose 4 3 as your Destination Aspect Ratio your clip will be distorted e Scale Use this to proportionally resize enlarge or reduce your clip Pan Position Lets you move the area of interest at a specific frame in your clip When used with Global View see below you ll see a visual representation of the selected area Enable Global View Select this to display a rectangle around the area of interest that you re sele
8. Matrox Axio Release Notes packaged with this manual About this manual Your notes Chapter 1 Introducing Matrox Axio Installing Your Matrox Axio HD or SD Hardware This chapter describes how to install your Matrox Axio cards for a Matrox Axio HD or SD system 10 Before you install your Matrox Axio card set Read the following information carefully before attempting to install Matrox Axio cards in your computer system Start with a functioning system Before attempting any Matrox Axio installation you should have a computer system with Windows XP Professional fully installed and functioning smoothly This will avoid potential problems later on Avoid costly damage Static electricity from your body can damage your Matrox Axio cards or your computer Although you may not notice it static electricity is generated every time you move It s often too small to cause a spark but it can still cause damage to sensitive electronic components or at least reduce their lifespan To avoid damage please observe the following precautions Do not remove your Matrox Axio cards from their antistatic bags until you re ready to install them Before removing the cards place the packages within easy reach of the area where you intend to perform the installation You should avoid touching the chips and other components on the circuit boards Try to handle the cards by their edges Try to work in an area where the relative humidity
9. ae Ch 2 cO Fa 4 n ON YSYNC gl 750 soi EM OFF OUT Program monitor input Recorder soi Deck 2 7 dN PEEL Typical Matrox Axio HD and SD connections 30 Your notes Chapter 3 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio HD and SD Installing Your Matrox Axio LE Hardware This chapter describes how to install your Matrox Axio LE card 32 Before you install your Matrox Axio LE card Read the following information carefully before attempting to install your Matrox Axio LE card in your computer system Start with a functioning system Before attempting any Matrox Axio LE installation you should have a computer system with Windows XP Professional fully installed and functioning smoothly This will avoid potential problems later on Avoid costly damage Static electricity from your body can damage your Matrox Axio LE card or your computer Although you may not notice it static electricity is generated every time you move It s often too small to cause a spark but it can still cause damage to sensitive electronic components or at least reduce their lifespan To avoid damage please observe the following precautions Do not remove your Matrox Axio LE card from its antistatic bag until you re ready to install it Before removing the card place the package within easy reach of the area where you intend to perform the installation You should avoid touch
10. s authority to operate this equipment The use of shielded cables for connection of equipment and other peripherals to the card is required to meet FCC requirements Canada English Industry Canada Compliance Statement Remark for the Matrox hardware products supported by this guide These digital devices do not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emission from digital devices set out in the Radio Interference Regulation of Industry Canada Francais Conformit avec les exigences du minist re de l Industrie Canada Remarque sur les produits mat riels Matrox couverts par ce guide Ces appareils num riques n mettent aucun bruit radio lectrique d passant les limites applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe A prescrites dans le R glement sur le brouillage radio lectrique dict par Industrie Canada Europe English European user s information Declaration of Conformity Remark for the Matrox hardware products supported by this guide These devices comply with EC Directive 89 336 EEC for a Class A digital device They have been tested and found to comply with EN55022 CISPR22 and EN55024 CISPR24 In a domestic environment these products may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures To meet EC requirements shielded cables must be used to connect equipment and other peripherals to the card These products have been tested in a typical class A compliant host system It is assumed
11. 23 98 fps video set the pixel aspect ratio to 1 185 For PAL video set the pixel aspect ratio to 1 422 If you can t set the pixel aspect ratio create your image at 864x486 for NTSC or 486p 23 98 fps video or at 1024x576 for PAL video After you ve created your image resize only its width to 720 When you resize the image your text or graphic will appear elongated on your computer screen Edit your project as you would a standard 4 3 project Note Beawarethatif your video monitor is displaying in 4 3 format certain effects may appear elongated because of the horizontal scaling Setting your monitor to 16 9 will display the effects with the correct proportions Record your finished project onto tape Remember that you ll need a monitor capable of displaying material in 16 9 format to properly view your master tape Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro This chapter explains how to set up realtime effects using the Matrox realtime plug in for Adobe Premiere Pro 116 Available effects The Matrox realtime plug in for Adobe Premiere Pro lets you Set up spectacular realtime Matrox effects and transitions The plug in includes color corrections chroma keys luma keys 3D DVEs page curls shadows and many more effects Note OnAxioLE certain effects will be available only if you have a display card that supports the Matrox hardware accelerated effects
12. 720p 59 94 fps 720p 59 94 fps 10801 25 fps 10801 25 fps 10801 29 97 fps 10801 29 97 fps HDV 10801 29 97 fps 10801 29 97 fps HDV 10801 25 fps 10801 25 fps 1080p 23 98 fps or 10801 29 97 fps 1080p 24 fps not supported 1080p 25 fps PAL 1080p 23 98 fps 1080p 24 fps 1080p 25 fps Note The analog outputs on Matrox Axio LE can be set to the same format as your main or secondary SDI output If you re working with an SD project or a 1080p 24 fps project however the analog output will be set to the same format as the main SDI output Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows Matrox Axio Specifications This appendix provides specifications for the Matrox Axio cards as well as the X liNKHD and X linkSD breakout boxes 266 X io card General PCI interface Full size PCI X 66 100 MHz card Regulatory compliance FCC Class A CE Mark Class A ACA Class A Nominal card dimensions Card 12 2 x 4 2 Card including bracket 13 875 x 4 9 Overall thickness including components 0 75 Typical operating voltages and current consumption Voltage 3 3V 5V 12V 12V Current 0 26 A 0 5 A 0 05 A 0 0A Total power consumption 4 0 watts Environmental specifications D Minimum maximum card ambient operating temperatures 0 to 55 C Minimum maximum storage temperature 40 to 75 C Maximum altitude for oper
13. Disable accelerated transitions Select this if you d like to disable the realtime accelerated playback of Premiere Pro transitions that support this feature Because Matrox Axio emulates Premiere Pro s non realtime version of these transitions if you don t like the emulation you can disable the accelerated transitions to revert to Premiere Pro s non realtime version that requires rendering Accelerate Motion using Select this if you d like realtime accelerated playback of Premiere Pro Motion effects You can then select one of the following to determine how you want the Motion effects to be processed Matrox move amp scale Maps the Motion effects to the Matrox CPU based move amp scale effect which gives the best results if you only want to create picture in picture effects without rotation If you apply rotation when you set up a Motion effect it will require rendering Matrox 3D DVE Maps the Motion effects to the Matrox hardware accelerated 3D DVE effect which supports rotation The picture however won t be as sharp as when you map the Motion effects Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 73 to the Matrox move amp scale effect On Axio LE you can map to the Matrox 3D DVE effect only if you have a display card that supports the Matrox hardware accelerated effects For more information see Enabling and disabling the Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro on page 229 4 Click
14. For more information see Enabling and disabling the Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro on page 229 Change various effect settings and add or modify keyframes to customize your effects Transform and crop your realtime effects Create realtime graphics overlays using single frame graphics files with an alpha key channel Set up certain Adobe Premiere Pro effects in real time including fades Video Opacity DVEs Motion and Black amp White effects Apply realtime speed changes to video clips Setup many Adobe Premiere Pro transitions in real time when using SD video or accelerate many Adobe Premiere Pro transitions when using HD video Use and modify clips that have Matrox Flex CPU effects applied to them interchangeably between Adobe Premiere Pro and Adobe After Effects For example you can apply a Matrox color correction to your clip in Adobe Premiere Pro and import that clip into Adobe After Effects and vice versa The effect will remain in tact and can be modified in both applications Realtime means that you can play back and record your effects onto tape without having to render them This gives you creative freedom to experiment with different effects and change your mind as often as you want You ll instantly see the changes you make on your video monitor Effects in Adobe Premiere Pro other than those listed above are not realtime and therefore require rendering For guide
15. and double click Device Manager 2 Under Sound video and game controllers double click Video Codecs 3 Click Properties then select one of the Matrox VFW codecs Note All the available Matrox VFW codecs will be listed You can select Matrox VFW Software Codecs to configure all the Matrox DV M JPEG MPEG 2 I frame SD and offline HD codecs 4 Click Properties and then Settings Chapter 10 Using Matrox Axio with Video for Windows Programs 5 In the provided dialog box under Color Space Conversion select the options you want Note Ifan option isn t supported by the particular codec s you are configuring that option will not be available Most options however are common to all the Matrox Video for Windows codecs When these options are set for a particular codec they are also set for the other codecs that support those options Standard Renders video using standard broadcast luminance levels Super black and super white luminance levels are clipped DV compliant Renders video using luminance levels appropriate for DV material This ensures that the super white luminance levels of your video are retained Expanded Renders video using the full range of luminance levels Super black and super white luminance levels are retained You may want to use this setting for example to render material on which you ll be applying luminance key effects Important When rendering RGB graphics selecting Expanded or DV
16. format using the 4 2 2 Profile High Level at a selected data rate Unless you have the Matrox Axio hardware you can use this codec to render to an HDV 10801 1440x1080 29 97 fps or 25 fps file only Chapter 10 Using Matrox Axio with Video for Windows Programs 215 Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Alpha Renders video to MPEG 2 intra frame format with alpha using the 4 2 2 Profile High Level at a selected data rate This codec is supported only on a system that has the Matrox Axio hardware Matrox Uncompressed SD Renders video to 8 bit or 10 bit uncompressed SD format Matrox Uncompressed SD Alpha Renders video to 8 bit or 10 bit uncompressed SD format with alpha Matrox Uncompressed HD Renders video to 8 bit or 10 bit uncompressed HD format Matrox Uncompressed HD Alpha Renders video to 8 bit or 10 bit uncompressed HD format with alpha Matrox Offline HD Renders video to a proxy HD video format for offline editing purposes Note The Matrox M JPEG codec will also be available to create clips for use on Matrox DigiSuite or DigiSuite LE For information about configuring the Matrox M JPEG codec see your Matrox DigiSuite documentation 2 If you ve selected a Matrox codec that requires configuration such as to select a data rate video quality click the Configure button For details see the following sections Configuring the Matrox Uncompressed codecs When you click your program s Configure butt
17. on page 121 Creating an impressionist effect 168 Creating a lens flare effect The Matrox lens flare effect lets you simulate the light refractions caused by shining a bright light into the lens of a camera when taking a photo You can choose from many different lens flare patterns gt To set up a Matrox lens flare effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Lens Flare to expand the property list 7 Ik Matrox Lens Flare e D Light Source Position Center Position Select Shape Global Settings Flare Settings Crop VVVVV Light Source Position X amp Y Position Sets the position of the light source along the horizontal and vertical axes The refractions caused by the light source will move in accordance with its position Z Position Sets the depth of the light source L Tip You can easily adjust the light source position directly in the Program Monitor To do this click the Transform icon iik beside Matrox Lens Flare in the Effect Controls panel A crosshair will appear in the Program Monitor Drag the crosshair to position the light source along the horizontal and vertical axes Center Position X Position Sets the position of the lens flare along the horizontal axis Y Position Sets the position of the lens flare along the vertical axis Select Shape Click the button to the right of the current pattern to see the list of available lens flare patterns Click here to 7 Select Shape select a new pa
18. your input and output formats must also be 1080p 24 fps Note A 1080p 24 fps project can be created and edited on a Matrox Axio HD or LE system only The following diagram illustrates a typical workflow for a 1080p 24 fps project using Matrox Axio Film footage transferred to HD video tape Film footage shot p at 24 fps or e 24 fps animation files video on tape rendered 24 fps Matrox finishing quality HD MPEG 2 I frame HD or Uncompressed HD codec used to capture clips Matrox Axio editing project using any finishing quality 1080p 24 fps project preset Exported to tape as 1080p 24 fps finishing quality HD video for broadcast Other Matrox Axio HD workflows 254 1080i workflow example When working in a 1080i 25 fps or 29 97 fps project you can use HD source video in the same format as your project as well as capture HDV and DVCPRO HD video over the 1394 interface You can export your project to tape in the same format as your project or you can choose to downconvert the video to NTSC or PAL NTSC for a 10801 29 97 fps project or PAL for a 1080i 25 fps project Note Ifyou want to capture and edit only HDV clips you should create an HDV 10801 1440x1080 25 fps or 29 97 fps project An HDV 1080i project provides better editing performance than a full size 10801 1920x 1080 project and supports capturing native HDV material over the 1394 interface and capturing other types of input t
19. 2 D Input Input 8 Output Output 5 Gamma Black White Black White Level Level Level Level Creating a primary color correction 136 Plot Click this button to plot the luminance values in the current frame of your clip to the histogram the plot will reflect any color correction changes you ve made Each luminance value present in your image appears as a vertical line in the histogram A longer line indicates a higher amount of pixels in your image of that line s luminance value You can drag the handles in the graph to adjust the Input and Output levels for black and white as well as the Gamma Map Plot Auto Black Auto White e D Input 2 Input Output Output G Gamma Black White Black White Level Level Level Level Auto Black Click this to define the darkest pixels in your clip as black The intermediate luminance values are proportionally redistributed e Auto White Click this to define the lightest pixels in your clip as white The intermediate luminance values are proportionally redistributed Note Ifyou want to restore the default luminance values at any time click the Restore Default Values button Map Restore Plot Default Values button Auto Black Auto B Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 137 Creating a secondary color correction Matrox secondary color correction offers all the properties found in Matrox primary color correction with the added capabi
20. 2D space while adding soft edges See also DVE Motion JPEG A compression and storage standard used for motion video The JPEG compression process is applied to each video field in succession Also called M JPEG Appendix D Matrox Axio Glossary MP ML Main Profile Main Level An MPEG 2 video compression profile that supports 4 2 0 luminance chrominance sampling at up to 720x576 pixel resolution and data transfer rates up to 15 Mb sec 1 79 MB sec This profile is used for broadcast transmission and distribution on DVD See also 4 2 2P ML MPEG A video compression standard that specifies a series of compression profiles and image resolution levels introduced in 1990 by the Motion Picture Experts Group MPEG takes advantage of the redundancy inherent in video data through a combination of inter frame and intra frame redundancy reduction The MPEG standard supports data transfer rates of up to 1 5 Mb sec 0 2 MB sec Also called MPEG 1 See also MPEG 2 inter frame IBP compression and intra frame I frame compression MPEG 1 See MPEG MPEG 2 A video compression standard that improves upon the MPEG standard by supporting data rates of up to 100 Mb sec 12 MB sec scalable modes field or frame searching and much larger screen sizes See also intra frame I frame compression inter frame IBP compression 4 2 2P ML and MP ML MPEG 2 IBP An MPEG 2 compression type that uses inter frame compression to create a g
21. 75 Y C Video 1 Luminance signal Y 1 0 Vp 75 Q Chrominance signal PAL 0 300 Vp burst 75 C NTSC 0 286 V burst 75 NTSC EIAJ 0 286 V p burst 75 Component Video 1 Luminance signal Y 1 0 Vp 75 0 Chrominance signal PAL 0 700 V pat 100 color bar 75 Q B Y R Y NTSC 0 700 V at 75 color bar 75 NTSC EIAJ 0 757 V p p at 75 color 75 bar SDI Video 1 Compliant with SMPTE 259M 75 Q 1394 1 200 mV 110 0 Audio input output signals Analog balanced 1 stereo input pair Input impedance High impedance Nominal levels 4 dBu 18 dB headroom Analog balanced 1 stereo output pair Output impedance 500 Nominal levels 4 dBu 18 dB headroom Gain boost available 110 Q Analog unbalanced 1 stereo input pair Input impedance High impedance Nominal levels 10 dBV 18 dB headroom Analog unbalanced signal 1 stereo output pair Output impedance 100 Q Nominal levels 10 dBV 18 dB headroom X linkSD breakout box 270 Audio specifications Sampling frequency 48 kHz using 64x oversampling Quantization 24 bits Environmental specifications D Minimum maximum X linkSD ambient operating temperatures 0 to 35 C Minimum maximum storage temperature 40 to 75 C Maximum altitude for operation 3 000 meters Maximum altitude for transport 12 000 meters Operating humidity 20 to 80 relative humidity non condensing Storage humidity 5 to 95 relative humidity non condensing Important To avoid
22. Auto Balance To adjust the luminance for a tonal range drag the corresponding luminance slider under the appropriate color map For example if you want to adjust the Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 131 luminance for only the Shadows drag the luminance slider under the Shadows color map Luminance slider Creating a primary color correction 132 Performing an auto balance Before matching colors you can perform an auto balance on your target clip to automatically apply a color shift to your clip to compensate for different lighting conditions To do this click the Auto Balance button under the corresponding color map and use the eyedropper to select the area you want to correct in your clip For example to balance your clip s highlights click the Auto Balance button under the Highlights color map and click or click and drag on the lightest area of your clip The auto balance is performed immediately HighLights i E Reference Match xc IB e Auto Balance Auto Balance button Z Note To perform an auto white balance click the Auto White Balance button under the Master color map and click or click and drag on a white or light gray area of your clip Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 133 Matching colors between two clips You can perform a color match to match colors between two clips such as skin tone sky etc The color match lets
23. Axio LE 41 Attaching the rubber feet to X linkLE You can use the adhesive rubber feet provided with the X linkLE breakout box if you d like to mount the breakout box on your desktop To do this peel the rubber feet from their adhesive backing sheet and attach them to the corresponding round indentations at the corners on the bottom of the breakout box e Adhesive rubber foot x4 X linkLE breakout box partial view Note If you later choose to mount your X linkLE breakout box to a standard 19 rack using the rackmount brackets as explained in the following section the breakout box may not fit in the rack unless you remove the adhesive rubber feet Attaching the rackmount brackets to X linkLE You can use the supplied rackmount brackets to mount your X linkLE breakout box to a standard 19 rack 1 Unpack the two rackmount brackets and their eight mounting screws Caution Use only the screws supplied with your Matrox Axio LE kit to attach the rackmount brackets to your X linkLE breakout box If you use screws that are larger or longer than the ones supplied you can damage your equipment 2 With the rackmount brackets positioned so that the bracket face is towards the front of the X linkLE breakout box align the screw holes on each Attaching the rubber feet to X linkLE 42 rackmount bracket with their respective screw holes on either end of the X linkLE breakout box X linkLE breakout box partial view Rackmou
24. Drag these cursors to position the corners of your clip Edge Softness Lets you apply softness to the edges of your clip If your clip is skewed you may get more desirable results using the Skewed Edge Softness control Skewed Edge Softness If you altered your clip so that the perspective is skewed you should use this option to apply softness to the edges of your clip D Important Edge Softness is not supported on clips where any corner is positioned beyond the boundaries of another corner In order for the Edge Softness to work correctly your clip should be a flat plane with four visible corners Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 151 Preview Settings You can select the following options for previewing your effect Show Cursors Displays a diamond shaped cursor at each corner of your clip on your video monitor only These cursors can help you precisely determine where each corner is located Each corner has a different colored cursor as follows Top Left Red Top Right Green Bottom Left Blue Bottom Right Orange Show Color Frame Only Displays a semi transparent shape that represents the clip to which you are applying the 4 corner pin effect This is useful if you re positioning an alpha keyed title for example and you need to see the edges of the clip Colo
25. For example if you capture 10801 25 fps video for use in a 1080p 25 fps project the clips are converted to 1080p 25 fps when they are copied to disk Therefore some undesirable results may appear in the clips when effects are applied to source video that was different than the project s video format It s recommended that you use a source video format that is the same as the project s video format The following diagram illustrates a typical workflow for mixing 1080p 25 fps and 1080i 25 fps material using Matrox Axio Video footage shot Video footage as shot as 1080p 25 fps 1080i 25 fps Matrox finishing quality 1080p 25 fps video on tape or Uncompressed HD codec used to capture clips Matrox Axio editing project using any HD isse o finishing quality from mxf files 1080p 25 fps imported to ay project 1080i 25 fps project preset HD MPEG 2 I frame HD 1080i 25 fps video on tape 2 2 ios as Exported to disk p ps or such as to an 1080i 25 fps Exported to tape as PAL MPEG 2 file for finishing quality video finishing quality video DVD authoring or for broadcast output for broadcast a Matrox avi or format matches project s format Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows mxf file 257 720p workflow example Matrox Axio supports creating 720p projects at 23 98 fps 25 fps 29 97 fps 50 fps and 59 94 fps The compression formats that you can capture and export depend on y
26. High Clip This control is similar to Low Gain except you use it to select the higher saturation values to be keyed Note The values you can select using the Low Clip and Low Gain controls are dependent on the High Clip and High Gain controls and vice versa This prevents the low and high controls from keying on the same values e Luma Key This type of key lets you select areas to be keyed affected by the color correction based on their luminance value Enable Select this to enable the Luma Key properties and luma key indicator in the selective key graph Low Clip Use this to select the lower darker luminance values to be keyed A Low Clip setting of 0 represents black and a setting of 255 represents white Intermediate settings represent different shades of gray from very dark to very light gray Low Gain Use this to set the range of luminance values you want to be partially affected based on the value set by the Low Clip control As you increase the Low Gain setting more luminance values become partially affected by the color correction A Low Gain setting of 100 provides the widest range for maximum color correction Alternately a gain setting of 0 creates a key where the luminance values are either completely affected or left untouched You can think of the Low Gain control as defining an Affected to Untouched range for keying the dark areas of your image High Gain This control is similar to Low Gain e
27. Light Color Use the color picker button or eyedropper to select the ambient color of light for your entire clip Show Light Cursors Select this option to see the reference point of the two light sources to help you set up your lights Remember to clear this option when you re finished setting up your effect First Light Enable Select this to enable the first light Color Use the color picker button or the eyedropper to select the color of your first light First Light Pattern Allows you to select the first light pattern Click the button on the right to see the list of available patterns XPosition Sets the position of the first light along the horizontal axis Y Position Sets the position of the first light along the vertical axis Z Position Sets the depth of the first light Relative Position Selecting this option makes the first light source position relative to the center of your clip For example if you move your clip the first light will move with it By default the position of the first light is relative to the center of the screen Second Light Enable Select this to enable the second light Color Use the color picker button or the eyedropper to select the color of your second light Second Light Pattern Allows you to select the second light pattern Click the button on the right to see the list of available patterns X Position Sets the position of the second light along the horizontal axis Y Position
28. MPEG 2 I frame HD click the Configure button to select your MPEG 2 I frame settings For details on the available settings see Selecting your MPEG 2 I frame settings on page 105 From the Pixel Aspect Ratio list select the setting that matches the aspect ratio of your material D1 DV NTSC 0 9 For NTSC or 486p 23 98 fps material that uses the standard TV screen format If you re downconverting HD video to NTSC format the video will be exported in letterbox mode Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings D1 DV Widescreen 16 9 1 2 For NTSC or 486p 23 98 fps material that uses the widescreen 16 9 format If you re downconverting HD video to NTSC format the video will be exported as anamorphic horizontally compressed 4 3 video D1 DV PAL 1 067 For PAL material that uses the standard TV screen format If you re downconverting HD video to PAL format the video will be exported in letterbox mode D1 DV PAL Widescreen 16 9 1 422 For PAL material that uses the widescreen 16 9 format If you re downconverting HD video to PAL format the video will be exported as anamorphic horizontally compressed 4 3 video Square pixels 1 0 For all HD material except HDV 10801 that is not downconverted HD Anamorphic 1080 1 333 For all HDV 10801 material that is not downconverted It s recommended that you do not select Recompress This retains the quality of your video It also optimiz
29. Matrox crystallize shadow mask mask blur mask mosaic or shine effect the transform settings will apply only to your mask or shadow and not the entire clip Using the transform controls To apply various transform settings to your clip using the transform controls in the Effect Controls panel click the triangle next to the Transform property to expand it v You can enter the values you want in the text boxes or drag the appropriate sliders X Y Z Position Use these controls to position your clip on the x horizontal y vertical and z depth axes Values of 0 0 0 pixels align the center of your clip with the center of the screen and positions are measured from this point You can enter positive or negative pixel values to move your clip right or left x up or down y and forward or backward z Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 119 X Y Scale Use these controls to make your clip smaller or larger Full screen size is represented as 100 You can shrink your clip to 0 or enlarge it to 100096 Note however that by enlarging your clip the resolution may become blurry You can adjust the size controls individually or if you select Fixed Aspect Ratio you only need to adjust the x axis Adjusting the percentage on the x and y axes changes your clip s width and height respectively Note Some effects like Matrox surface finish include a Z Scale property that allows you to ad
30. Sets the position of the second light along the vertical axis Z Position Sets the depth of the second light Relative Position Selecting this option will make the second light source relative to the center of your clip For example if you move your clip the second light source will move with it By default the second light source is relative to the center of the screen Transform Allows you to apply or change various transform settings such as to change your clip s size position and rotation to create a rotating slab Creating a surface finish effect 200 Note The transform properties for the surface finish effect include a Seale Z property that allows you to adjust the thickness of your slab For more information about using the other transform properties see Transforming your clip on page 118 D Important If you are working in HD the surface finish effect may require rendering based on certain setting combinations Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 201 Creating a track matte effect The Matrox track matte effect lets you superimpose one clip onto another using an animated matte sometimes called a traveling matte to determine how the two clips are composited keyed You can use any of the following types of clips as your matte A grayscale video or graphics clip A graphics clip or graphics sequence with an alpha channel e Any clip to which you ve applied an effect that provide
31. Transform D Border Settings D Crop Transform icon Note When working with some effects the Transform icon lets you manipulate your clip directly in the Program Monitor to set up your effect instead of adjusting transform settings as explained in this section To activate the transform controls in the Program Monitor click the Transform icon or the name of the Matrox effect in the Effect Controls panel The direct manipulation mode buttons will appear in the upper left corner of the Program Monitor Precision Mode Position Scale Rotation Rotation Center Offset Select the transform setting you want to adjust by clicking the appropriate button Position Scale Rotation or Rotation Center Offset Precision Mode is available only in the Program Monitor and allows you to make precise adjustments with the currently selected transform setting The following table shows the available mouse controls for working in the Program Monitor Action Result Left mouse button Adjusts x and y axes SHIFT left mouse button drag left or right Adjusts x axis only SHIFT left mouse button drag up or down Adjusts y axis only CTRL left mouse button drag up or down Adjusts z axis only For example if you want to alter the position of your clip on the y axis only first click the Position button then press and hold SHIFT while dragging the mouse up or down in the Program Monitor Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premier
32. be added to your Adobe Premiere Pro s Plug ins folder on your hard drive Therefore if you later re install Adobe Premiere Pro to a different directory you ll need to un install and re install Matrox Axio utils Chapter 6 Installing Your Matrox Axio Software 53 Installing other third party programs There are a number of programs for which you can choose to install a Matrox WYSIWYG What You See Is What You Get plug in that lets you see your work directly on your video monitor For example the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in for Adobe After Effects lets you display the contents of your composition on your video monitor to see the exact color temperature safe title area and any interlaced artifacts as you work The following programs are supported Adobe After Effects version 5 0 or later Adobe Photoshop version 7 0 or later Autodesk 3ds Max version 7 0 or later Autodesk Combustion version 4 or later eyeon Fusion version 4 or later NewTek LightWave 3D version 7 5 or later If you have any of these programs you should install them now so that you ll be able to install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in for them when you install Matrox Axio utils You can however install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in for a program at any time after installing Axio utils as explained in the section Installing additional Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins or removing unneeded plug ins on page 55 Note When you install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in
33. bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD project DV 1394 and SDI input DVCPRO HD DV 1394 input only HDV SDI input only 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD Offline HD Playback DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame Legacy Matrox DigiSuite and RT series files DVCPRO HD HDV 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD Offline HD Export to disk DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame DVCPRO HD 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD Offline HD Render previews DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame DVCPRO HD Offline HD 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD DV 1394 export to tape DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPROSO DVCPRO HD HDV DVCPRO HD is supported only for 1080i and 720p projects DV 1394 capture is not supported for 720p 25 fps and 50 fps projects DV 1394 export to DVCPRO HD is supported only for 1080i and 720p 59 94 fps projects HDV is supported only for 1080i HDV 10801 and 720p projects DV 1394 export to HDV is not supported for 720p projects SDI input is not supported for 720p 23 98 fps 25 fps and 29 97 fps projects When working with an HDV 1080i 1440x1080 project MPEG 2 I frame HD is the only supported compression format for capturing SDI video exporting to disk and rendering previews Realt
34. button to configure your MPEG 2 I frame settings For details on the available settings see Selecting your MPEG 2 I frame settings on page 105 Once you ve configured your settings click OK to return to the Matrox Capture Settings dialog box If you re capturing Panasonic VariCam material select Enable VariCam capture supported only for a 720p 23 98 fps or 25 fps project Matrox Axio will remove the redundant filler frames from the VariCam input during capture and create a clip in the same format as your project for editing Important When you select Enable VariCam capture audio cannot be captured When batch capturing VariCam clips you must indicate that you want to capture video only by selecting Video on the Logging pane of the Capture panel under Setup Otherwise your captured clips will appear as offline Defining your Capture settings 94 11 12 13 Select Use Automatic Gain Control AGC if you want the gain of your composite or S Video input signal to be adjusted automatically to compensate for very bright or dark images This improves the brightness or contrast of your picture Available when capturing from X linkSD or X linkLE only Select Broadcast quality Source if your analog source device is broadcast quality such as a device with a built in time base corrector TBC This allows Matrox Axio to digitize the input signal as is Make sure you clear this option if your source device doesn t have a TBC o
35. colors modifying using the chroma key graph 157 L Lens flare effect creating 168 Letterbox selecting for exported video 100 101 selecting for video output 74 77 79 License agreement i LightWave 3D WYSIWYG plug in See NewTek LightWave 3D WYSIWYG plug in Luma key effect creating 171 overview 170 using the luma key graph 172 Luma key graph using 172 Luma mapping graph using 135 Index 300 Luminance range settings for rendering to VFW files 213 M M2V files exporting using Matrox Media Encoder 110 Main SDI output format selecting for X linkLE 78 supported on Matrox Axio LE 264 Mask applying to effect 123 applying using Select Mask 124 Mask blur effect creating 176 Mask effect creating 174 Mask mosaic effect creating 178 Master output format selecting for X linkHD 74 selecting for X linkSD 76 supported on Matrox Axio HD 263 supported on Matrox Axio SD 263 Matrox contacting us 294 WWW site 294 Matrox 10 bit Uncompressed codec selecting for capture 93 selecting for export to disk 100 using for HD video 249 workflow example 249 Matrox 8 bit Uncompressed codec selecting for capture 93 selecting for export to disk 100 using for HD video 249 workflow example 249 Matrox Axio customer support 294 glossary 280 key features 2 monitoring using X info 226 realtime guidelines 207 Index registration 294 specifications 265 Matrox Axio card set before you install 10 installing 17 Matrox
36. completed the installation of your Axio hardware and turned on your computer the LED display on the backplate of your X effects card will light up to indicate that the internal power supply is properly connected Replace your computer s cover Chapter 2 Installing Your Matrox Axio HD or SD Hardware 19 Connect the external power supply to your X effects card If you re using the external power supply for your X effects card a 12 volt DC external power supply is included with your Matrox Axio kit 1 Connect the male connector of your external power supply to the female power connector of your X effects card X effects card External power supply male connector 2s Q Mf 2 Attach an AC outlet cord to the external power supply and plug the cord into an AC outlet this cord is not supplied with Matrox Axio D Important You must plug your external power supply cord into an AC wall outlet If your computer s power supply has an external power connector you must not use this connector for your X effect card s external power supply When you ve completed the installation of your Axio hardware and turned on your computer an LED display on the backplate of your X effects card will light up indicating that the external power supply is properly connected Before restarting your computer You must connect your external devices such as X link breakout box VTRs DV camcorder etc before attempting to restart
37. compliant will create super black and or white in your rendered images For example if you select Expanded all black in your RGB graphics will become super black and white will become super white To render your RGB graphics with standard black and white levels set your luminance range to Standard Chroma filtering and Chroma interpolation Select these options to adjust the chroma bandwidth of RGB graphics This improves images that have abrupt changes between different colors such as a blue box on a black or white background You should select these options for most animation and compositing work computer generated material For most video editing programs however it s best that you not select these options If you find that your rendered images appear to be blurred try clearing one or both of these options 213 Before you start rendering 214 Chroma sampling for fast motion video Select this option to help eliminate artifacts such as jagged edges and unwanted lines at the edges of fast motion video for PAL video only Important When rendering graphics and titles make sure that Chroma sampling for fast motion video is not selected as this option can cause jagged edges to appear in your rendered images 6 Click OK to save your settings Any change you make to your selected luminance range setting such as switching from Standard to Expanded will only take effect the next time you start your VFW program Rendering
38. connector on your computer Using the X linkLE S Video adapter cables To support S Video Y C connections to your X linkLE breakout box your Axio LE kit includes two S Video adapter cables one for S Video input and one for S Video output A Note When you connect an S Video device to the X linkLE breakout box you won t be able to connect an analog component device at the same time 1 For S Video input connect the S Video adapter cable labeled Y to the Pb Y IN connector and connect the S Video adapter cable labeled C to the Pr C IN connector at the front of the X linkLE breakout box 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the S Video OUT connector on your source device Connect your X linkLE 1394 cable to your computer 46 To S Video OUT connector on source device f J X linkLE S Video adapter cable ig AA X linkLE breakout im box partial view i Le 7 matrox Y CVBSIN Pb YIN Pr CIN O wo IN V2 9 DIGITAL AUDIO AES EBU of 3 OUTI OUT2 1394 75 OHM OUT 1 2 OUT 3 4QUT 5 6 Y CVBS OUT Pb Y OUT Pr C OUT CVBS OUT 3 For S Video output connect the S Video adapter cable labeled Y to the Pb Y OUT connector and connect the S Video adapter cable labeled C to the Pr C OUT connector at the front of the X linkLE breakout box 4 Connect the other end of the cable to the S Video IN connector on your record device
39. effect Source 1 Lets you select the unique ID number that you assigned to the first additional video source Source 2 Lets you select the unique ID number that you assigned to the second additional video source Cube Options Face Edge Softness Sets the amount of softness to apply to the cube face edges Cube Edge Softness Sets the amount of softness to apply to the outside edges of the cube Depth Sets the depth of the cube Highlight Color Sets the color that is used for highlights Highlight Intensity Sets the brightness of the highlight Shadow Color Sets the color that is used for shadows Shadow Intensity Sets the darkness of the shadow RGB Cube Sets all six cube faces to display a predetermined RGB color front red back green left blue rightzyellow top cyan bottom violet Since color shows highlight and shadow better than video this option is useful for viewing the results when you adjust the highlight and shadow settings Show Light Direction Displays a three dimensional arrow that gives a visual representation of the light direction that you can use as a viewing aid while adjusting the light rotation The arrow is white when the light is directed away from you and gets progressively darker as the light direction rotates towards you Make sure you clear this option before exporting your final project X Light Rotation Rotates the light along the x axis Y Light Rot
40. find it useful to clear this option when using certain wipe patterns For example nonlinear softness often provides better results when creating SMPTE wipes while linear softness is usually preferable when creating organic wipes Amount Lets you adjust the amount of softness by dragging the slider or entering a percentage in the text box The higher the value the less sharp the edge of your border or wipe will become Reset Click this button at any time to restore the default Softness values 4 Use the controls under Preview to preview your wipe transition Drag the slider beside the Play button to scrub through your transition Click the Play button or press the SPACEBAR to play back your transition Select Loop if you d like the wipe to play back continuously until you click Stop You can adjust the wipe settings as your transition is playing to immediately see the result of your changes 5 Use the controls under Presets to save and load your wipe transition settings You can also create default settings for your wipe transitions Save Allows you to save your organic wipe settings to a file for future use When you click the Save button the Save As dialog box opens and allows you to name your effect and save it as a Matrox wipe transition mwt file Load Click this button to load a previously created mwt file Setas Default Sets your current wipe settings as the default settings for Matrox wipe transi
41. for Matrox Axio HD and SD depending on your project s video format Project video format NTSC Supported master output formats on Matrox Axio HD NTSC Supported master output formats on Matrox Axio SD PAL PAL 486p 23 98 fps NTSC 720p 23 98 fps 720p 59 94 fps or NTSC 720p 25 fps 720p 50 fps or PAL 720p 29 97 fps 720p 59 94 fps or NTSC 720p 50 fps 720p 50 fps or PAL 720p 59 94 fps 720p 59 94 fps or NTSC 10801 25 fps 10801 25 fps or PAL 1080i 29 97 fps 10801 29 97 fps or NTSC HDV 10801 29 97 fps 10801 29 97 fps or NTSC HDV 10801 25 fps 10801 25 fps or PAL 1080p 23 98 fps 1080p 23 98 fps 1080i 29 97 fps or NTSC 1080p 24 fps 1080p 24 fps not supported 1080p 25 fps 1080p 25 fps or PAL PAL Supported master output formats on Matrox Axio HD and SD 264 Supported main and secondary SDI output formats on Matrox Axio LE The following table lists the supported main and secondary SDI output formats for Matrox Axio LE depending on your project s video format Supported main SDI output formats Project video NTSC Supported secondary SDI output formats PAL 486p 23 98 fps 720p 23 98 fps 720p 59 94 fps 720p 25 fps 720p 50 fps 720p 29 97 fps 720p 59 94 fps 720p 50 fps 720p 50 fps
42. for a program Matrox plug in files will be added to a folder for that program on your hard drive Therefore if you later re install the program to a different folder you ll need to also re install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in Installing other third party programs 54 Installing Matrox Axio utils 1 Insert your Matrox Axio installation DVD in your DVD ROM drive Windows automatically starts the Matrox Axio menu matrox de Digitet Video Solutions 2 From the Matrox Axio menu choose Install Matrox Axio utils 3 If any of your Matrox Axio hardware needs a firmware update the updater will be launched automatically at this point Once completed the Axio utils install will continue Follow the onscreen instructions to install Matrox Axio utils on your computer You ll be prompted to install the Matrox effect patterns GFX files for selected video formats For example you can choose to install the SD NTSC and HD 1080 patterns only You ll also be prompted to install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins for any supported programs that are currently installed on your system Note Some versions of LightWave 3D may not be automatically detected by the Setup program If this happens click Browse to select the folder where you installed LightWave 3D If required the Setup program will restart your computer when you click OK Note The first time you install Matrox Axio utils on an Axio LE system the Matrox GPU Performance An
43. for currently installed patterns that you want to be removed Installing additional Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins or removing unneeded plug ins When you install Matrox Axio utils you are prompted to install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins for any supported programs that are currently installed on your system If after you ve installed Matrox Axio utils you want to install additional Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins or re install or remove a currently installed plug in you can run the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug ins Setup program by choosing Install Matrox WYSIWYG Plug ins from the Matrox Axio menu You ll be prompted to specify which plug ins you want to install re install or remove For more information about the programs supported and required settings see Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug ins on page 219 Adding the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in to NewTek LightWave 3D 56 Note To install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in for a program you must first install that program Installing the Matrox VFW software codecs on a system without the Axio hardware The Matrox VFW software codecs let you render compile and play back Axio compatible avi files in your Video for Windows programs without having the Matrox Axio hardware installed in your computer Remarks If you have the Matrox Axio hardware you do not need to install the VFW software codecs because Matrox Axio utils installs all the required Matrox codecs on your system If you have a previous version of t
44. format is 720p 225 fps the created avi file will be named demo MPEG 2 I frame 720p Q25 avi You re able to create HD and SD avi files with alpha in Matrox uncompressed or MPEG 2 I frame format gt To create an avi file with alpha from a tga sequence 1 In Windows Explorer right click the selected tga file s choose Matrox AVI Alpha gt Select Format and then click the desired avi output video format such as 1080p 23 98 fps A Note Formats that are not supported by your Matrox Axio hardware are identified with an asterisk in the list If you create an avi file using an unsupported format it will not play back in real time on your Axio system 2 Right click the selected tga file s and choose Matrox AVI Alpha gt Configure Note Once set the output format and configuration settings apply to all subsequent tga sequences that you convert to avi files If however you select an HDV 1080i output format the compressor for the tga to avi conversion will automatically be set to Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Alpha Configure Matrox AVI Alpha Compressor Matrox MPEG 2 I frame Alpha Destination Folder Browse Same Folder as TGA MV Overwrite existing File OK Cancel Chapter 7 Working with mxf and avi files 63 3 From the Compressor list select the compression format you want for your avi file Note The compression formats that are available in the Compressor list depend on
45. frame rate to 25 fps Setthe frame size of your rendered material to full screen 720 x 480 if you are rendering to NTSC or 486p 23 98 fps format using the DV DVCAM DVCPRO DVCPROS0 or MPEG 2 I frame codec with or without alpha 720x576 if you are rendering to PAL format using the DV DVCAM DVCPRO DVCPROS50 or MPEG 2 I frame codec with or without alpha 720x486 or 720 x 576 if you are rendering to Matrox uncompressed SD or Matrox M JPEG format 1920x1080 or 1280x720 if you are rendering to uncompressed HD or DVCPRO HD format 1440x1080 1920x1080 or 1280x720 if you are rendering to MPEG 2 I frame HD format 480x270 or 320x180 if you are rendering to offline HD format If you re rendering clips for use in an Adobe Premiere Pro project on Matrox Axio set the frame size to 480x270 for an HDV 10801 10801 or 1080p project or 320x180 for a 720p project For more information see Using the Matrox Offline HD codec on page 240 To render video using the same compression format frame size and frame rate as your source video but using a different video quality data rate Using VFW programs without the Axio hardware 212 scanning mode interlaced or progressive or bit depth 8 bit or 10 bit such as to export uncompressed 10801 29 97 fps clips to uncompressed 1080p 29 97 fps format you must select the Recompress Always option so that your video will be recompressed during the export e I
46. in Alpha versions that let you render compositions to an avi file that includes the alpha key information For details see Chapter 10 Using Matrox Axio with Video for Windows Programs Using the Matrox Offline HD codec The Matrox Offline HD codec allows you to capture HD video at a low resolution and at a low data rate less than 7 Mb sec for use in your Premiere Pro projects When you use these clips on your Matrox Axio system they are scaled to full screen size for previewing on your HD monitor or when they are exported to tape On a system without Matrox Axio hardware the offline HD clips appear as low resolution clips Matrox offline HD clips and full resolution HD clips can be combined on the same timeline You can use the Matrox Offline HD codec to capture material that will be used on a remote editing station such as a laptop computer where large storage devices may not be available or as convenient In this case you capture HD clips with your Matrox Axio system using the Matrox Offline HD codec and then transfer the low resolution clips to your remote editing station Once the HD project is complete you can copy the Premiere Pro project file to your Axio system and recapture only the clips you use in your project at full HD resolution Creating your offline edit To create an offline edit of your HD project you must use your Matrox Axio system to capture your HD material at low resolution using the Matrox Offline HD co
47. in Adobe Premiere Pro 105 selecting in VFW programs 216 Video Rendering settings in Adobe Premiere Pro 90 Voice over adding to sequence 107 connection and setup 107 recording 108 Index 306 VU meters 97 W Warnings displaying in Adobe Premiere Pro s Events panel 67 displaying with X info 230 Warranty i WAV files capturing using Adobe Premiere Pro 95 exporting using Adobe Premiere Pro 101 Widescreen format editing SD material on Matrox Axio 114 Windows Explorer displaying details for clips 59 Wipe transitions creating 204 Workflows for Matrox Axio 236 WWW site 294 WYSIWYG Control Panel See Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel WYSIWYG plug ins See Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins X X effects card connecting external power supply 19 connecting internal power supply cable 16 installing 18 setting power selection switch 15 specifications 267 X info error notification 230 hardware information 228 hardware accelerated effects on Axio LE 229 monitoring Adobe Premiere Pro memory usage 226 monitoring temperatures 229 system information 226 using 226 Index X io card connecting internal power supply cable 14 installing 17 specifications 266 X link cable attaching ferrite beads 24 X linkHD breakout box connecting to computer 25 description 22 digital video connections 26 mounting 22 specifications 271 See also Breakout box X linkLE breakout box analog component connections 47 connecting 1394 cable to computer 45 conne
48. installing 54 installing additional formats 55 removing unneeded formats 55 Matrox EZ MXF creating reference AVI files 60 Matrox GPU Performance Analyzer running on Axio LE 55 Matrox hardware accelerated effects 207 enabling disabling on Axio LE 229 Matrox IMX codec selecting for export to disk 104 Matrox Media Encoder 110 Matrox MPEG 2 I frame Alpha codec configuring for VFW render 216 selecting for VFW render 214 Matrox MPEG 2 I frame codec configuring for VFW render 216 configuring in Adobe Premiere Pro 105 selecting for capture 93 301 selecting for export to disk 100 selecting for VFW render 214 Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Alpha codec configuring for VFW render 216 selecting for VFW render 215 Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec configuring for VFW render 216 configuring in Adobe Premiere Pro 105 description of 239 selecting for capture 93 selecting for export to disk 100 selecting for VFW render 214 using 247 workflow example for offline editing 247 workflow example for online editing 248 Matrox Offline HD codec description of 239 selecting for capture 93 selecting for export to disk 100 selecting for VFW render 215 using 240 workflow examples 244 See also Offline HD project Matrox Uncompressed HD Alpha codec configuring for VFW render 215 selecting for VFW render 215 Matrox Uncompressed HD codec configuring for VFW render 215 description of 240 selecting for VFW render 215 using 249 workflow example 249 Matrox Un
49. key An effect that makes parts of a foreground image fully or partially transparent based on alpha transparency values stored within the image s file so that an underlying image can show through See also chroma key and luma key analog component video See component video analog signal A video or audio signal that varies continuously as opposed to a digital signal which varies only by fixed steps anti aliasing A technique that smooths jagged edges in computer generated text or graphics aspect ratio A width to height ratio For example a 12 by 9 inch image has an aspect ratio of 4 3 four to three Most TV screens have a 4 3 aspect ratio HDTV screens have a 16 9 aspect ratio assemble editing Recording new video and audio material sequentially onto tape Because all the signals are recorded video audio and control track the new material completely replaces any previously recorded material on the tape See also insert editing AMI Audio Video Interleaved A video file format designed for the Microsoft Windows environment See also codec A V drive A hard drive capable of storing high bandwidth audio video data B B frame Bi directional frame A frame created during the MPEG or MPEG 2 IBP compression process A B frame is generated by forwards and backwards referencing of the P frames and I frames respectively which allows it to have the highest compression ratio of the three frame types B frames contain
50. material to a Matrox VFW avi file When you render material to an avi file such as when you render a finished video production or an animation you must select the compressor codec you want to create the file The compressor determines the quality of your rendered video Refer to your program s documentation for instructions on how to select a compressor for your avi file To create a Matrox Video for Windows avi file select the Matrox codec you want to use from your program s list of available compressors gt To create a Matrox Video for Windows avi file 1 Select one of the following codecs from your program s list of available compressors Matrox DV DVCAM Renders video to DV or DVCAM format Matrox DVCPRO Renders video to DVCPRO format Matrox DVCPROBO Renders video to DVCPROSO or D 9 format Matrox DVCPROHD Renders video to DVCPRO HD format for 10801 and 720p video only This codec is supported only on a system that has the Matrox Axio hardware Matrox MPEG 2I frame Renders video to MPEG 2 intra frame format using the 4 2 2 Profile Main Level at a selected data rate SD resolution only Matrox MPEG 2 I frame Alpha Renders video to MPEG 2 intra frame format with alpha using the 4 2 2 Profile Main Level at a selected data rate SD resolution only This codec is supported only on a system that has the Matrox Axio hardware Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Renders video to MPEG 2 intra frame
51. minus eye droppers Auto Key BRE Plus and minus eyedroppers For example if you selected light red as your auto key color and would like a dark red color in your clip to be included in the auto key you can use the plus eyedropper to select that dark red in your clip To remove colors from your auto key use the minus eyedropper Note The Show Key mode and any color correction applied will be temporarily deactivated in the Program Monitor when using an eyedropper Creating a secondary color correction 146 This allows you to see the original colors of your clip before any modifications were made Indicator Click this button to turn the indicator lines on or off Handles Click this button to turn the handles for the indicator lines on or off Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 147 Creating a color pass effect You can use the Matrox secondary color correction to create a color pass effect to convert your clip to black and white with the exception of one specified color This can be useful if you want to isolate a single color to make it prominent In the following example the pink color of the girl s shirt has been retained while the rest of the clip has been converted to black and white Pink shirt is isolated while the rest of clip is grayscale gt To perform a color pass effect 1 Click the Auto Key eyedropper in the selective key graph and click and drag anywhere on y
52. on page 56 Note If you have a Matrox RT X2 system you can use it as a remote editing workstation for your Matrox Axio offline HD projects instead of creating a VFW project as explained in this section Any project that has a format supported by RT X2 such as an HDV 1080i 25 fps or 29 97 fps project can be opened on Matrox RT X2 and the offline HD clips will be supported in real time For more information about this feature see your Matrox RT X2 User Guide To create a VFW project that will allow you to use the offline HD clips that you create on Matrox Axio you must use the following project settings 1080i or HDV 10801 720p Axio project Axio project Frame Size 480x270 480x270 320x180 VFW General 1080p Project Settings Axio project 23 976 fps 24 fps or 25 fps or 29 97 fps 23 976 fps 25 fps Timebase 25 fps 29 97 fps 50 fps or 59 94 fps Pixel Aspect Ratio Square pixels 1 0 Square pixels 1 0 Square pixels 1 0 Fields No Fields Upper Field First No Fields Using the Matrox Offline HD codec 242 gt To create your VFW offline HD project on a remote editing workstation 1 Open a new Adobe Premiere Pro project by choosing File New Project and from the New Project dialog box click the Custom Settings tab 2 On the Custom Settings page make sure that General is selected and using the settings in the table above set the appropriate Premiere Pro General settings for the type of project that you
53. only predictive data that is not enough data to make up an entire picture and therefore cannot be edited independently BIOS Basic Input Output System settings for system components peripherals etc This information is stored in a special battery powered memory and is usually accessible for changes at computer start up bitmap A graphics image in which a set of values defines each pixel s relative brightness and color black level The level of brightness at which no light is emitted from the screen reference black The standard black level is 7 5 IRE for NTSC video or 0 IRE for NTSC EIAJ Japan and PAL video Also called setup NTSC video only See also white level super black and super white 281 Blue Book standard See DV blur soft focus effect A Matrox effect that uses various levels of intensity to blur an image or simulate camera defocus bus A shared set of hardware lines that lets different parts of your computer transfer information between one another A card inserted into an expansion slot of your computer makes an electrical connection to the bus and effectively becomes part of your computer system C capture The process of digitizing video or audio material usually from a VTR or camera and storing it in a file on a hard disk chroma key An effect that makes portions of a foreground image fully or partially transparent based on the color of that image so that an underlying image can show t
54. or second field to eliminate the flickering that can be seen in your picture when you pause while scrubbing frames of interlaced video Scrubbing fields can also be used to check for any dropped fields that may have occurred in your video during a telecine process Note Ifyou choose to scrub fields when working with progressive scan video you won t normally see a difference between scrubbing the first or second field Under Video Luma Level select the type of processing that you want to be applied to luminance levels in your video when rendering and previewing video in a sequence Defining your General settings 70 Broadcast Processes video using the standard legal range of luminance levels for broadcast video Any super black or super white luminance levels that is levels that fall below the standard black level or exceed the standard white level are clipped Post Production Processes video for post production Any super black or super white luminance levels in your video are retained Under Video Processing Format select either 8 bit or 10 bit to indicate the bit depth you want to use for processing video in a sequence In some cases such as when the video output for an HD project is downconverted to NTSC or PAL the video processing format will be set to 8 bit On Matrox Axio LE the video processing format is always set to 8 bit Under Preroll Postroll Frames for Audio Scrubbing use the sliders to specify the numbe
55. output settings 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the DV 1394 Output tab General Video Output Audio Output Genlock D 1394 Output 1394 Output Format _ Enable 1394 output for export to tape Matrox DV DVCAM v 3 Select Enable 1394 output for export to tape if you want your sequence to be output over the 1394 interface when you perform an export to tape that is when you choose File Export Export to Tape This lets you record your sequence to the DV 1394 device connected to your Axio system D Important Because this option requires additional system resources you may find that when this option is selected some effects that were previously realtime will drop frames and require rendering you ll see a red bar over these segments in your sequence Therefore you should select this option only when you want to export your sequence to DV tape When you perform the export to tape Adobe Premiere Pro will render the segments identified by the red bar 4 From the Output Format list select the format you want for the DV 1394 output For example to record to a standard DV device select Matrox DV DVCAM The output formats available depend on your project s video format and Matrox Axio hardware 5 Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Defining your Video Rendering settings When you select a Matrox project preset y
56. page 10 simply remove the screws holding the brackets in place and then carefully remove the brackets Before you install your Matrox Axio card set 14 Connect the internal power supply cable to your X io card Your X io card requires power from your computer s internal power supply An internal power supply cable is provided with Matrox Axio to connect your X io card to your computer s internal power supply Attach the small end of your in ternal power supply cable to the Internal 8 pin male connector located power near the rear of your X io card supply cable LED display ar Ja X link breakout box b 1 d X io card connector Note The connector located between the X link breakout box connector and the LED display on your X io card is not used When you ve completed the installation of your Axio card set and turned on your computer an LED display on the backplate of your X io card will light up indicating that the internal power supply is properly connected Chapter 2 Installing Your Matrox Axio HD or SD Hardware 15 Set the power selection switch on your X effects card Your X effects card requires additional power either from your computer s internal supply or from an external power supply The power selection switch must be properly set for your card to receive power from your selected power source The power selection switch is located at the front of your X effects car
57. resolution Exported to tape as finishing quality HD video for broadcast Using the Matrox Offline HD codec 246 Workflow example for exporting offline HD clips In this workflow example a Matrox Uncompressed HD codec is used to capture material for use in an online editing project The Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec could also be used to capture online quality video for this workflow The clips are exported from the timeline to disk using the Matrox Offline HD codec They are then transferred to a remote editing workstation When the offline edit is complete the Premiere Pro project prproj file is transferred from the remote editing workstation to the Matrox Axio system so that it can be used to complete the project s online version On Matrox Axio the offline project file is imported into the original online project and each offline clip is linked to the original source file using Premiere Pro s Link Media command The project is then exported to tape for broadcast This workflow scenario is represented in the following diagram Video footage shot as any HD format Clips are exported to disk using the Matrox Offline Matrox 8 bit or 10 bit Uncompressed HD codec is used to capture clips Matrox Axio online editing project using any Uncompressed HD project preset The offline clips are linked to their original source files using Link Media command The online project is then exported to tape as
58. select SDI embedded audio 4 Under Capture Format select the bit depth for your captured audio files If you re capturing from a DV 1394 device the Capture Format will be set to 16 bit 5 If you don t want the VU meters to be displayed each time you configure your Matrox Axio capture settings or open the Capture panel to start a capture clear Show VU meters This option is selected by default For Defining your Capture settings 96 details on using the VU meters see Monitoring audio levels for capture on page 97 6 Under Capture Files indicate whether you want to capture to stereo or mono audio files and select which channels you want to save to separate wav files From the File Type list select Stereo to save your captured audio to stereo wav files or Mono to save your captured audio to mono wav files From the Filename lists select which stereo pairs or mono channels you want to save to your wav files up to four stereo files or up to eight mono files depending on your Matrox Axio hardware Select None for the particular wav files you don t want to be created or click the D default button for each Filename list if you want to capture only channels 1 and 2 When Matrox Axio saves each wav file it assigns a Stereo wav or Mono wav suffix to the base name you gave for the associated video avi file Forexample if you ve named your video file MyFile avi the associated stereo audio files w
59. selection of pulldown method Matrox ll Axio performs either advanced pulldown or standard pulldown Exported to DV tape as NTSC video Note For all Matrox Axio projects you can choose to export to an MPEG 2 file for DVD authoring or export to web format using Matrox Media Encoder as explained in Exporting using Matrox Media Encoder on page 110 For details on other export formats see Exporting to a Matrox avi file on page 99 and Exporting to a Matrox mxf file on page 102 Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows 239 Working with HD material Matrox Axio provides Premiere Pro project presets for many of the common HD video formats For each HD video format Axio provides different HD video codecs that allow you to capture and export your video at different video qualities You can capture your footage using the appropriate codec for the source material and then combine the footage as needed For example you can mix offline HD MPEG 2 I frame HD HDV DVCPRO HD and uncompressed HD files on the same timeline For more information about working with Matrox codecs in your HD project workflow see the next section About the Matrox HD codecs In some cases Matrox Axio applies a pulldown method so that you can capture an HD video format input format that is different from the HD format that s defined by your project settings For example to capture 1080i 29 97 fps source video for use in a 1080p 23 98 project A
60. selection switch on your X effects card 15 Connect the internal power supply cable to your X effects card 16 Install your Matrox Axio card set ueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeA 17 Install your XAG Card o EN 17 Install your XetTecte Card eriin siaaa 18 Connect the external power supply to your X effects card 19 Before restarting your computer 0 0eeee eee ee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 19 vi Chapter 3 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio HD and SD X linkHD and X linkSD breakout box connections 22 X linkHD video connections T E 22 Xlink AD Audio Connections SE E E 22 XlinkSD video CORNECUOMS E E I t ia 22 X linkSD audio c nnecHONS sasaaa D 22 Prepare for MOUNTING coe ense aon unis a era aE 22 Using the desktop TOOL acars a aa 23 Attaching the desktop pedestal ccccceeeeeecee eect cece ee eeeeeeaeaeeeeaeaeeee 23 Attaching the rackmount brackets c cceecee cece cece eens ni 24 Attach the ferrite beads to the X link cable 24 Connect your X link breakout box to your computer 25 Typical Matrox Axio HD and SD connections 26 X linkHD digital video Connections 2i snucsndexccendehanineencnneseusee ccamtexcmsice 26 X linkSD analog component connections eene 27 X lin kopD S Video COMMOCHONG errre arinaa P
61. shadow can simulate the realistic look of diffused light being projected on the source Note Ifyou are working in HD the Matrox shadow effect may require rendering when combined with other effects To set up a Matrox shadow effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Shadow to expand the property list Important Either your source clip or an effect applied to your source clip must contain alpha key information in order to create a shadow effect For example if you apply a shadow effect to a clip with no alpha key information and scale it down using Adobe s Motion effect you won t see any shadow because the Motion effect is the last effect applied and there is no alpha key information to create the shadow effect Whereas if you apply a Matrox 3D DVE to the same clip and then apply the shadow effect you will be able to see the shadow because the Matrox 3D DVE effects contains alpha information LockColors Select this option to lock the colors and opacity values for the top and bottom corners of your shadow For example the color and opacity value you select for the top right corner will be used for all four corners of the shadow Top Right Corner Color Use this to set the top right corner color Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 193 Top Right Corner Opacity Sets the opacity of the top right corner Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Top Left Corner Color Use this to set the
62. signal during video playback 70 selecting 88 Genlock video format selecting 89 GFX files installing 54 installing additional formats 55 removing unneeded formats 55 Glossary 280 GPU Performance Analyzer running on Axio LE 55 Graphics clips supported formats 208 H Hardware information displaying with X info 228 Hardware accelerated effects 207 enabling disabling on Axio LE 229 HD clips using in an SD project 68 HD project presets working with 239 HD projects compression formats on Axio HD 260 compression formats on Axio LE 262 compression formats on Axio SD 261 editing on Matrox Axio SD 259 using SD clips in 68 HDV 1080i 25 fps project working with 254 HDV 1080i 29 97 fps project working with 254 HDV material capturing native 92 exporting native 112 Heat buildup problems 10 32 Horizontal delay adjusting 89 Impressionist effect creating 165 Input aspect ratio selecting 92 Input channels monitoring during capture on X linkHD and X linkSD 98 Input device selecting 91 299 Input format selecting 92 Input source selecting for audio capture 95 selecting for video capture 92 Installation Matrox Axio card set 17 Matrox Axio LE card 37 Matrox Axio software 52 Internal analog audio cable connecting to Axio LE card 36 Internal power supply cable connecting to X effects card 16 connecting to X io card 14 Internet Matrox WWW site 294 Isolating colors in a clip using secondary color correction 147 K Key
63. such as MPEG 2 I frame D Important Your new online project s format must match the format of the offline project you ll be importing For example a 480x270 23 98 fps offline HD project must be imported into a 1080p 23 98 fps project 3 Import your offline project into your new online project by choosing File gt Import and browse to your offline project s Premiere Pro project prproj file L Tip To see a list of your prproj files in the Import dialog box you ll need to select Adobe Premiere Pro Projects prproj from the Files of type list 4 If you re importing Adobe Title Designer files prtl files that were created on a remote editing workstation without the Matrox Axio hardware they must be resized To do this double click on the file in the Project window Adobe Premiere Pro will prompt you to convert the video settings Click Yes and save the title 5 In the Project window expand the project s folder select all the clips that you want to recapture and choose Project gt Make Offline 6 In the Make Offline dialog box select one of the following and click OK Media Files Remain On Disk Select this if you want to make the selected files offline but do not want to delete the source files from your hard disk Media Files Are Deleted Select this if you want the source files deleted from your hard disk 7 Make sure all the clips in the Project window are selected and choose Clip gt Capture Settings gt Set
64. the Software to others f Making copies or verbal or media translations of the user s guide g Making telecommunication data transmissions of the Software Matrox reserves the right to terminate this license without prejudice to any additional recourses Matrox may have against you if you violate any of its terms and conditions B Software limited warranty MATROX WARRANTS TO YOU THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER WHO PROVIDES AN ADEQUATE PROOF OF PURCHASE THAT THE MEDIA ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS RECORDED IS FREE FROM DEFECTS IN MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP UNDER NORMAL USE AND THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL PERFORM SUBSTANTIALLY AS DESCRIBED IN THE RELATED DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED BY MATROX FOR A PERIOD OF NINETY 90 DAYS FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE MATROX PROVIDES YOU THE SOFTWARE AND RELATED DOCUMENTATION ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY NON INFRINGEMENT OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AS WELL AS THE WARRANTY AGAINST HIDDEN OR LATENT DEFECTS ALL OF WHICH MATROX SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS AND YOU THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER BY ACCEPTING THE PRODUCT SPECIFICALLY ACCEPTS SUCH DISCLAIMER AND WAIVER TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE RESULTS AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS ASSUMED BY YOU SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU AND NOT MATROX ITS DISTRIBUTORS OR DEALERS ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICI
65. the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Creating a twirl effect 204 Creating a wipe transition The Matrox wipe transitions support standard dissolves SMPTE wipes and organic wipes with soft edges and color borders gt To set up a Matrox wipe transition Click the transition s icon in your sequence then click the Custom button in the Effect Controls panel This opens the Customize Matrox Wipes dialog box Customize Matrox Wipes l _seectraten 5 Set as Default Restore Default LOK jJ camel a 1 Under Wipe Pattern click the Select Pattern button and choose a pattern for your wipe 2 If you would like to add a border to your wipe select Enable under Border Width Lets you adjust the width of your border by dragging the slider or entering a percentage in the text box Color Click this button to select a color for your border Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 205 Balance Lets you adjust the prominence of the border between image A and image B For example positive values make the border more prominent in image B while negative values make the border more prominent in image A Reset Click this button to restore the default Border values 3 Use the controls under Softness to create a soft edge on the border of your wipe Nonlinear softness This option is selected by default You may
66. the edges of your mask Invert Mask Select this option if you want to invert the opaque and transparent areas of your mask Apply Crop to Video Only Select this if you want the mask to be squeezed to fit your cropped clip If you don t select this option the mask will be cropped by the same amount that you crop your clip Transform Use these properties to apply or change various transform settings such as the position scale and rotation settings of your mask For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 165 Creating an impressionist effect The Matrox impressionist effect lets you choose from many different patterns that you can use to make your image appear similar to an impressionist painting e Select Shape Click the button to the right of the current pattern to see the list of available impressionist patterns Click here to select a new pattern Brush Stroke Count X amp Y Brush Stroke Count Use these to specify the number of brush strokes along the x and y axes If you select Link X amp Y you only need to adjust the X Brush Stroke Count and the Y Brush Stroke Count will be set to the same value Rotation Mean Rotation Use this to adjust the rotation of the brush strokes Positive values rotate the brush st
67. the files to your computer s hard drive using a browser such as Windows Explorer 3 Prepare the native mxf files for editing in Adobe Premiere Pro by importing them into the Project panel like any other file To help you select your shots you can enable thumbnail view and add details for your mxf files in Windows Explorer or Premiere Pro s Import or Get Properties dialog box For more information on displaying mxf file information see Displaying information for clips in Windows Explorer on page 59 4 Edit your project with the native mxf files from the Project panel applying effects and mixing the mxf files with other avi files as you see fit 5 Add Adobe After Effects compositing with a simple copy and paste or import the mxf files into After Effects and edit them as you see fit 6 Export your project to a wide variety of formats including a P2 or XDCAM compatible mxf file as explained in Exporting to a Matrox mxf file on page 102 Chapter 7 Working with mxf and avi files 59 Displaying information for clips in Windows Explorer Matrox Axio extends the functionality of Windows Explorer by allowing you to easily view and manage your mxf and avi files by providing thumbnail previews and additional file details Note You can view thumbnails and additional details for mxf and avi files in any application where you can choose the thumbnails or details view such as Adobe Premiere Pro s Import dialog b
68. they contain enough data to construct an entire video frame unlike B frames or P frames impressionist effect A Matrox effect that lets you choose from many different patterns to make your image appear similar to an impressionist painting IMX A video recording format developed by Sony and standardized by SMPTE as D10 that is used to record video and audio onto a hard disk or tape The IMX data format is fully MPEG 2 compliant and supports video data rates of 30 40 and 50 Mb sec Video is sampled at 4 2 2 for both NTSC and PAL sources insert editing Recording new video and or audio material onto a prerecorded or striped tape Insert edits can be made in any order unlike assemble edits which must be made sequentially inter frame compression A video compression method that compares a series of frames in a video sequence and removes the redundant data Inter frame compression treats all the frames in the sequence as an interdependent group As a result most of the frames can t be edited independently A so called temporal redundancy reduction Contrast with intra frame compression See also GOP interlaced scanning A method of creating a video image by drawing only the odd numbered lines on the screen in one pass then the even numbered lines in the next pass Two passes are therefore required to create a complete frame of video NTSC and PAL displays are interlaced See also progressive scanning interleave A tech
69. use the sliders to increase or decrease the Y luminance and C chrominance gain of the S Video output 5 Under Composite Gain use the slider to increase or decrease the gain of the composite video output 6 Under Master Output Format select the video format you want for all video outputs from the X linkSD breakout box Depending on your project s video format you may not be able to change the master output format Note If you re working with an HD project the master output format will automatically be set to NTSC or PAL depending on your project s video format and the video output will be downconverted this includes appropriate color space conversion from HD to SD Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 7 10 11 12 If the Aspect Ratio Conversion list is available such as when the video output for an HD project is downconverted to NTSC or PAL select one of the following settings for the video output 16x9 Letterbox Outputs the widescreen 16 9 picture in letterbox mode by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for display on a standard 4 3 television screen Anamorphic Outputs the widescreen 16 9 picture as horizontally compressed 4 3 video which retains the picture s full vertical resolution for display on a widescreen television To display the video with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor select the 16 9 display setting on the monitor If the Pulldown Met
70. want to create similar to the following example 3 From the menu on the left side of the dialog box choose Video Rendering 4 From the Compressor list select Matrox Offline HD 5 Click OK to save your project settings For details on selecting additional project settings see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation When you have completed the edits and trimmed your offline HD project you ll need to copy the Premiere Pro project prproj file to your Matrox Axio system so that you can import it into a new online project and recapture the clips at full HD resolution as explained in the next section Recapturing your clips at full HD resolution When you have completed the edits and trimmed your offline HD project you must import the offline project into an online editing project so that you can recapture the clips at full HD resolution gt To recapture your project s clips at full HD resolution 1 If you have not already done so trim your offline project using the Adobe Premiere Pro Project Manager so that you ll recapture only the clips that you Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows 243 are using in your edited project For details on how to do this see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation 2 Open anew Adobe Premiere Pro project on your Matrox Axio system by choosing File gt New gt Project and from the Available Presets list expand the Matrox HD folder and select a preset for the type of project you want to create
71. with mxf and avi files This chapter shows you how to work with mxf and avi files on Matrox Axio 58 Working with native mxf files in Adobe Premiere Pro and After Effects Matrox Axio supports the MXF file format which allows you to use mxf files that are created with the Panasonic P2 Sony XDCAM or Sony XDCAM HD camera directly in Adobe Premiere Pro and After Effects without having to convert the files to the traditional AVI file format D Important For Panasonic P2 cameras if you are shooting material at 1080p or 486p 23 98 fps for use with Matrox Axio you must set the camera to Advanced mode 1080 24pA or 486 24pA Steps for using mxf files in your projects 1 Connect your Panasonic P2 or Sony XDCAM XDCAM HD device to your Matrox Axio computer as per your device s instructions Note For Panasonic P2 devices if you have a PCMCIA card reader in your computer you can use it to connect to Matrox Axio however the device must show up in Microsoft Windows as a drive 2 Fora Panasonic P2 device you can either edit directly from the P2 device or from the computer s hard drive If you choose to edit your mxf clips from the computer copy the Panasonic P2 folder structure to your computer s hard drive For information regarding the Panasonic P2 folder structure see Panasonic P2 folder structure on page 61 For a Sony XDCAM or XDCAM HD device you cannot edit directly from the device Therefore you must copy
72. without reading the other frames When compared to standard reverse pulldown advanced reverse pulldown results in less degradation in the converted video because removing an entire frame from the sequence leaves the remaining frames in the sequence intact and therefore preserves the native generation of the video Matrox Axio implementation of advanced reverse pulldown The advanced reverse pulldown process is simpler than a standard reverse 2 3 pulldown because the additional frame video frame C in the diagram above is tagged when the 23 98 fps progressive footage is recorded to tape This information is present in the DV stream and when Matrox Axio performs an advanced reverse pulldown it reads this information to identify the additional frame that is then removed from the sequence Matrox Axio can perform advanced reverse pulldown on clips that have been recorded to a DV tape that has continuous drop frame or non drop frame time code Appendix A Understanding Standard and Advanced Pulldown Matrox Axio Workflows This appendix provides information about working with different types of projects in Adobe Premiere Pro It describes the various Matrox codecs and video formats that you can use to complete your video project 236 Overview This appendix provides general information about using various Matrox Axio project presets and codecs for working with different types of projects in Adobe Premiere Pro Workflow diagrams and de
73. you adjust your luma mapping settings numerically by entering values in the text boxes or by dragging the corresponding sliders Input Levels Black and White These controls let you fine tune your clip s brightness and contrast by changing the luminance value that represents black white or gray Doing so expands or compresses the range of luminance levels in your clip which increases or decreases your clip s tonal range For example by increasing the black value you set black in your clip to a higher luminance value which compresses the luminance range and darkens your clip proportionally Output Levels Black and White These controls let you map the values under Input Levels to any level of black and white You can Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 139 reduce contrast in your clip or reverse the luminosity of your clip by setting black to a higher value than white Gamma Use this to adjust the midtones in your clip without adjusting black or white e Mask Allows you to apply a mask to your effect For more information see Applying a mask to your effect on page 123 Selective Key The selective key settings allow you to apply the color correction effect to a specific range of pixels in your clip Performing a selective key is similar to performing a chroma or luma key however with a selective key you are applying color correction to the keyed area instead of transparency For example
74. you select colors from a reference clip to match to your target clip You can affect the colors globally Master or just the Shadows Midtones or Highlights You can select the colors for your reference color and match color by either clicking the Color Picker button or the eyedropper Reference Match 26 W 6 TN Color Picker button Eyedropper The eyedropper can be used in two ways Click the eyedropper button and click on the desired color in your clip Click the eyedropper button and click and drag anywhere on your clip to create a rectangular area containing the color you want to select The selected color will be an average of the pixel information contained within the rectangle gt gt To perform a color match 1 Prepare your workspace for color correction by choosing Window Workspace Color Correction 2 Open your target clip clip that contains the colors you want to correct in the Source Monitor Note For best results when using a target clip that has multiple effects applied to it create a nested sequence and open it in your Source Monitor before performing the color match For more information about creating nested sequences see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation 3 Apply the Matrox Color Correction effect to your target clip on the timeline 4 Use the controls under the Reference Monitor to move to a frame in your reference clip that contains the colors you want to match 5 Use the contro
75. your computer For details about these tasks see Chapter 3 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio HD and SD Connect the external power supply to your X effects card 20 Your notes Chapter 2 Installing Your Matrox Axio HD or SD Hardware Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio HD and SD This chapter shows you how to connect external devices to Matrox Axio HD and SD 22 X linkHD and X linkSD breakout box connections The X linkHD and X linkSD breakout boxes provide you with the maximum flexibility possible for connecting external video and audio devices to your Matrox Axio system The supplied X link cable is used to connect your X link breakout box to your X io card X linkHD video connections One 10 bit 4 2 2 SDI input output with embedded audio support EEE 1394 interface Analog black burst reference input Analog component or RGB preview output X linkHD audio connections Two balanced AES EBU stereo inputs Four balanced AES EBU stereo outputs Two balanced analog XLR outputs for monitoring purposes X linkSD video connections e One analog component input output One composite video input output One S Video input output One 10 bit 4 2 2 SDI input output with embedded audio support EEE 1394 interface Analog black burst reference input X linkSD audio connections Two balanced analog XLR inputs outputs Two unbalanced analog RCA inputs outputs Prepar
76. your selected output video format and Matrox Axio hardware For example if you select an SD format only SD compression formats will be available Matrox 8 bit Uncompressed Alpha Renders video to 8 bit uncompressed format with alpha Matrox 10 bit Uncompressed Alpha Renders video to 10 bit uncompressed format with alpha Not supported on Matrox Axio LE Matrox MPEG 2 I frame Alpha Renders video to MPEG 2 intra frame format with alpha using the 4 2 2 Profile Main Level at a selected data rate SD resolution only Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Alpha Renders video to MPEG 2 intra frame format with alpha using the 4 2 2 Profile High Level at a selected data rate HD resolution only 4 If you selected the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame Alpha or Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Alpha format click the Configure button to specify various options for the MPEG 2 I frame compression The configuration options are the same as when you capture or export video using Adobe Premiere Pro see Selecting your MPEG 2 I frame settings on page 105 5 Under Destination Folder either select Same folder as TGA or click Browse to specify where the avi file will be created Select Overwrite existing file if you want to overwrite any avi file with the same name in the specified folder 6 Right click the selected tga file s and choose Matrox AVI Alpha gt Convert to AVI Converting a 32 bit tga sequence to an avi file with alpha 6
77. zum Anschlie en des ausr stung und anderer Peripherieger te an die Karte abgeschirmte Kabel verwendet werden Diese Produkt wurden in einem typischen der Klasse A entsprechenden Host System getestet Es wird davon ausgegangen da diese Produkte auch in jedem Klasse A entsprechenden System entsprechend funktionieren Italiano Informazioni per gli utenti europei Dichiarazione di conformit Nota per i prodotti hardware Matrox supportati da questa guida Questi dispositivi sono conformi alla direttiva CEE 89 336 EEC relativamente ai dispositivi digitali di Classe A Sono stati provati e sono risultati conformi alle norme EN55022 CISPR22 e EN55024 CISPR24 In un ambiente domestico questi prodotti possono causare radiointerferenze nel qual caso all utente potrebbe venire richiesto di prendere le misure adeguate Per soddisfare i requisiti CEE l apparecchiatura e le altre periferiche vanno collegati alla scheda grafica con cavi schermati Questi prodotti sono stati provati in un tipico sistema host conforme alla classe A Inoltre si d per scontato che questi prodotti acquisiranno la conformit in qualsiasi sistema conforme alla classe A Espa ol Informaci n para usuarios europeos Declaraci n de conformidad Observaci n referente a los productos de hardware de Matrox apoyados por este manual Estos dispositivos cumplen con la directiva de la CE 89 336 EEC para dispositivos digitales de Clase A Dichos dispositivos han sido sometidos a p
78. 01 Mono wav will be created in the VIDEO folder For more information on the P2 naming convention and folder structure see your Panasonic P2 documentation Note Ifyou select an audio mxf file from the AUDIO folder only the mono wav file will be created and it will be in the AUDIO folder Converting a 32 bit tga sequence to an avifile with alpha Matrox Axio allows you to create a single avi file with alpha from a 32 bit tga sequence The created avi file will contain the alpha key information which means that when you place the file on the timeline in Adobe Premiere Pro the clip will be automatically keyed Having only one file simplifies management and makes it easier to include the composition in your final edit Note You can convert 32 bit uncompressed or RLE compressed tga files to an avi file with alpha When selecting only one tga file the program automatically detects other files with the same base name in the same folder for example demo001 tga demo002 tga etc and uses these files to create the avi file When multiple tga Converting a 32 bit tga sequence to an avi file with alpha 62 files are selected only the selected files will be taken to build the avi file The avi file will be created with the following naming convention Base Name_Compressor_Output Format avi For example if the base name for your converted tga sequence is demo the compressor is Matrox MPEG 2 I frame Alpha and the output
79. 3 specification documentation Use this setting when capturing or rendering video at a high data rate that is at a data rate of about 50 Mb sec for SD video or 100 Mb sec or higher for HD video Select the Force Frame based DCT setting to render macroblocks as frames rather than as fields In some cases graphics will yield less artifacts if this option is selected 8 Click OK to save your settings Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings Adding a voice over to your sequence Matrox Axio supports voice over which allows you to record audio tracks as wav files directly in the Timeline panel to add commentary to video clips such as newsreels and documentaries Remarks e To use Matrox Axio voice over you must have an audio input for the voice over as well as a valid video input The video input is required only for genlock purposes It s recommended that you genlock all the devices connected to your Matrox Axio system to a reliable external genlock source For details on selecting your genlock source see Specifying your genlock settings on page 88 Matrox voice over does not support pulldown Therefore this feature is not supported for a 486p 23 98 fps project or a 1080p 23 98 fps project if your input format is set to 10801 29 97 fps Matrox voice over supports recording to stereo or mono audio tracks only Because Matrox voice over uses the Matrox Axio audio output mapping settings in the Matro
80. 4 Your notes Chapter 7 Working with mxf and avi files Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings This chapter explains how to define various settings for using Matrox Axio with Adobe Premiere Pro This includes specifying your project and export settings 66 A note about running other programs with Adobe Premiere Pro For the best performance you shouldn t run any other programs at the same time as Adobe Premiere Pro If you choose to do so however make sure that you start Adobe Premiere Pro and open your Matrox Axio project before starting the other programs Otherwise Adobe Premiere Pro may fail to start If this happens quit all programs and then restart Adobe Premiere Pro L Tip When Adobe Premiere Pro is running you can monitor your Adobe Premiere Pro memory usage To do this hold your mouse pointer over the Matrox X info a icon For details on using Matrox X info see Chapter 12 Monitoring Your Matrox Axio System Loading project presets The Matrox realtime plug in for Adobe Premiere Pro includes project presets that you can load to immediately apply appropriate Matrox Axio settings For more information about using the Matrox project presets for working with different types of projects see Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows gt gt To load a Matrox project preset 1 Start Adobe Premiere Pro The New Project dialog box appears 2 From the appropriate Matrox folder Matrox SD to create an SD
81. 5 Lum C Show Key Auto Key _ BER Indicator Handles e Hue Click this button to enable or disable the Hue Key properties Hue Aperture and Softness When enabled you will be able to see the Hue Key indicator and handles to modify the Hue Key properties in the selective key graph Map Plot Hue e Sat C Lum e L Show Key Auto Key RET Indicator Handles D Hue 2 Aperture 3 Softness Sat Click this button to enable or disable the Saturation Key properties Low Clip Low Gain High Gain and High Clip When enabled you will Creating a secondary color correction 144 be able to see the Sat Key indicator and handles to modify the Saturation Key properties in the selective key graph Map Plot Hue e sa C Lum e Show Key Auto Key HEF Indicator Handles D Low Clip Low Gain HighGain High Clip e Lum Click this button to enable or disable the Luma Key properties Low Clip Low Gain High Gain and High Clip When enabled you will be able to see the Lum Key indicator and handles to modify the Luma Key properties in the selective key graph LowClip LowGain HighGain HighClip Low Clip 2 Low Gain HighGain High Clip Map Plot Hue Sat Lum Show Key Auto Key REE Indicator Handles i Tip For both the Saturation Key and Luma Key properties you can lock and move all the handles at the same time in the selective key graph by pressing SHIF
82. 93 100 103 Matrox DVCPRO HD 93 100 104 Matrox DVCPROS50 93 100 104 Matrox IMX 104 Matrox MPEG 2 I frame 93 100 105 Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD 93 100 105 Matrox Offline HD 93 100 Matrox VFW codecs 214 Color balance graph using 129 Color correction color matching clips 133 performing an auto balance 132 primary 125 secondary 137 using the selective key graph 142 297 using Split View in the Program Monitor 127 using the color balance graph 129 using the luma mapping graph 135 using the Split View option 127 Color matching clips using color balance graph 133 Color pass effect creating with secondary color correction 147 Color space conversion options for rendering to VFW files 212 Combustion WYSIWYG plug in See Autodesk Combustion WYSIWYG plug in Component gain adjusting for X linkHD 75 adjusting for X linkSD 76 Component output format selecting for X linkHD 75 Composite gain adjusting for X linkSD 76 Compression formats supported 260 Compressor selecting for VFW render 214 Computer system requirements for Axio HD and SD 4 system requirements for Axio LE 5 Connections typical Matrox Axio HD and SD 26 typical Matrox Axio LE 47 CPU based effects 207 Cropping your clip 121 using Select Crop 122 Crystallize effect creating 163 Cube effect creating 160 Index 298 Customer support 294 D Device control in Adobe Premiere Pro setting for DV 1394 devices 111 Disk defragmenta
83. 97 fps 1080i 29 97 fps or NTSC HDV 1080i 29 97 fps NTSC HDV 1080i 25 fps PAL 1080p 23 98 fps NTSC 1080p 24 fps Not supported 1080p 25 fps PAL For example if you have an NTSC project you can select an NTSC codec only If you have a 10801 25 fps project you can select a 10801 25 fps codec to export to HD format or a PAL codec to downconvert the HD video to PAL this includes appropriate color space conversion from HD to SD Downconverting an HD project to SD however is supported only for projects with an 8 bit video processing format Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 103 gt To export your sequence to a Matrox mxf file 1 N wo Choose File gt Export gt Matrox MXF Export to Matrox MXF File Type Sony XDCAM Range Entire Sequence Export Audio Compressor NTSC Matrox DV DvCAM Aspect Ratio 16 9 Fle Name From the File Type list select the type of mxf files that you want to create Panasonic P2 or Sony XDCAM From the Range list select Entire Sequence to export your entire Premiere Pro sequence or Work Are Bar to export only the area selected by the work area bar Select Export Audio if you want to export both video and audio the Export Video option is always selected because Matrox Axio does not support audio only exports to an mxf file Note If you export audio in Panasonic P2 file format the audio will be exported as t
84. AL CONSEQUENTIAL FORESEEABLE OR UNFORESEEABLE OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT DELICT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY AND WHETHER ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE LOSS OF USE DATA PRODUCTION REVENUE AND OR PROFIT OF IN CONNECTION WITH THE MATROX PRODUCT OR ANY BUSINESS INTERRUPTION WITHOUT PREJUDICE TO THE FOREGOING ANY LIABILITY OF MATROX FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE DEFECTIVE HARDWARE IN QUESTION TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW MATROX S ENTIRE LIABILITY AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY SHALL BE THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY DEFECTIVE PRODUCT DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD MATROX DOES NOT OFFER ANY OTHER WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO MATROX HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE OR ANY OTHER HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE YOU SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL APPLICABLE TAXES DUTIES AND CUSTOMS FEES ON ANY REPLACEMENT UNIT AS WELL AS ALL TRANSPORT INSURANCE STORAGE AND OTHER CHARGES INCURRED ON ALL RETURNED PRODUCTS Indemnification disclaimer Matrox disclaims and shall have no obligation to indemnify or defend you or any third party in respect of any actual or alleged infringement of any actual or pending patents copyright or other intellectual property rights Matrox shall have no liability arising out of any such actual or alleged intellectual property infringement MATROX SPECIFICALLY MAKES NO REPRESENTATION AND DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER
85. Axio HD connecting external devices 26 features 3 hardware supplied with 4 supported compression formats 260 supported master output formats 263 system requirements 4 Matrox Axio LE checking for Matrox validated display card 229 connecting external devices 47 enabling disabling hardware accelerated effects 229 features 3 hardware supplied with 4 supported compression formats 262 supported SDI output formats 264 system requirements 5 Matrox Axio LE card before you install 32 installing 37 Matrox Axio SD connecting external devices 26 editing HD projects on 259 features 3 hardware supplied with 4 supported compression formats 261 supported master output formats 263 system requirements 4 Matrox Axio software installing 52 removing 56 Matrox Axio workflows 236 Matrox Axio utils installing 54 removing 56 Matrox CPU based effects 207 using with Adobe After Effects 116 Matrox DV DVCAM codec selecting for capture 93 selecting for export to disk 100 103 selecting for VFW render 214 Matrox DV HDV device control exporting to tape with 112 setting 111 Matrox DVCPRO codec selecting for capture 93 selecting for export to disk 100 103 selecting for VFW render 214 Matrox DVCPRO HD codec description of 240 selecting for capture 93 selecting for export to disk 100 104 selecting for VFW render 214 Matrox DVCPROSO codec selecting for capture 93 selecting for export to disk 100 104 selecting for VFW render 214 Matrox effect patterns
86. CHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT Matrox Axio License Agreement Warranty and Service H Procedure for returning goods No returned goods for service or otherwise will be accepted without prior authorization from Matrox To obtain return authorization contact Matrox Axio Customer Support see page 294 Once approved Matrox will contact you with your Returned Merchandise Authorization RMA number Matrox cannot be responsible for units returned without an RMA number Matrox will advise you of the shipping address The packaging must indicate the RMA number on the outside It is strongly recommended that a copy of the original packing slip which states the serial number of the items you re returning be included with the returned merchandise This will speed up processing Each individual returned unit or group of units MUST have an RMA number issued by Matrox Matrox must authorize the number of units grouped under one RMA number Any units received without prior approval by Matrox will be returned to you freight collect You shall be responsible for the cost of consolidated freight one way only for warranty units from your location to the location designated by Matrox Once repaired Matrox will incur the cost of consolidated freight for warranty units to your location Matrox Axio License Agreement Warranty and Service Contents Chapter 1 Introducing Matrox Axio Welcome t Matrox AXIO ssicicsic
87. Capture Settings 8 Click the Configure button and under Capture Format select the HD format you want to use to recapture your offline clips 9 If you selected Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD click the Configure button to configure your MPEG 2 I frame settings For details on the available settings see Selecting your MPEG 2 I frame settings on page 105 10 Click OK to save your capture settings 11 To begin recapturing your clips choose File Batch Capture For information about batch capturing clips see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Using the Matrox Offline HD codec 244 Offline HD codec workflow examples The following workflow examples demonstrate two different uses of the Matrox Offline HD codec In the first example the codec is used to capture clips to an offline HD format for use in an offline editing project In the second example the codec is used to export clips to an offline HD format for use in an offline editing project Workflow example for capturing offline HD clips In this workflow example the Matrox Offline HD codec is used to capture video clips for use in an offline editing project that is to be completed on a remote editing system Because the remote system has the Matrox VFW software codecs installed the system can be used with Adobe Premiere Pro to produce the offline edit When the offline edit is complete and trimmed using the Adobe Premiere Pro Project Manager the Premiere Pro project prproj f
88. Color EM Show Light Cursors LJ D First Light D Second Light D Transform Surface Control Apply to Opaque Areas Only Select this option to apply the surface texture to only the opaque areas of a clip that contains an alpha channel Note When this option is enabled you cannot adjust the Scale Z transform property and therefore your clip will be two dimensional Surface Texture Allows you to select your surface texture Click the button on the right to see the list of available textures Front Face Control Blending Factor Blends the front face of the slab with the surface texture The higher the value the more your clip blends in A value of zero will display only the surface texture Invert Video Orientation Select this to invert your clip on the front face of your slab Crop Sets the crop region used on the front face of the slab For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Back Face Control Blending Factor Blends the back face of the slab with the surface texture The higher the value the more your clip blends in A value of zero will display only the surface texture Invert Video Orientation Select this to invert your clip on the back face of your slab Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 199 e Crop Sets the crop region used on the back face of the slab For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Light Control Ambient
89. Create video Files AVI V Create audio files WAV Cancel 2 In the Configure Matrox EZ MXF AVI dialog box specify the type of files you want to create video and or audio and then click OK Note The file type settings will remain in effect until you change them 3 Right click the desired mxf file or selected files and choose Matrox EZ MXF AVI gt Create The reference avi and wav files for Sony XDCAM XDCAM HD are created in the same folder as your source mxf Chapter 7 Working with mxf and avi files 61 files Panasonic P2 files are created as per the folder structure for Panasonic P2 as explained in the next section D Important Once the Matrox EZ MXF files are created do not change the location or name of the referenced mxf files or your VFW program won t be able to locate your mxf material If this occurs Matrox Axio will display an appropriate error message Panasonic P2 folder structure Panasonic P2 files are organized in a specific folder structure as follows CONTENTS C1 AUDIO 0 cup C Icon C proxy C VIDEO C voice When you select an mxf file in the VIDEO folder Matrox EZ MXF looks for any associated audio mxf files in the AUDIO folder and creates the reference avi and associated wav files in the VIDEO folder For example if you select the file 00001A mxf from the VIDEO folder the reference avi file 00001A avi and all associated audio files such as 00001A00 Mono wav and 00001A
90. DOBE PREMIERE PRO System Information Log CAMy templSystemLog html Open file after scan Show icon in taskbar Using X info to display Axio information 228 Displaying hardware information To display information about the Matrox Axio hardware installed in your system select Hardware from the Display Information About list Each Axio card and breakout box X linkHD and X linkSD is represented by a tab Note No hardware information is provided for the X linkLE breakout box Click the card or breakout box s tab to display a page with hardware information for example serial number and production date You can also monitor the current and maximum operating temperatures for each hardware component m Matrox X info Display Information About H vi ardware X linksD X io Card x effects Card Hardware Information Serial Number BC42327 Board ID 13 Production Date 2004 07 23 Installed Options No options Firmware Revision X io card SD firmware 34 4 EEPROM Revision 1 0 Memory Size 128 MB PCI Bus Info 64 bit PCI X 100 MHz Hardware Model 3000 X link Cable Type Matrox cable Temperature X io C Current 43 0 Show icon in taskbar a Important Whether or not you have opened Matrox X info if one or more of your Matrox Axio hardware components exceeds the maximum operating temperature you ll receive a warning message with further instructions as explained in the section E
91. E Matrox Axio LE lets you display 5 1 surround mapping settings that show which channels are used to output your audio when playing back 5 1 surround tracks in your sequence gt To display your 5 1 surround mapping settings 1 Choose Project Project Settings General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Audio Output tab then click the 5 1 Surround Mapping tab This page shows that when playing back 5 1 surround tracks audio is output as follows Front left and right surround channels are output to the first embedded SDI audio output pair and the first analog audio and AES EBU output pairs ANALOG AUDIO OUT 1 and OUT 2 and AES EBU OUT 1 2 on X linkLE Rearleft and right surround channels are output to the second embedded SDI audio output pair and the second analog audio and AES EBU output pairs ANALOG AUDIO OUT 3 and OUT 4 and AES EBU OUT 3 4 on X linkLE Center and subwoofer surround channels are output to the third embedded SDI audio output pair and the third analog audio and AES EBU output pairs ANALOG AUDIO OUT 5 and OUT 6 and AES EBU OUT 5 6 on X linkLE Defining your General settings 88 Specifying your genlock settings You can select the source to which you want to genlock all devices connected to your Matrox Axio system as well as adjust the timing settings for all video outputs from Matrox Axio gt To specify your genlock settings 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings g
92. E 85 Analog output format selecting for X linkLE 79 Analog output type selecting for X linkLE 79 Analog video horizontal delay adjusting for X linkLE 80 Anamorphic selecting for exported video 101 selecting for video output 74 77 79 296 Aspect ratio creating SD project in 16 9 format 114 selecting conversion setting for output video 74 77 79 selecting for source video 92 Audio capture settings 95 monitoring audio levels 97 selecting channels 96 Audio connections for X linkHD 22 for X linkLE 40 for X linkSD 22 Audio levels monitoring for capture 97 Audio monitoring settings for capture on X linkHD and X linkSD 98 Audio output settings for X linkHD and X linkSD 81 for X linkLE 85 Auto balance performing using color correction 132 Auto key performing using the chroma key graph 157 performing using the selective key graph 145 Autodesk 3ds Max WYSIWYG plug in about 220 required steps 222 See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins Autodesk Combustion WYSIWYG plug in about 220 required steps 222 See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins Automatic Gain Control selecting 94 AVI files capturing using Adobe Premiere Pro 91 creating from a 32 bit TGA sequence 61 creating from MXF files using Matrox EZ MXF 60 displaying information in Windows Explorer 59 Index exporting using Adobe Premiere Pro 99 rendering using VFW programs 210 214 Axio See Matrox Axio Axio LE card connecting internal analog audio cable 36 installing 37 specification
93. G Control Panel and Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins let you display the contents of your composition or animation on your video monitor This lets you see the exact color temperature safe title area and any interlaced artifacts as you work You can display any Matrox avi file and video played back by supported DirectShow applications such as Windows Media Player Adobe Encore DVD and Adobe Bridge You can also preview compositions created in the following applications that are supported by the Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins Adobe After Effects version 5 0 or later Adobe Photoshop version 7 0 or later Autodesk 3ds Max version 7 0 or later Autodesk Combustion version 4 or later eyeon Fusion version 4 or later NewTek LightWave 3D version 9 0 or later Configuring the Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel The Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel lets you specify the settings you want for previewing your composition or animation on your video monitor To use the Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel right click the icon on your Windows taskbar If you don t see the icon choose Start gt All Programs gt Matrox Axio utils gt Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel Note By default the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in output to your video monitor is enabled To disable it clear the Enable WYSIWYG Output option in the Control Panel When you do this you ll have to quit and restart any DirectShow application such as Windows Media Player in order for the change to take effec
94. HX WE VIJ CO E x EO AED RE REX ERE Eb YA FAS Ue bM LESER EX 268 Video output SIgnals 5 adir rer eer FRE d C EFREE EX EE ok ERAS YER KURSE FREE 269 pelles efefetenne le r fn c EE 269 Audi SOSCMICATOMS T TO E eves eeadae ty 270 Environmental Specifications o erect de Eee Rio RI ue tact eee eee 270 X lnkHD breakout DOx cuecceiieceecueciecue nininini 271 CI T r 271 Typical operating voltages and current consumption 271 video INPUT sighail arsaa aa VER VERA ETE ERAS 271 Video output Signals sisii nes a EUER EA HAREER EC UR VER FUR CEPR VEA SUA ERR V 272 Audio input output Signals iere orare rere rper up Ras ctc a ecc erR ES 272 AUGIO SPSCTICATIONS me 273 Environmental specifications eisene Een ti r Rec I Ix E IER E RR CEEaE 273 AGO EE Cal Oi corrii etnia eo nax Eo RA EARUNE EA aaa eaaa 274 cual 274 Typical operating voltages and current consumption 274 Contents Xiv Video input signal S uisi atte PE PEE ERR RE UE EXE EAE H EE XA EE tX PM PARRA da 275 Video output SIGMAIS ciae vevi ach Y Ere ECIHRIE REOR ER HEX EX PEE CER EE S EVEAR ieia 276 Audio IDEAS output un i Se ec T 277 Audio SRC CC ALON eue MEE 277 Environmental specifications rico conie ceues ionic paa nix ul Ei px RETI ARIA 277 Appendix D Matrox Axio Glossary Glossary Of termis 12e cuereiuiee ex esxatkberaEMEr4 ARR REA KRRARE ERI RE ERAN ERR RA 280 Append
95. ITHER MATROX NOR ANY OF ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS MAKES ANY OTHER WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO MATROX PRODUCTS MATROX SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS AND YOU BY ACCEPTING THE MATROX PRODUCT SPECIFICALLY ACCEPTS SUCH DISCLAIMER AND WAIVES ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR OR INTENDED PURPOSE OR USE AND THE WARRANTY AGAINST LATENT DEFECTS WITH RESPECT TO THE HARDWARE AND OR SOFTWARE MATROX FURTHER DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY THAT MATROX PRODUCTS IN Matrox Axio License Agreement Warranty and Service iii WHOLE OR IN PART WILL BE FREE FROM INFRINGEMENT OF ANY THIRD PARTY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY OR PROPRIETARY RIGHTS TO THE EXTENT THAT THESE LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE INCONSISTENT WITH THE LAW OF THE LOCALITY WHERE YOU PURCHASED THE MATROX PRODUCT THESE LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENTS SHALL BE DEEMED MODIFIED TO BE CONSISTENT WITH SUCH LOCAL LAW UNDER SUCH LOCAL LAW CERTAIN LIMITATIONS OF THESE LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENTS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW THE REMEDIES PROVIDED IN THESE LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENTS ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES Limitations of liability EXCEPT FOR THE OBLIGATIONS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH IN THE SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND HARDWARE LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENTS IN NO EVENT SHALL MATROX BELIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENT
96. Matrox Axio Installation and User Guide October 30 2006 Digital Video Solutions i Y10934 201 0250 Trademarks Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd Matrox Axio Axio utils DigiSuite EZ MXF Flex CPU Flex GPU RT X100 RT X2 X effects X io X link X linKHD X linkLETM X linkSD Adobe Systems Inc sss Adobe After Effects Audition Encore DVD Photoshop Premiere Adobe Media Encoder Advanced Micro Devices Inc eee AMD Opteron Apple Computer Inc Apple FireWire AUtode Sk O a p cei ea tte Autodesk 3ds Max Combustion eyeon Software Inc cececssstsesescsssetecscseseseteceesssesesees Fusion Intel Corporation eeeee n Intel Xeon International Business Machines Corporation E IBMS VGA9 Microsoft Corporation ccccccccsssscscscssessssscsesesesecsesees Microsoft ActiveMovie DirectShow DirectX Windows Windows Media Video for Windows NewTek lc secedere aetas LightWave 3D9 NVIDIA Corporation eceeeeeeennnnee NVIDIA SLI Panasonic Matsushita Electric Industrial Co Panasonic DVCPRO DVCPRO50 DVCPRO HD Varicam RealNetworks Inc nn m RealNetworks RealMedia Sony Corporation cc
97. Motion effect to 72 3ds Max WYSIWYG plug in See Autodesk 3ds Max WYSIWYG plug in 486p 23 98 fps project working with 236 4 comer pin creating 150 5 1 surround mapping displaying settings for X linkLE 87 selecting settings for X linkHD and X linkSD 83 720p projects working with 257 8 bit Uncompressed codec See Matrox 8 bit Uncompressed codec A A V drives defragmenting 12 34 formatting as NTFS 12 34 Adobe After Effects WYSIWYG plug in about 220 required steps 222 See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins Adobe Encore DVD exporting material for 110 Index Adobe Photoshop WYSIWYG plug in about 220 required steps 222 See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins Adobe Premiere Pro adding voice over to sequence 107 Capture settings 91 displaying warnings in Events panel 67 Export Movie settings 99 exporting material using Matrox Media Encoder 110 exporting sequence to tape 111 fixed effects 206 General settings 69 hardware accelerated effects on Axio LE 229 installing 52 loading Matrox project presets 66 monitoring memory usage 226 setting up DV 1394 device control 111 setting up scratch disks 67 Video Rendering settings 90 See also Realtime plug in for Adobe Premiere Pro Advanced pulldown description of 233 See also Standard pulldown After Effects WYSIWYG plug in See Adobe After Effects WYSIWYG plug in Allow super black 75 77 80 Allow super white 75 77 80 Analog audio volume adjusting for X linkHD and X linkSD 81 adjusting for X linkL
98. NG REPAIR OR CORRECTION MATROX DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR PERFORM WITH ANY HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE PROVIDED BY THIRD PARTIES Matrox Axio License Agreement Warranty and Service C End user registration Before using your Matrox Axio product please take a moment to register your product in the Matrox Axio Support section of our web site at www matrox com video support The information you provide will assist Matrox to quickly diagnose and correct any problem that might arise when using the product Only registered end users are entitled to customer support Hardware limited warranty MATROX WARRANTS TO YOU THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER WHO PROVIDES AN ADEQUATE PROOF OF PURCHASE THAT THE MATROX AXIO HARDWARE PRODUCTS WILL BE FREE FROM FACTORY DEFECTS FOR A PERIOD OF ONE I YEAR FROM THE DATE OF PURCHASE MATROX WILL REPAIR OR REPLACE AT THE CHOICE OF MATROX THE MATROX AXIO HARDWARE PRODUCTS WHICH PROVE TO BE DEFECTIVE DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD PROVIDED THAT THEY ARE RETURNED TO MATROX SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING LIMITATIONS Matrox s limited warranty covers only those defects which arise as a result of normal use of the hardware and does not apply to any improper or inadequate maintenance incompatibilities due to the user s hardware or software applications with or in whi
99. OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Defining your General settings 74 Specifying your video output settings X linkHD You can specify various settings to configure your video output signals from the X linkHD breakout box such as to adjust the gain of your component video and adjust the horizontal delay of your SDI video gt To specify your video output settings 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Video Output tab ID 1 000000 J Boal oj como 7 m 3 Under Master Output Format select the video format you want for all video outputs from the X linkHD breakout box Depending on your project s video format you may not be able to change the master output format 4 If the Aspect Ratio Conversion list is available such as when the video output for an HD project is downconverted to NTSC or PAL select one of the following settings for the video output 16x9 Letterbox Outputs the widescreen 16 9 picture in letterbox mode by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for display on a standard 4 3 television screen Anamorphic Outputs the widescreen 16 9 picture as horizontally compressed 4 3 video which retains the picture s full vertical resolution for display on a widescreen television To display the video with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor select the 16 9 d
100. OMPONENT OFF VIDEO SYNC OUT a QI Y BY RY oT Source 7 um Za Deck 1 Y B Y R Y COMPOSITE S VIDEO Ch1 ames Ch 2 350 OG D ON YSYNC 759 COMPONENT OFF VIDEO Program monitor i n 45 input Recorder Zi Z VIDEO Deck 2 WN ep IT Typical Matrox Axio HD and SD connections 28 X linkSD S Video connections External sync source IL IN IN i y SYNC Trsa S VIDEO AUDIO d OFF HO OUT OUT Source z Deck 1 R Y COMPOSITE S VIDEO Ch1 saos Ch 2 A H bO IN m B ON YSYNC 750 S VIDEO AUDIO p OFF LISP out or Program monitor input Recorder MEG Deck 2 O DO 3 Chapter 3 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio HD and SD 29 X linkSD digital video connections OUT AUDIO R IN AUDIO L y sync Tro spi VIDEO id ow DV 1394 S VIDEO N DV 1394 device Source m LU Deck 1 y Ch1
101. RA ERR MX GESEI S RPREdA 28 XlinKSD digital video COnTndMecBOne sus osi enna rr o re eR UO Ie FR e e I an 29 Chapter 4 Installing Your Matrox Axio LE Hardware Before you install your Matrox Axio LE card 32 Avold costly damage essensen a vx ERO RUMRCAPRIRUSREAYERERNPNUURKMEEERKKA 32 Providing adeguate ventilation uiosiuo io rouen or tane kt n 2a a amas Ix pex eR a re EPERG 32 Format your A V drives using IMTES eite irte r niit nux oerien 34 Use the PCI retainer brackets uico eric conr arenan E 35 Removing the PCI retainer Dracket seta iria rabo uox RU EXE E ERR R ERAb RE 35 Connect the internal analog audio cable to your Axio LE card 36 Install your Matrox Axio LE card eueeeeeeeeeeees 37 Before restarting your computer eeeeereereer eere 37 Chapter 5 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio LE X linkLE breakout box connections c ceeee eene nenne 40 A BRLE video CONNECTIONS cerca EX PXRUR e E o EE EYE UC EX ERE ER i 40 ZG E audio COMMEC HONS sers qoc ig kek iet Eo PEOR EXE Vl RU FREE Kk UR Ea LER Tad 40 Contents Attaching the rubber feet to X linkLE eere 41 Attaching the rackmount brackets to X linkLE 41 Connect your X linkLE audio video and SDI cables tothe AxIO LE Care siaaa E a 43 Connect your X linkLE balanced analog audio cable to t
102. Required steps to use the WYSIWYG plug ins The following sections list the steps required to use the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in for each application in order to preview your composition or animation on your video monitor Note The following procedures are applicable to the most recent version of each program that s presently supported These procedures may change with a subsequent release of the program Adobe After Effects 1 Start Adobe After Effects and import the footage you want to preview 2 Drag the footage from the Project window to the Composition window Adobe Photoshop 1 Start Adobe Photoshop and open the file you want to preview 2 Choose File gt Export gt Matrox WYSIWYG Preview Autodesk 3ds Max 1 Start Autodesk 3ds Max and open the file you want to preview 2 Open the Render Scene dialog box by choosing Rendering gt Render 3 Under Render Output click Devices 4 In the Select Image Output Device dialog box select Matrox WYSIWYG Preview and click OK 5 Click Render Autodesk Combustion 1 Start Autodesk Combustion and open the file you want to preview 2 Choose File gt Preferences gt Framebuffer 3 In the menu beside Framebuffer Type select Matrox WYSIWYG Preview and click OK eyeon Fusion 1 Start eyeon Fusion and open the file you want to preview 2 Right click on the file and choose View On gt Matrox WYSIWYG Preview Chapter 11 Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug ins 223 NewTek LightW
103. T and then dragging any handle If you press CTRL you can lock and move either the Low Clip and Low Gain handles or High Gain and High Clip handles Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 145 Note Ifyou want to reset the hue saturation and luma key properties to the default settings at any time click the appropriate Reset button Saturation Key Hue C Reset button Sat Lum e Show Key Click this button to display the matte used to define your selective key region This enables you to further refine your key Areas that are completely affected by the color correction are white untouched areas are black and gray areas are partially affected Auto Key Click this button to automatically key on the most common color at the current frame except gray Selecting Auto Key affects values for the Hue Key Saturation Key and the Luma key properties Alternately you can use the auto key eyedropper to select a color on which you want to key Auto Key maz RUM key eyedropper The auto key eyedropper can be used in two ways Click the eyedropper button and click on a color on which you want to key Click the eyedropper button and click and drag anywhere on your clip to create a rectangular area containing the color on which you want to key The selected color will be an average of the pixel information contained within the rectangle You can further refine your auto key color by using the plus and
104. The AES EBU channels are not available on X linkSD 4 Under Input Channels each speaker button represents a stereo pair or two mono channels that you re capturing as specified on the Audio Capture Settings page see Specifying your audio capture settings on page 95 For example if you want to monitor your first captured stereo or mono channels on the left and right analog audio outputs drag the button to Analog L R 5 To mute audio monitoring for a particular channel click its speaker button To re enable monitoring you must assign an input channel to it 6 Under SDI you can assign input channels to a maximum of four SDI audio pairs two pairs from any two groups for monitoring To assign an input Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 99 channel to an audio pair for a group that is presently not available you must mute both audio pairs from one of the currently selected groups 7 Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Exporting to a Matrox avi file Several software codecs are included with Adobe Premiere Pro so that you can export your video to different formats Your Matrox Axio system adds several Matrox codecs to the ones included with Premiere Pro Because the Matrox codecs use your Axio hardware to accelerate rendering they can export video much faster than when you use a software codec The Matrox codecs are available in SD and HD formats The supported for
105. a capture in Adobe Premiere Pro VU meters will be displayed to let you monitor the levels of your currently selected audio input source Audio Input Levels x am nn um m Clipping detectors Peak level indicators As you play your audio source the color of the input level is green at or below 12 dBSF yellow between 12 and 6 dBFS and red above 6 dBFS The clipping detectors will light up become red whenever audio clipping occurs The peak level indicators are thin lines that show the highest level recently reached These indicators will show the peak level for about two seconds or until a higher peak level is reached If needed adjust the audio level on your source device to keep the average input level between 30 and 10 dBSF Defining your Capture settings 98 Specifying your audio monitoring settings X linkHD and X linkSD Matrox Axio HD and SD let you customize your settings for monitoring audio during capture such as to select the particular output channels on which you want to monitor your audio when capturing embedded SDI audio Only audio input channels that are to be captured to a wav file can be monitored gt To specify your settings for monitoring audio during capture 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt Capture 2 From the Capture Format list select Matrox Axio 3 Click the Configure button then click the Audio Monitoring tab 245 Ce 4 KI Group 3 Group 4 Note
106. able to a free power outlet of your computer s internal power supply Important Make sure that no other devices are sharing this power outlet When you ve completed the installation of your Axio hardware and turned on your computer an LED display on the backplate of your X io card will light up indicating that the internal power supply is properly connected Install your Matrox Axio card set 18 Install your X effects card 1 Make sure the power selection switch of your X effects card is properly set as explained in Set the power selection switch on your X effects card on page 15 If you set your X effects card to receive power from your computer s internal power supply make sure the internal power supply cable is connected as explained in Connect the internal power supply cable to your X effects card on page 16 Remove the metal plate located at the back of the slot you ll be using Save the screw for the mounting bracket Position your X effects card over the slot that you ve chosen and push the card firmly and evenly until it s fully seated in the slot Using the fasten screw you removed in step 3 secure your X effect card s bracket to the computer frame If you re using your computer s internal power supply as an additional power source for your X effects card connect the male end of the internal power supply cable to a free outlet of your computer s internal power supply Note When you ve
107. able to help you quickly correct any installation or system configuration problem If your representative is unable to solve your problem contact Matrox for further information and assistance Registration You can register your Matrox Axio system in the Matrox Axio Support section of our website at www matrox com video support To go directly to the registration page choose Start gt All Programs gt Matrox Axio utils gt Register Your Matrox Axio System D Important Only registered users are entitled to customer support software updates access to our user forums and special promotional offers Keep up to date with our website In addition to registering your Matrox Axio our website offers you up to the minute information about Matrox products software updates and access to our support databases Be sure to place our site in your favorites or bookmarks www matrox com video support Contacting us Matrox is proud to offer worldwide customer support Please use the Matrox Axio contact information for your area as provided on our website at www matrox com video support Appendix E Matrox Axio Customer Support Numerics 1080i 25 fps project working with 254 256 10801 29 97 fps project working with 254 1080p 23 98 fps project working with 251 1080p 24 fps project working with 253 1080p 25 fps project working with 256 10 bit Uncompressed codec See Matrox 10 bit Uncompressed codec 3D DVE creating 148 mapping
108. ack level super black and super white wipe A transition in which one image is gradually replaced by another image that is revealed in a given pattern For example the second image could be revealed from the top of the screen downwards until it fills the entire screen See also organic wipe X X y z coordinate system A 3D positioning system that includes a third z axis running perpendicular to the horizontal x and vertical y axes The x y z coordinate system is used in computer graphics for creating models with height width and depth and for moving models in 3D space Y Y waveform A specialized scope that displays the luminance Y values of a video signal Y C video See S Video YC waveform A specialized scope that displays the combined luminance Y and chrominance C of a video signal Y Pb Pr video See Y R Y B Y video Y R Y B Y video An analog component video signal comprised of three channels Y luminance R Y red minus luminance and B Y blue minus luminance Also called Y Pb Pr video 291 Glossary of terms 292 Your notes Appendix D Matrox Axio Glossary Matrox Axio Customer Support This appendix explains how you can register your Matrox Axio and obtain customer support 294 Getting the most support If you have a problem that you re unable to solve by referring to your Matrox Axio documentation please contact your Matrox Axio representative He or she should be
109. age Note The values you can select using the Low Clip and Low Gain controls are dependent on the High Clip and High Gain controls and vice versa This prevents the low and high controls from keying on the same luminance values Mask Allows you to apply a mask to your effect For more information see Applying a mask to your effect on page 123 Transparent Outside Mask Select this option to apply transparency outside the mask area This allows you to define a mask area where you want the keying to be performed and show only your underlying image outside the mask For more information see Applying a mask to your effect on page 123 Invert Key Select this to invert the key selection giving you the opposite result of what you originally selected Show Key as Output Select this to display the matte used to create your key effect This enables you to further refine your key settings For example when you display the matte areas of your clip that are completely transparent appear as black and opaque areas appear as white If you notice some white spots that you want to key you can adjust the key controls until the undesired white spots disappear Using the luma key graph The luma key graph contains a luminance spectrum and a luminance eyedropper You can drag the handles in the luminance spectrum to adjust the Transparency Low Clip High Clip Low Gain and High Gain properties Eyedropper Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects
110. al for use in an online editing project Some of these clips are transferred to a compositing workstation that has the Matrox VFW Uncompressed codecs installed After compositing using a VFW application such as Adobe After Using the Matrox 8 bit and 10 bit Uncompressed HD codecs 250 Effects the clips are rendered for use on Matrox Axio using the Matrox VFW Uncompressed HD codec The online editing project is then completed on the Axio system and exported to tape for broadcast This workflow scenario is represented in the following diagram Video footage shot as any supported HD format Matrox 8 bit or 10 bit Uncompressed HD codec used to capture clips Matrox Axio online editing project using any Uncompressed HD project preset Exported to tape as finishing quality HD video for broadcast Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows Uncompressed HD clips transferred to compositing workstation Compositing workstation M with the Matrox VFW codecs installed uses a VFW application such as Adobe After Effects The completed compositing project is rendered using a t Matrox VFW Uncompressed HD codec Clips rendered using the Matrox VFW Uncompressed HD codec are imported into the online editing project 251 Applying pulldown in HD projects Depending on your HD project settings Matrox Axio applies a pulldown method so that you can capture an HD video format input format that is different from your project
111. alog To re enable the channel click the button again 4 Under SDI you can enable a maximum of four SDI audio pairs two pairs from any two groups To enable an audio pair for a group that is presently not available you must mute both audio pairs from one of the currently selected groups Once an SDI channel becomes available you can click its button to enable the channel the speaker icons will appear on the button 5 Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 83 Specifying settings for 5 1 surround mapping X linkHD and X linkSD You can indicate which 5 1 surround channels you want to assign to the audio outputs from the X linkHD or X linkSD breakout box when playing back 5 1 surround tracks in your sequence gt To specify your 5 1 surround mapping settings 1 Choose Project Project Settings General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Audio Output tab then click the 5 1 Surround Mapping tab Group 3 Group 4 Note The AES EBU channels are not available on X linkSD 3 Under Surround Channels drag the speaker buttons representing each of the 5 1 surround channels to the particular output channels to which you want them to be assigned For example to output the front left and right channels to the analog left and right outputs drag the Z NI button to Analog L R You can select Output center subwoofer
112. alyzer will automatically be run to optimize your Chapter 6 Installing Your Matrox Axio Software 55 GPU for use with Axio LE You can run this program manually if requested by Matrox Customer Support by choosing Start gt All Programs gt Matrox Axio utils gt Matrox GPU Performance Analyzer Adding the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in to NewTek LightWave 3D When you install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in for NewTek LightWave 3D the plug in is copied to your hard drive You must then add the plug in to NewTek LightWave 3D as follows 1 Start NewTek LightWave 3D 2 Choose Layout gt Plug ins gt Add Plug ins 3 Open the Input Output folder or the folder where you chose to install the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in and double click the mvelwpreview p file 4 Click the OK button in the Add Plug ins dialog box Installing additional Matrox effect patterns or removing unneeded patterns When you install Matrox Axio utils you are asked to select the video formats for which you want to install the Matrox effect patterns GFX files If after you ve installed Matrox Axio utils you find that you need to install patterns for additional video formats or remove patterns for formats that you no longer use you can run the Matrox Effect Patterns Setup program by choosing Install Matrox effect patterns from the Matrox Axio menu You ll be prompted to select the video formats for which you want to install the Matrox effect patterns and clear the selections
113. amp Scale to expand the property list The Matrox move amp scale effect lets you position and scale your clips anywhere in 2D space while adding soft edges in real time The move amp scale effect provides the sharpest picture when creating a Vv th Matrox Move amp Scale e 2D Transform X Position Y Position X Scale NOCONZONZ 5cale i Fixed Aspect Ratio ivi Anchor Point X amp Y 360 0 243 9 Edge Softness Crop 2D Transform X Y Position Use these controls to position your clip on the x horizontal and y vertical axes X and y values of 0 0 pixels align the center of your clip with the center of the screen and positions are measured from this point You can enter positive or negative pixel values to move your clip right or left x and up or down y X Y Scale Use these controls to make your clip smaller or larger Full screen size is represented as 100 You can shrink your clip to 0 or enlarge it to 100096 Note however that by enlarging your clip the resolution may become blurry You can adjust the size controls individually or if you select Fixed Aspect Ratio you only need to adjust the x axis Adjusting the percentage on the x and y axes changes your clip s width and height respectively Anchor Point X amp Y Sets the point of origin from which to scale your clip along the x horizontal and y vertical axes X Y Edge Softness Lets you apply softness to t
114. an also perform an auto balance or a color match using the buttons beneath the color maps For more information see Performing an auto balance on page 132 and Matching colors between two clips on page 133 Depending on which color map you use you can adjust your clip globally or only the shadows midtones or highlights Master Shadows 2 Reference Match Reference Match H c gm cw Bro H o Auto White Balance _Auto Balance Midtones HighLights d Reference Match Reference Match Hro gm peo 6G Auto Balance Auto Balance You can drag the handle in the center of any color map to adjust the color balance Hue and Saturation for a specific tonal range such as to adjust the color balance globally throughout your clip using the Master color map or adjust the color balance of only the shadows using the Shadows color map Drag the handle toward a color you want to increase in your clip or away from a color you Creating a primary color correction 130 want to decrease For example if you move the handle towards red you also decrease cyan by the same amount as shown in the following diagram L Tip For increased precision hold down the ALT key while you drag the handle If you want to reset the color balance Hue and Saturation setting click the Reset Color Balance button under the color map you are using Shadows 2 Reset Color Balance button lt lt A Reference Match Eo H
115. and drag directly in the Select Mask window to create the rectangular area where you wish to apply the mask You can resize the mask area by dragging any side of the rectangle For example dragging the right side of the rectangle adjusts the right edge of the mask area To resize the entire mask area at once drag one of the corners the corner that s diagonally opposite the corner you are moving will remain stationary Use the Left Right Top and Bottom controls to adjust any edge of your mask by a given number of pixels You can enter values in the text boxes or drag the sliders to resize your mask area For example drag the Left slider to adjust the left edge of your mask area Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 125 Creating a primary color correction Color correction is important for all productions whether you want to achieve continuity when cutting between shots ensure broadcast safe levels or establish and emphasize a look Matrox color correction provides basic proc amp control three way color correction complete with master shadows midtones and highlights control and input and output level control You can also easily match colors with a reference shot For more information about color matching see Matching colors between two clips on page 133 i Tip Adobe Premiere Pro includes a workspace setup that is optimized for working with clips and effects to facilitate color correct
116. ant to apply an effect such as a Matrox chroma key or apply motion to your matte using a Matrox 3D DVE or Adobe Premiere Pro Motion effect you must apply this effect before applying the Matrox Source Identifier effect Creating a track matte effect 202 4 Place your foreground clip the clip you want to superimpose onto your background clip directly above your matte clip and apply the Matrox Track Matte effect to this clip Your sequence should be similar to the following example Matrox Track Matte effect applied to foreground clip S Vide Matrox Source Identifier SB Video2 effect applied to matte clip D Video 1 5 Click the triangle beside Matrox Track Matte to expand the property list 7 Matrox Track Matte Select Matte Source Composite Type Luma 16 Y Reverse Li 6 Click the triangle beside Select Matte Source and select the unique ID number that you assigned to your matte clip 7 Click the triangle beside Composite Type and select any of the following composite types Alpha Uses the alpha channel of your matte to key your foreground image This is applicable only if your matte is a graphics clip that has an alpha channel or a clip to which you ve applied an effect that provides an alpha channel such as a Matrox chroma key Luma 0 255 Uses the full range of luminance levels in your matte to key your foreground image This is applicable only if your matte contains super black and sup
117. are eene 56 Chapter 7 Working with mxf and avi files Working with native mxf files in Adobe Premiere Pro and After ETIGCUS inii eiec iie ee sicinc dead ii ul ipae sc AR ARAM WIL UG du Rx IDE 58 Steps for using mxf files in your projects useeseseeeeeeseseee 58 Displaying information for clips in Windows Explorer 59 Contents viii TUMEONA WNely iizis d I LS 59 Additional me detalls scc aue Rex D ERO e ARI x da aa 59 Creating Matrox EZ MXEF files for playback with VEM appliC BHOFPIS esas rat eren unn pA xpi RPERV vas tenes cR SED RPM SR EA ERE SA ERE 60 Panasonic P2 folder GUOCLUFG siiis aereas ruis rinnen aE Pavxc uv TPETDIUECKRES 61 Converting a 32 bit tga sequence to an avi file with alpha 61 Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings A note about running other programs with Adobe Premiere PrO 2 rieseei siis kk esee eea Re RRURERERRaC A EAR RAARDIE 66 Loading project presets eor ereco senescere sep eo S eR ere e PPM REIR RUM EE 66 Setting p your scratch GISKS eocaineece ie aote ux nan R AR rA E ExR AER KR ARE MEE 67 Displaying warnings in Adobe Premiere Pro s Events panel 67 Mixing SD and HD clips in a project eese 68 Defining your General settings eee 69 Selecting options for accelerated Premiere Pro effects 72 Specifying your video outp
118. areas of an image on the screen CPU Central processing unit The central processor of a computer that performs calculations and interprets and executes commands CPU based effect An effect that takes advantage of your computer s CPU to play back in real time Matrox Flex CPU effects such as the Matrox color correction effects are CPU based effects Compare with hardware accelerated effect crawl Sideways movement of text across a screen See also roll 1 crossfade See dissolve crystallize effect A Matrox effect that lets you choose from many different patterns to make your image or text appear as if it is made of crystals cube effect A Matrox effect that lets you map video or graphics to the faces of 3D cubes These cubes can then be rotated in 3D space to create transition effects such as those seen during sports broadcasts Appendix D Matrox Axio Glossary cut A direct switch from one video and or audio source to another D D 9 Originally known as Digital S A variant of the DV format developed by JVC that uses a data rate of 50 Mb sec 5 96 MB sec which is double the data rate of most other DV formats Video is sampled at 4 2 2 for both NTSC and PAL sources to give enhanced chroma resolution It uses a 1 2 metal particle tape D10 See IMX Digital8 A camcorder video format developed by Sony Digital8 camcorders use the DV format to record digital video and audio onto 8mm and Hi 8 tapes
119. ation 3 000 meters Maximum altitude for transport 12 000 meters Operating humidity 20 to 80 relative humidity non condensing Storage humidity 5 to 9596 relative humidity non condensing Important To avoid damage to your Matrox Axio components and or computer system make sure that you don t operate your Axio cards at or near the maximum operating temperature for a prolonged period of time see Monitoring your Axio hardware operating temperatures on page 229 for more information Appendix C Matrox Axio Specifications 267 X effects card General PCI interface Full size PCI X 66 100 MHz card Regulatory compliance FCC Class A CE Mark Class A ACA Class A Nominal card dimensions Card 12 2 x 4 2 Card including bracket 13 875 x 4 9 Overall thickness including components 0 75 Typical operating voltages and current consumption External power supply configuration Voltage 3 3V 5V 12 V 12V Current 0 62 A 0 48 A 3 8 A 0A Total power consumption 50 watts Internal power supply configuration Voltage 3 3V 5V 12 V 12V Current 0 62 A 2 48 A 2 8 A 0A Total power consumption 48 watts Environmental specifications D Minimum maximum card ambient operating temperatures 0 to 55 C Minimum maximum storage temperature 40 to 75 C Maximum altitude for operation 3 000 meters Maximum altitude for transport 12 000 meters Opera
120. ation Rotates the light along the y axis ZLight Rotation Rotates the light along the z axis Cube Faces Front Back Left Right Top Bottom All six cube faces share the following settings Cube Face Source Sets whether the corresponding cube face displays a color the primary source that the cube effect is applied on or one of the two extra sources as selected under Additional Sources Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your source clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 The crop settings are available only when the corresponding face is set to display a video source 161 Creating a cube effect 162 D Important With the Matrox cube effect the cropped area is automatically stretched to the original size of your clip As a result the output may exceed the cropped area Color Source Options The color source options are available only when the corresponding face is set to display a color as specified using Cube Face Source Color Sets the color to apply to the corresponding face Alpha Sets the opacity of the color Transform Use these controls to apply or change various transform settings for your cube effect such as the position scale and rotation of the cube For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 163 Creating a crystallize effect The Matrox crystallize effect lets you choo
121. atrox AVI From the Range list select an export range then select any additional export options From the menu on the left side of the dialog box choose Video 4 From the Compressor list select the compression format you want for your exported file Important The Matrox codecs are listed in all supported SD and HD formats The format is shown in brackets beside the codec name such as NTSC Make sure you select a Matrox codec in one of the supported video formats for your project as listed in the above table Matrox DV DVCAM Renders video to DV or DVCAM format Matrox DVCPRO Renders video to DVCPRO format Matrox DVCPRO5BO Renders video to DVCPROSO or D 9 format Matrox DVCPROHD Renders video to DVCPRO HD format supported only for HD projects with a format of 10801 or 720p Matrox 8 bit Uncompressed Renders video to 8 bit uncompressed format Matrox 10 bit Uncompressed Renders video to 10 bit uncompressed format Not supported when exporting on Matrox Axio LE Matrox MPEG 2I frame Renders video to MPEG 2 intra frame format using the 4 2 2 Profile Main Level at a selected data rate SD resolution only Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Renders video to MPEG 2 intra frame format using the 4 2 2 Profile High Level at a selected data rate HD resolution only Matrox Offline HD Renders video to proxy HD video format for offline editing purposes If you selected Matrox MPEG 2 I frame or Matrox
122. audio input levels by speaking into the microphone and use the VU meters in the Audio Input Levels window to check the audio input levels While speaking into the microphone watch the input levels and adjust the audio level on your source device if needed Note The Meter Input s Only option is not supported in Adobe Premiere Pro s Audio Mixer when using the Matrox ASIO driver as the default device Click OK to save your settings then click OK to close the Project Settings dialog box Recording your voice over You use Adobe Premiere Pro s Audio Mixer to record your voice over For further information on using the Audio Mixer see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation 1 2 Choose Window gt Audio Mixer then select the sequence in which you want to record your voice over for example Window gt Audio Mixer gt Sequence 01 Position the current time indicator in the Timeline panel where you want the voice over to begin Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 109 Note fa track that you ll be recording your voice over on already contains audio at the current time indicator the audio will be overwritten by your voice over In the Audio Mixer panel click the Record Enable button X for each track on which you want to record audio You can record your voice over on multiple tracks at the same time If you enable recording for a mono track you can select Matrox Left or Matrox Right to indicate which chan
123. ave 3D 1 Start NewTek LightWave 3D and load the file you want to preview by choosing File gt Load gt Load Scene Click the Render tab Under Options on the left hand side of the screen click Render Globals From the Render Display menu select Matrox WYSIWYG Preview oa fF o N Under Render on the left hand side of the screen click Render Frame Required steps to use the WYSIWYG plug ins 224 Your notes Chapter 11 Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug ins 12 Monitoring Your Matrox Axio System This chapter explains how to use the Matrox X info program to display important details about your Matrox Axio system and installed hardware 226 Using X info to display Axio information The Matrox X info program lets you display information about your Matrox Axio system and installed hardware and provides warnings when certain problems arise for example when the temperature of one of your Axio hardware components exceeds the maximum operating temperature On Matrox Axio LE you can also use the X info program to enable and disable the Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro if you have a display card that supports these effects see Enabling and disabling the Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro on page 229 Matrox X info runs continuously to monitor your system whenever your computer is turned on You can open Matrox X info to display system and hardware details by double click
124. back on the timeline HD video footage S from mxf files imported to project 720p video on tape When capturing Panasonic VariCam material Axio will remove the redundant frames and create a clip in your project s format for editing 720p 23 98 fps and 25 fps projects only Matrox Axio editing project using a 720p project preset Exported to DVCPRO HD over the 1394 interface for 720p 59 94 fps project only Exported to tape as 720p 50 fps or 59 94 fps finishing quality video for broadcast Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows Exported to disk such as to an MPEG 2 file for DVD authoring or a Matrox avi or mxf file Exported to tape as NTSC or PAL finishing quality video for broadcast Editing HD projects on a Matrox Axio SD system Your collaborative workflow can be even more flexible and affordable with the ability to edit HD projects on a Matrox Axio SD system In other words HD project sharing can be done seamlessly between Matrox Axio HD SD and LE systems When you open an HD project for editing on Matrox Axio SD the video output is automatically downconverted to NTSC or PAL depending on the project s video format and the video processing format is set to 8 bit Because of the high quality downconverting you can use SD video monitors to preview your HD edits All Matrox Axio systems support native HDV and DVCPRO HD editing Although you can t capture HD cl
125. between the video fields or frames and typically works well on standard or slow paced video and camera pans For fast action video you may get better results by clearing this option To change the speed control method for a clip in the Timeline panel right click the clip and select Frame Blend to use the speed control method that s recommended for standard or slow paced video and camera pans or clear this option for fast action video Remarks The Frame Blend option is not supported for speed changes over 200 f you are working in HD you will need to render if you clear the Frame Blend option About Adobe Premiere Pro s fixed effects In Adobe Premiere Pro every clip in the Timeline panel has pre applied fixed effects When you select a clip in a sequence the fixed effects appear in the Effect Controls panel All fixed effects can be adjusted in the Effect Controls panel Adobe Premiere Pro s fixed effects include the Motion Opacity and Volume effects Matrox Axio provides realtime support for all of Premiere Pro s fixed effects Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 207 Matrox Axio realtime guidelines In your Adobe Premiere Pro projects you can use various combinations of realtime Matrox CPU based effects Flex CPU effects hardware accelerated effects Flex GPU effects and Adobe Premiere Pro fixed effects all with transparency Realtime means that the clips don t require render
126. ce and Cr red minus luminance gain of the component video output Under Advanced Settings select the format you want for your component video output and make any required timing adjustments to your SDI video output Component Output Format From this list select the format YUV or RGB that matches your component video output connections For example if the component video output from X linkHD is connected to a video monitor using analog component Y R Y and B Y connections select YUV SDI Horizontal Delay Use this slider to advance or delay the horizontal timing of the SDI video output Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box 75 Defining your General settings 76 Specifying your video output settings X linkSD You can specify various settings to configure your video output signals from the X linkSD breakout box such as to adjust the gain of your analog video and adjust the horizontal delay of your SDI video gt To specify your video output settings 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Video Output tab boe boom bro yy o com JEA N None d d oJ room D 0 00000 m 3 Under Component Gain use the sliders to increase or decrease the Y luminance Cb blue minus luminance and Cr red minus luminance gain of the component video output 4 Under S Video Gain
127. ce image pixel values to the shine pixel values This lightens the effect Modulate Miultiplies the shine pixel values with the source image pixel values This darkens the effect Subtract Subtracts the source image pixel values from the shine pixel values to create a new color Add Smooth Blending of the shine pixel values is performed only on the low saturated pale colors from the source image This will result in a more subtle effect Add Signed Adds the shine pixel values to the brightest pixel values of the source image Blend Blends the shine pixel values with the alpha pixel values of the source image Blend Signed Blends the shine pixel values with the brightest pixel values of the source image Original Opacity Sets the opacity of the source image Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 197 e Mask Settings Let you select a mask pattern and adjust the transparency settings to define the area where you want to apply your shine effect Enable Mask Select this option to enable the mask Mask Pattern Allows you to select a mask pattern Click the button on the right to see the list of masks Click here to select a mask pattern Invert Mask Select this option if you want to invert the opaque and transparent areas of your mask Outside Transparency Sets the transparency level of the region outside your mask Note The Outside Transparency setting is applicable only if y
128. ch the Matrox product interfaces product of a special or custom made nature unauthorized modification or misuse improper installation misapplication or negligence operation outside the product s environmental specifications improper site preparation or maintenance software other causes that do not relate to a product defect defects or damage suffered as a result of force majeure including theft defects or damage suffered as a result of normal wear and tear and or stolen goods If Matrox receives from you during the applicable warranty period notice of a defect in a warranted hardware product and the defective Matrox product in question Matrox shall at its sole option either repair or replace the product and shall return the repaired product or a replacement product within a reasonable delay The replacement product may not be new provided that it has functionality at least equal to that of the product being replaced this warranty is valid in any country where Matrox hardware products are distributed by Matrox or its authorized dealers This limited warranty statement gives you specific legal rights you may also have other rights which vary from state to state in the united states from province to province in Canada and from country to country elsewhere in the world Limitations of warranty EXCEPT FOR THE SOFTWARE LIMITED WARRANTY AND HARDWARE LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENTS NE
129. clips 1080p 23 98 fps Upscale 486p 23 98 fps HDV 10801 29 97 fps Upscale NTSC clips HDV 1080i 25 fps U pscale PAL clips NTSC Downscale 1080i and HDV 1080i 29 97 fps clips PAL Downscale 1080i and HDV 10801 25 fps clips 486p 23 98 fps Downscale 1080p 23 98 fps clips HDV 1080i 1440x 1080 clips are automatically upscaled when imported to a 1080i 1920x 1080 project and don t require you to use Adobe Premiere Pro s Scale to Frame Size feature Note Realtime scaling is not supported for Matrox offline HD clips or Matrox avi files with alpha Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 69 Defining your General settings The Matrox Playback Settings dialog box has several pages that you can use to specify various settings for editing in Adobe Premiere Pro on Matrox Axio When you select a Matrox project preset such as DV Standard a Matrox editing mode is automatically set for your project and many settings are optimized for editing on Matrox Axio gt To specify your General settings on Matrox Axio 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the General tab Broadcast Matrox move amp scale v Under Scrubbing Mode select Frame 1st Field or 2nd Field to indicate whether you want to display frames or only one field when you scrub a sequence in the Timeline panel For example you may want to scrub the first
130. compressed SD Alpha codec configuring for VFW render 215 selecting for VFW render 215 Matrox Uncompressed SD codec configuring for VFW render 215 selecting for VFW render 215 Matrox VFW software codecs installing 56 Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel using 220 Index Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins about 220 installing 54 55 re installing 55 removing 55 required steps 222 supported programs for 53 Matrox X info using 226 Memory usage monitoring in Adobe Premiere Pro 226 Monitoring your system with X info 226 Mono stereo mapping displaying settings for X linkLE 86 selecting settings for X linkHD and X linkSD 82 Motion effects selecting options for 72 Move amp scale effect creating 180 mapping Motion effect to 72 MPEG 2 Elementary files exporting for DVD project 110 MPEG 2 I frame codec See Matrox MPEG 2 I frame codec MPEG 2 I frame HD codec See Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec MPEG 2 I frame HD settings selecting in Adobe Premiere Pro 105 MPEG 2 I frame settings selecting in Adobe Premiere Pro 105 selecting in VFW programs 216 MPEG 2 I frame video quality selecting in VFW programs 216 MXF files creating reference AVI files using Matrox EZ MXF 60 displaying information in Windows Explorer 59 exporting using Adobe Premiere Pro 102 using in projects 58 Index N NewTek LightWave 3D WYSIWYG plug in about 220 adding to Plug ins folder 55 required steps 223 See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins NTFS for
131. control method selecting 206 Split View using 127 working with in the Program Monitor 127 Standard pulldown description of 232 See also Advanced pulldown Style conventions 6 Super black allowing for output video 75 77 80 Super white allowing for output video 75 77 80 Surface finish effect creating 198 S Video gain adjusting for X linkSD 76 System information displaying with X info 226 System requirements for Matrox Axio HD and SD 4 for Matrox Axio LE 5 T Tapes preparing for export to tape 111 Technical support See Customer support 294 Temperatures monitoring 229 TGA sequence converting to an AVI file with alpha 61 Thumbnails preview 59 Time base corrector source device with without 94 Titles supported formats 208 Track matte effect creating 201 305 Transforming aclip 118 using the Program Monitor 120 using the transform controls 118 Transitions applying realtime 117 disabling accelerated realtime 72 Twirl effect creating 203 V VariCam capture 93 257 Ventilation 10 32 Vertical delay adjusting 89 Video capture settings 91 Video connections for X linkHD 22 for X linkLE 40 for X linkSD 22 Video effects applying realtime 117 Video for Windows programs 210 rendering Matrox AVI file 214 Video for Windows software codecs installing 56 Video luma level 69 Video output settings for X linkHD 74 for X linkLE 78 80 for X linkSD 76 Video processing format 70 Video quality selecting
132. ct The Matrox cube effect lets you map video or graphics to the faces of 3D cubes These cubes can then be rotated in 3D space to create transition effects such as those you often see during sports broadcasts The Matrox cube effect supports up to three video sources one primary source that the cube effect is applied on and up to two additional sources If you want to use additional sources in your cube effect the additional source clips must be placed below and in the same segment as the primary source Each additional source is identified by applying the Matrox Source Identifier effect to the clip Matrox Cube Effect applied to primary source Matrox Source Identifier effect applied to the first and second additional sources You must identify each additional source with a unique ID To do this click the triangle beside Matrox Source Identifier to expand the property list and then select an ID number from the Identify As list as shown below You can then reference the ID number using the Additional Sources setting of the Matrox cube effect Select a unique ID number for the additional source gt To set up a Matrox cube effect In the Effect Controls panel click the triangle beside Matrox Cube to expand the property list Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro Additional Sources References up to two additional sources that you identified by applying the Matrox Source Identifier
133. ct Settings gt General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Audio Output tab then click the General tab Hi Z high impedance 3 Under Analog Audio Volume drag the sliders to adjust the volume of your analog audio output By default the sliders are locked so that they move together To move each slider independently click the lock button to disable it 4 From the SDI Audio Output Format list select the bit depth you want for your embedded SDI audio output 20 bit or 24 bit 5 From the XLR Output Impedance list select the impedance setting you want for your balanced analog XLR audio output such as Hi Z high impedance 6 Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Defining your General settings 82 Specifying settings for mono and stereo mapping X linkHD and X linkSD You can choose to mute or enable each of the audio outputs from the X linkHD or X linkSD breakout box when playing back mono and stereo tracks in your sequence gt To specify your mono stereo mapping settings 1 Choose Project Project Settings General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Audio Output tab then click the Mono Stereo Mapping tab Group 3 Group 4 Note The AES EBU channels are not available on X linkSD 3 To mute the output for a particular channel click its speaker button For example to mute the analog output click the speaker button under An
134. ct to the horizontal sync of your genlock source for composite video only SDI Horizontal Delay Advances or delays the horizontal timing of the SDI video output Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box 77 Defining your General settings 78 Specifying your video output settings X linkLE You can specify various settings to configure your video output signals from the X linkLE breakout box such as to specify your main and secondary SDI output formats analog output format and the setup level for NTSC analog video Advanced settings such as horizontal delay and SC H phase adjustments are provided on a separate page gt To specify your video output settings 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Video Output tab then click the General tab Same as Main SDI Out Setup 0 IRE v HTSZ amp 1 Output Anamorphic hb Tyne Component 3 Under Main SDI Output Format select the video format you want for your main SDI output SDI OUT 1 from the X linkLE breakout box Depending on your project s video format you may not be able to change the main SDI output format Note The second SDI output SDI OUT 2 from the X linkLE breakout box supports SD SDI video only If you re working with an HD project your secondary SDI output format will be set to NTSC or PAL depending on your pro
135. cting to audio cable bracket 44 connecting to Axio LE card 43 description 40 digital video connections 49 mounting on desktop 41 mounting to rack 41 S Video connections 48 using S Video adapter cables 45 See also Breakout box X linkSD breakout box analog component connections 27 connecting to computer 25 description 22 digital video connections 29 mounting 22 specifications 268 S Video connections 28 See also Breakout box XDCAM files See Sony XDCAM files XLR output impedance selecting for X linkHD and X linkSD 81 selecting for X linkLE 85 Compliance Statements USA FCC Compliance Statement Remark for the Matrox hardware products supported by this guide This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense WARNING Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for the compliance could void the user
136. cting using Pan Position Creating a pan amp scan effect 190 Creating a ripple effect The Matrox ripple effect lets you create 3D ripple patterns that simulate a flag waving ripples in a pond or a dream sequence 7 ok Matrox Ripple e D Global Settings D Lighting D Border Settings b Crop gt Ripple Softness 0 00 p Transform Global Settings XCenter Sets the center position of the ripple along the horizontal axis Y Center Sets the center position of the ripple along the vertical axis Center Ripple in Crop Region Select this option to move the center position of the ripple to the center of your crop region Progression Sets the progression of your ripple pattern at any keyframe In order to see your ripple pattern progress you need to apply at least two keyframes to your clip For example create a keyframe at the first frame of your clip with Progression set to 0 degrees and another keyframe at the last frame of your clip with Progression set to 45 degrees For information about creating keyframes see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Amplitude Sets the maximum height of the ripple Periods Sets the number of visible waves in the ripple Attenuation Specifies the distance from the center of the ripple x and y positions at which the ripple will degrade or flatten Lighting Shadow Color Use this to select a color for the ripple shadow Shadow I
137. d near the card bracket gt Toset your X effects card to receive power from the internal power supply Push the power selection switch towards the back of your X effects K GES N card as indicated in the following i p a N4 illustration Di a Power selection IA le switch set for W La ji use with i internal power i supply Lr T X effects Wy card Before you install your Matrox Axio card set 16 gt To set your X effects card to receive power from the external power supply Push the power selection switch towards 4 p the front of your X effects card as F4 Ak lt i N indicated in the following illustration E p e p a en selection switch set for a use with Pi external power j supply p m di J T NE A 8 X effects card External power supply connector Connect the internal power supply cable to your X effects card If you set your X effects card to receive power from your computer s internal power supply as explained in the previous section you must connect the provided internal power supply cable for X effects as follows Internal Attach the female end of your power supply internal power supply cable to cable the 4 pin male connector locat ed near the middle of your X effects card Internal power supply connector X effects card Chapter 2 Installing Your Matrox Axio HD or SD Hardware 17 I
138. d transparent areas of your mask Apply Crop to Video Only Select this if you want the mask to be squeezed to fit your cropped clip If you don t select this option the mask will be cropped by the same amount that you crop your clip Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 175 Transform Use these controls to apply or change various transform settings for your mask effect such as the position scale and rotation of the mask For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Creating a mask effect 176 Creating a mask blur effect The Matrox mask blur effect lets you create a region of interest by adding a mask to your clip and applying blurring to it You can choose from many different mask patterns gt To set up a Matrox mask blur effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Mask Blur to expand the property list 7 Ik Matrox Mask Blur e p Blur Settings D Color Gain Settings Db Mask Settings D Crop Blur Settings Let you adjust the amount of blurring in your clip Red Green Blue and Alpha Blur Amount Use these controls to adjust the amount of blurring to be applied to each of the color and alpha channels in your clip For example you can choose to apply blurring to only the red color component of your clip The Alpha Blur Amount is applicable only to graph
139. d by the application to remove the additional fields For standard reverse pulldown that is performed on compressed video the application must decompress frames in order to remove the additional fields and then it must recompress frames to complete the conversion Matrox Axio implementation of standard reverse pulldown In order for Matrox Axio to properly perform a standard reverse pulldown the material that is to be converted from 29 97 fps interlaced video to 23 98 fps progressive video must have been originally acquired at 23 98 fps When Matrox Axio performs a standard reverse 2 3 pulldown the process identifies the A frames of a sequence as those frames that have time code ending in 0 or 5 For example a frame with the time code 00 00 20 20 or 00 00 20 25 would be considered an A frame and therefore would be used as the first frame in a pulldown sequence In the case of batch captures when the first frame of a clip that is to be captured might not always be an A frame Matrox Axio advances to the next instance of an A frame in the clip to start the pulldown sequence if it s required In order for Matrox Axio to perform standard reverse 2 3 pulldown accurately the clips must have A frames appearing at time codes 0 and 5 The clips must also be recorded to a tape that has continuous non drop frame time code Advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown Advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown was developed as an alternative to the standard pulldown method for ma
140. d only while the tape is moving See also VITC luma key An effect that makes portions of a foreground image fully or partially Glossary of terms 286 transparent based on the luminance of that image so that an underlying image can show through See also alpha key and chroma key luminance The brightness portion of a video signal The luminance of a pixel determines its brightness on a scale from black to white See also chrominance luminance key See luma key M mark in To select the first frame of a clip mark out To select the last frame of a clip mask effect A Matrox effect that lets you apply a mask cutout shape to a clip to superimpose it onto another clip mask blur effect A Matrox effect that lets you create a region of interest by adding a mask to your clip and applying blurring to it mask mosaic effect A Matrox effect that lets you create a region of interest by adding a mask to your clip and applying a mosaic effect to it MIP mapping In 3D graphics a rendering technique where a texture is stored at multiple resolutions See also texture mapping M JPEG See Motion JPEG mosaic effect An effect that blurs an image by copying pixels into adjacent pixels both horizontally and vertically This gives the image a blocky appearance often used to hide people s identities on television move amp scale effect A Matrox effect that lets you position and scale your clips anywhere in
141. d order NTSC Lower PAL Upper 486p 23 98 fps None Progressive 720p 23 98 fps 25 fps 29 97 fps None Progressive 50 fps and 59 94 fps 10801 25 fps and 29 97 fps Upper HDV 10801 25 fps and 29 97 fps Upper 1080p 23 98 fps and 24 fps None Progressive 1080p 25 fps Upper gt To export material using Matrox Media Encoder 1 Start Adobe Premiere Pro and open the project from which you want to export material 2 If you want to export only part of your sequence drag the ends of the work area bar so that it extends over the length of the area you want to export 3 Choose File gt Export gt Matrox Media Encoder Select the export format you want from the Format list To export material for DVD authoring select MPEG2 DVD 5 Select a preset from the Preset list that matches the type of export you want to perform a summary of the settings will be displayed in the Export Settings dialog box If you selected MPEG2 DVD as your export format click the Video tab and make sure that the appropriate field order is selected as shown in the above table 6 Click OK specify a name location and export range for the export then click Save The export settings are the same as provided for Adobe Media Encoder For details on using these settings see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 111 Setting up Matrox DV HDV device control Matrox DV HDV device control lets
142. damage to your Matrox Axio components and or computer system make sure that you don t operate your X linkSD at or near the maximum operating temperature for a prolonged period of time see Monitoring your Axio hardware operating temperatures on page 229 for more information Appendix C Matrox Axio Specifications 271 X linkKHD breakout box General Video standards NTSC PAL NTSC EIAJ 1080i 1080p PsF 720p Dimensions 12 875 x 3 5 x 2 975 Typical operating voltages and current consumption Voltage 3 3V 5V 12V 12V Current 0A 1 2 A 0 9 A 0 18 A Total power consumption 19 Watts Video input signals Signal Type Qty Voltage Impedance SD SDI HD SDI 1 Compliant with 75 Q SMPTE 259M SMPTE 292M 1394 1 200 mV 1109 Reference In 1 SD 1 0 V 75 Q HD 1 0 V p p tri sync 75Q X linkHD breakout box 272 Video output signals Signal Type Qty Voltage Impedance Component Video 1 Luminance signal Y 1 0 Vp 75 Chrominance signal PAL 0 700 V at 100 color bar 75 B Y R Y NTSC 0 700 V at 75 color bar 7150 NTSC EIAJ 0 757 V at 75 color 75 Q bar HD 0 700 V at 100 color bar 75 Q OR Chrominance signal R B 0 700 V at 100 color bar 75 Q R G B HD only G IV with sync at 100 color 75 Q bar SD SDI HD SDI 1 Compliant with 75 Q SMPTE 259M SMPTE 292M 1394 1 200 mV 1100 Audio input ou
143. dec If you plan to use a remote editing workstation such as a laptop computer you must also transfer the clips you ve captured using the Offline HD codec to a hard drive that you ll be using with your remote editing system Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows 241 gt To create your new offline HD editing project 1 Open a new Adobe Premiere Pro project by choosing File gt New and from the Available Presets list expand the Matrox HD folder and select the Offline preset for the type of project you want to create 2 Select your capture settings as explained in Defining your Capture settings on page 91 3 Capture your clips using the Matrox Offline HD codec You can now work with the offline HD clips in the current project or transfer the clips to a remote Premiere Pro editing workstation If you intend on completing your offline HD project on a remote editing workstation go to the next section If you intend on completing your offline HD editing project on Matrox Axio go to Recapturing your clips at full HD resolution on page 242 Creating an offline HD project on a remote editing workstation As mentioned the Matrox VFW Offline HD codec allows you to work with low resolution HD clips in Adobe Premiere Pro on a system that doesn t have the Matrox Axio hardware You must however have the Matrox VFW software codecs installed on this system see Installing the Matrox VFW software codecs on a system without the Axio hardware
144. default If you re having problems with these effects however you may want to clear this option to disable the effects To enable the Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro you must be using Axio LE with a display card that has at least 256 MB of onboard memory and supports Microsoft DirectX 9 You can t enable the Matrox hardware accelerated effects if Matrox has tested your display card and determined that it doesn t support these effects You can check the Matrox Video Support site for up to date information about the display cards tested by Matrox at www matrox com video support If you select Automatically check for Matrox validated display card each time you start your system X info will connect to the Matrox Video website to determine whether or not the currently installed display card supports the Matrox hardware accelerated effects and will warn you if the effects cannot be enabled Note If you don t want X info to automatically check your system for a Matrox validated display card you can manually perform the update by choosing Start gt All Programs gt Matrox Axio utils gt Check for Matrox validated Display Card You must however have a working internet connection to do this Using X info to display Axio information 230 Error notification As well as temperature warnings there are a number of other possible hardware problems that X info looks for for example if the fan on your X effects card
145. deo image indicating unstable sync RS 232 A non differential serial data transmission standard used for computer connections See also serial control RS 422 A differential serial data transmission standard that is often used for linking video production equipment VTRs mixers etc Because this standard is differential RS 422 connections are less subject to interference and noise than RS 232 connections See also serial control S saturation A measure of the depth of a color Fully saturated colors are vivid while colors that lack saturation look washed out or faded scroll See roll 1 SD Short for SDTV SDTV Standard Definition Television A television format with image resolutions up to 525 vertical scan lines for NTSC video and 625 vertical scan lines for PAL video SDTV can have a 4 3 or 16 9 aspect ratio See also HDTV SECAM S quentiel Couleur Avec M moire sequential color with memory A color television system developed in France and the former USSR It uses a composite interlaced display comprised of 625 scan lines per frame refreshed at a rate of 25 frames per second The color difference signals are transmitted sequentially on alternate lines serial control A method of remotely controlling a device via a data line The control data is transmitted in serial form that is one bit after another such as for RS 232 and RS 422 connections setup See black level shadow effect A Matrox effect t
146. dio cable bracket contain other cards either move them to unused slots or remove them completely To determine the particular slot in which you should install your Axio LE card for recommended systems and motherboards see the Matrox Video Support site at www matrox com video support gt To install your Axio LE card 1 Make sure the internal analog audio cable is connected between the Axio LE card and the audio cable bracket as explained in Connect the internal analog audio cable to your Axio LE card on page 36 2 Remove the metal plates located at the back of the two slots you ll be using for your Axio LE card and the audio cable bracket Save the screws for the mounting brackets 3 Position your Axio LE card and audio cable bracket over the two slots that you ve chosen and push them in firmly and evenly until they are fully seated in the slots 4 Using the fasten screws you removed in step 2 secure your Axio LE card and audio cable bracket to the computer frame 5 Using the four small screws provided with your Axio LE audio cable bracket secure the two ends of the audio cable bracket to the computer frame 6 Replace your computer s cover Before restarting your computer You must connect your external devices such as X linkLE breakout box VTRs DV camcorder etc before attempting to restart your computer For details about these tasks see Chapter 5 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio LE Install your Mat
147. do this however any Frame Hold effects you ve applied will be ignored Under Premiere Pro Accelerated Effects you can select various options for your realtime accelerated Premiere Pro effects For example you can choose to disable certain features and specify how you want your Motion effects to be processed For details see Selecting options for accelerated Premiere Pro effects on page 72 Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 10 11 12 Under Realtime Indicator Threshold drag the slider to set the threshold at which Matrox Axio determines that a segment in the Timeline panel is realtime Drag to the left to set a lower safer threshold or to the right to set a higher more aggressive threshold For example if you find that Matrox Axio does not identify any segments as being non realtime that is with a red bar and you have dropped frames when you export your project to tape you can set a safer threshold to force more segments to require rendering and avoid having dropped frames Alternately if you find that some segments are identified with a red bar but they don t have dropped frames you can set a more aggressive threshold Under Multi camera Preview select Show only active camera on video monitor if you d like to see only the active camera on your video monitor when the Multi Camera Monitor is enabled To see all the camera previews on your video monitor make sure this option is cleared Note When
148. e HD Render previews DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame DVCPRO HD Offline HD 8 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD DV 1394 export to tape DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 DVCPRO HD HDV DVCPRO HD is supported only for 1080i and 720p projects DV 1394 capture is not supported for 720p 25 fps and 50 fps projects DV 1394 export to DVCPRO HD is supported only for 1080i and 720p 59 94 fps projects HDV is supported only for 1080i HDV 10801 and 720p projects DV 1394 export to HDV is not supported for 720p projects 3 SDI and analog component input is not supported for 720p 23 98 fps 25 fps and 29 97 fps projects When working with an HDV 1080i 1440x 1080 project MPEG 2 I frame HD is the only supported compression format for capturing SDI or analog component video exporting to disk and rendering previews Realtime playback is also supported when mixing SD and HD clips in the same project as explained in Mixing SD and HD clips in a project on page 68 When exporting an HD project to disk you can choose to downconvert the HD video to any of the supported SD video formats For details see Exporting to a Matrox avi file on page 99 and Exporting to a Matrox mxf file on page 102 Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows 263 Supported master output formats on Matrox Axio HD and SD The following table lists the supported master output formats
149. e Pro 121 Cropping your clip Many of the Matrox effects allow you to apply crop settings to your clip To apply crop settings click the triangle next to Crop to expand the property list Note If you re applying a Matrox effect that doesn t provide the Crop property you can apply realtime cropping to your clip using Adobe Premiere Pro s crop effect available in the Video Effects bin under Transform The Premiere Pro crop effect will remain realtime unless you enable the Zoom option For more information about using Premiere Pro s crop effect see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation The controls under Crop let you crop any edge of your clip You can enter the values you want in the text boxes or drag the appropriate sliders Left Right Top Bottom Crop Left Crops the left edge of your clip Crop Right Crops the right edge of your clip Crop Top Crops the top edge of your clip Crop Bottom Crops the bottom edge of your clip Select Crop Displays a dialog box in which you can apply your crop settings For details see Using Select Crop on page 122 Stretch to original size Select this to stretch the cropped area to the original size of your clip For the Matrox cube effect this option is not available because the cropped area is automatically stretched to fit the original size Cropping your clip 122 Using Select Crop To apply crop settings to your clip using the Select Crop dialog box click the tria
150. e an online editing project When the edit is complete it is exported to tape for broadcast Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows 249 This workflow scenario is represented in the following diagram Video footage shot as any supported HD format Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec MPEG 2 I frame HD set at 100 Mb sec or higher used to lips used in a VFW capture clips application on the Axio system M VFW application on the Axio system such as Adobe After Effects uses the MPEG 2 I frame HD clips The compositing project is rendered using t the Matrox VFW MPEG 2 Matrox Axio online editing project using any MPEG 2 l frame HD project preset l frame HD codec Clips rendered using the Matrox VFW MPEG 2 l frame HD codec are imported into the online editing project Exported to tape as finishing quality HD video for broadcast Using the Matrox 8 bit and 10 bit Uncompressed HD codecs For short video projects or when disk space is not an issue the Matrox Uncompressed HD codecs can be used to capture full resolution finishing quality HD video The Matrox VFW Uncompressed HD codecs allow you to use VFW applications such as Adobe After Effects to render and play back uncompressed HD video for use on Matrox Axio Note Axio LE supports 10 bit uncompressed HD video for playback only Matrox Uncompressed codec workflow example In this workflow example a Matrox Uncompressed HD codec is used to capture materi
151. e for mounting You have three choices for mounting your X link breakout box You can use the desktop foot or the desktop pedestal to mount your breakout box on your desktop You can also use the supplied rackmount brackets to mount your breakout box to a standard 19 rack Chapter 3 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio HD and SD 23 Using the desktop foot Desktop foot You can use the desktop foot to lay your X link breakout box flush on your desktop with its audio video connections facing up To use the desktop foot pull the foot out from the back of your breakout box and place the breakout box flush on your desktop Attaching the desktop pedestal Desktop pedestal A i 1 Unpack the desktop pedestal 2 Line up the pedestal guide tabs with the guide slots on the bottom of your X link breakout box 3 Line up the thumb screw on the pedestal with the threaded hole on the X link breakout box and carefully tighten the thumb screw until snug Do not overtighten Note To remove the desktop pedestal from the breakout box unscrew the thumb screw on the pedestal and lift up the breakout box Prepare for mounting 24 Attaching the rackmount brackets o o me i J Seas GJ 9 uw gg me Left rackmount bracket Right rackmount bracket 1 Unpack the two rackmount brackets and their four mounting screws AY Caution Use only the screws supplied with your Matrox Axio kit to a
152. e of your clip by dragging the slider or entering a percentage in the text box The higher the value the less sharp the edge will become Preprocessing These controls allow you to isolate a channel to process black and white values for your effect For example to adjust black and white values on the red channel only select Red Only as your mode Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro i 183 Enable Preprocessing Select this option to enable preprocessing Enabling this option will turn your clip black and white Note Adjusting the Color Gain and Color Addition controls will change the color of your clip If you would like your clip to remain black and white select Lock Colors for both the Color Gain and Color Addition Mode Lets you select the channel you want to use for the processing Click the triangle on the right to expand the list e Red Only Uses the red channel Green Only Uses the green channel Blue Only Uses the blue channel Alpha Only Uses the alpha channel e Luma Uses the luminance values Oversaturated Luma Uses the oversaturated luminance values only Noise Noise Pattern Allows you to select a noise pattern Click the button on the right to see the list of available patterns Click here to c select a noise He pattern Lifetime Sets the maximum number of frames that the noise pattern will remain immobile before moving to another random position O
153. ease or decrease the red present in your image Green Color Gain Lets you increase or decrease the green present in your image Blue Color Gain Lets you increase or decrease the blue present in your image Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Note If you are working in HD the blur soft focus effect may require rendering based on certain setting combinations Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 153 Overview of the chroma key effects You can use the Matrox realtime plug in to apply a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect to make certain areas of a foreground image transparent based on a color in that image so that an underlying image can show through In the following example of a chroma key effect our foreground image is a video clip of a woman sitting in front of a green backdrop and our underlying image is a video clip of a sand dune Foreground image Underlying image By chroma keying on the particular shade of green in the backdrop of the foreground image the backdrop area becomes transparent and the corresponding area of the underlying image shows through in the composite image as follows Result of chroma key a Important The chroma key shadow effect includes controls for fine tuning shadows in your effect It is best to use the chroma key shadow effect when you are performing a chroma key without any additional effect
154. ec 5 96 MB sec which is double the data rate of most other DV formats Video is sampled at 4 2 2 for both NTSC and PAL sources to give enhanced chroma resolution It uses the same type of tape as DVCPRO DVD Digital Versatile Disc or Digital Video Disc A type of compact disc that can hold from 4 7 gigabytes GB to 17 GB of information The greatest advantage that DVD has over CD is that it can store video as well as audio and computer data For video storage DVD uses MPEG 2 compression to provide better quality than standard VHS DVE Digital Video Effect Generally an effect that resizes and repositions a picture on the screen See also move amp scale effect E Edit Decision List EDL A file containing a list of edit decision statements used to create a video production edit master The first generation original of a final edited tape expansion slot Electrical connection slot mounted on a computer s motherboard main circuit board It allows several peripheral devices to be connected inside a computer See also AGP slot PCI slot PCI Express slot and PCI X slot F fade to black A transition commonly used to signify the end of a scene in which an image or sound smoothly fades to a black 283 Glossary of terms 284 screen or silence also called a fade out transition Similarly you could start a new scene with a fade up from black or fade in transition field One half of the horizontal lines
155. ecccsssssscscsssesscscsesseeeessssseeees Sony DVCAM HDV XDCAM XDCAM HD Victor Company of Japan Limited UVC JVC M D 97M HDVTM ASIO is a trademark and software of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH All other nationally and internationally recognized trademarks and tradenames are hereby acknowledged Copyright 2006 Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd All rights reserved Disclaimer Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd reserves the right to make changes in specifications at any time and without notice The in formation provided by this document is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd for its use nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties resulting from its use No license is granted under any patents or patent rights of Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd Unauthorized recording or use of broadcast television programming video tape or other copyrighted material may violate copyright laws Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd assumes no responsibility for the illegal duplication use or other acts that infringe on the rights of copyright owners Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd 1055 St Regis Blvd Dorval Quebec Canada H9P 2T4 Tel 514 685 2630 Fax 514 685 2853 World Wide Web www matrox com Matrox Axio License Agreement Warranty and Service A Matrox software license agreement for single user products By i
156. econfigured Matrox video effects found in the Matrox Effect Presets bin under Presets If you can t see the Effects panel choose Window gt Effects If you can t see the Effect Controls panel choose Window gt Effect Controls How to apply a Matrox video transition in Adobe Premiere Pro In Adobe Premiere Pro the Matrox wipe transitions are found in the Matrox bin under Video Transitions in the Effects panel There are numerous methods to create transitions in Premiere Pro Use the method that works best for you to apply your Matrox wipes For information on applying transitions see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation How to apply a Matrox video effect in Adobe Premiere Pro 118 Transforming your clip Many of the Matrox effects allow you to adjust the scale position and rotation of a clip by applying various transform settings You can adjust the transform settings in two ways Use the transform controls in the Effect Controls panel to adjust the settings you want Work directly in Adobe Premiere Pro s Program Monitor using your mouse For example click the desired transform button Position Scale Rotation or Rotation Center Offset then click and drag within the Program Monitor to make your adjustments To do this you ll need to activate the transform controls for use in the Program Monitor For more information see Transforming a clip in the Program Monitor on page 120 Note Ifyou are working with the
157. ect ss 206 Selecting your speed control method 206 About Adobe Premiere Pro s fixed effects 206 Matrox Axio realtime guidelines eee eeeeeeeese 207 Supported or phics TOITIYSbs ccu cac enasuire cese iia RE DERE ELEM DA 208 LIDS usui ExedctatePataionse ada bi Uum Hu u dena AM M aM bim e MR aaa nee SDE AME 208 Contents xi Chapter 10 Using Matrox Axio with Video for Windows Programs OVO PVCU M 210 Using VFW programs without the Axio hardware 211 Before you start rendering eiciieeiciiiieieci deduce nianon 211 Selecting color space conversion options ueessesuessss 212 Rendering material to a Matrox VFW avi file 214 Configuring the Matrox Uncompressed codecs seeeeeses 215 Configuring the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame codecs sssses 216 Chapter 11 Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug ins OVGIVICW nnnm 220 Configuring the Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel 220 Required steps to use the WYSIWYG plug ins 222 Adobe After Effects etnai are E obaavuP REFER AEE 222 Adobe Photoshop iiio enero rte rein noix as I pla Ie a a doRsav a E DRIED EE 222 Autodesk SOS ME s otariiazueicute itur Dau iure um tial uineis e
158. el An international standard video compression profile introduced by MPEG 2 It supports 4 2 2 luminance chrominance sampling at up to 720 x 608 pixel resolution and data transfer rates up to 50 Mb sec 5 96 MB sec This profile is used for high quality distribution and for archiving See also MP ML 4 corner pin A Matrox effect that lets you anchor each corner of a video or graphics clip onto points in an underlying clip even if the underlying clip is angled or skewed Appendix D Matrox Axio Glossary A A B roll Typically A B roll is an editing technique where scenes or sounds on two source reels called roll A and roll B are played simultaneously to create dissolves wipes and other effects On nonlinear editing systems A B roll refers to using two source streams avi wav tga and so on to create an effect advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown A method that is often used to convert 23 98 fps progressive video to NTSC when the video is acquired by a camera shooting at 23 98 fps and recorded to DV tape Advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown differs from standard 2 3 pulldown in that the two middle frames of a four frame sequence are each converted to three video fields This results in less image degradation when a reverse pulldown is performed to convert the video back to 23 98 fps progressive video AGP slot Connection slot to a type of expansion bus found in many computers The AGP slot is used to house the AGP display card alpha
159. em make sure that you don t operate your Axio LE card at or near the maximum operating temperature for a prolonged period of time see Monitoring your Axio hardware operating temperatures on page 229 for more information Axio LE card 278 Your notes Appendix C Matrox Axio Specifications Matrox Axio Glossary This glossary defines many of the terms used in this manual and related documentation 280 Glossary of terms Use this glossary as a reference for many of the basic terms in your Matrox Axio manual and related documentation Numerics 1394 See IEEE 1394 2 3 pulldown A method used to create additional video frames when 24 fps film footage or 23 98 fps progressive video is converted to 29 97 fps interlaced video such as NTSC To convert a four frame sequence of film or progressive video five frames of video are required The 2 3 pulldown sequence accomplishes this by representing the first frame of film or progressive video as two fields 1 frame the second frame as three fields 1 5 frames the third frame as two fields 1 frame and the fourth frame as three fields 1 5 frames See also advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown 2D Short for two dimensional An image that has height and width only 3D Short for three dimensional An object in three dimensions has height width and depth Various techniques are used to show 3D images on 2D surfaces like your computer screen 4 2 2P ML 4 2 2 Profile Main Lev
160. ency value of 100 makes the keyed area in your foreground image completely transparent leaving the underlying image visible e Low Clip Use this to select the lower darker luminance values to be keyed A Low Clip setting of 0 represents black and a setting of 255 represents white Intermediate settings represent different shades of gray from very dark to very light gray e Low Gain Use this to set the range of luminance values you want to be partially transparent based on the value set by the Low Clip control As you increase the Low Gain setting more luminance values become partially transparent to give you a softer edged key A Low Gain setting of 100 provides the widest range for maximum softness Alternately a gain setting of 0 creates a hard key where the luminance values are either completely transparent or opaque You can think of the Low Gain Creating a luma key effect 172 control as defining a Transparent to Opaque range for keying the dark areas of your foreground image High Clip This control is similar to Low Clip except you use it to select the higher brighter luminance values to be keyed High Gain This control is similar to Low Gain except you use it to set the range of luminance values you want to be partially transparent based on the value set by the High Clip control You can think of the High Gain control as defining an Opaque to Transparent range for keying the lighter areas of your foreground im
161. enlock during video playback 70 Returning procedure iv Ripple effect creating 190 S SC H Phase adjusting for X linkLE 80 adjusting for X linkSD 77 Scale to Frame Size applying in real time 68 disabling realtime 72 Scratch disks specifying 67 Scrubbing audio specifying preroll postroll frames 70 Scrubbing mode selecting 69 SD clips using in an HD project 68 SD projects compression formats on Axio HD 260 compression formats on Axio LE 262 Index compression formats on Axio SD 261 using HD clips in 68 SDI audio output format selecting for X linkHD and X linkSD 81 SDI horizontal delay adjusting for X linkHD 75 adjusting for X linkLE 80 adjusting for X linkSD 77 Secondary color correction creating a color pass effect 147 Secondary SDI output format for X linkLE 78 supported on Matrox Axio LE 264 Select Crop using 122 Select Mask using 124 Selective key graph using 142 Service returns iv Setup level selecting for NTSC analog video 75 77 79 Shadow effect creating 192 Shine effect creating 194 Software installation adding NewTek LightWave 3D WYSIWYG plug in 55 Matrox Axio utils 54 Matrox effect patterns 54 55 Matrox VFW software codecs 56 Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins 53 54 55 overview 52 Sony XDCAM files exporting to disk 102 using in projects 58 Source Identifier used in cube effect 160 used in track matte effect 201 Specifications for Matrox Axio 265 Speed changes selecting speed control method 206 Speed
162. eo for Windows program 2 Beside Frame Rate select a frame rate from the list Make sure the frame rate you select is appropriate for the format to which you are rendering Note The Frame Rate setting is not available if you re rendering to MPEG 2 I frame SD format without alpha 3 To apply advanced settings to your MPEG 2 I frame file click the Advanced button Note The Advanced button will be available only on a system that has the Matrox Axio hardware and is not available if you re rendering to MPEG 2 I frame SD format without alpha The default advanced settings should provide good results for most applications We recommend that you change these settings only when needed for special purposes Zig Zag Order Rounding Type DC Precision 8 bit X eda C WpEG 2 Alternate Matrox Custom V Force Frame based DCT 4 Beside DC Precision select the bit depth precision of the DC intra block The higher the DC precision value that s used to render your video the more likely that the DC content will be increased at the expense of the AC content Chapter 10 Using Matrox Axio with Video for Windows Programs in the encoded stream This may result in lowering the overall quality of the compressed stream at a specified data rate Under Zig Zag Order select one of the following Regular Sets the regular default zig zag scanning pattern of the AC coefficient of the DCT block as defined in the ISO IEC 13818 2 figure 7 2 specificatio
163. er brackets You should make sure the fan directs air between the various circuit boards When installed this fan works in conjunction with your PC exhaust fan located at the back of the PC case to blow warmed air away from your Axio cards Airflow Choose a fan that has a minimum rating of 40 CFM CFM stands for cubic feet of air displaced per minute and is a measurement standard for fans An example of a fan that meets this requirement well is the Sunon model KD1208PTB1 which is a 12 VDC fan with a rating of 42 5 CFM Make sure to mount the fan as close to the cards as possible In most systems you should be able to place the fan directly behind the card guide slots Make sure to close your computer s cover once you ve finished installing your hardware This ensures that the airflow generated by the fan is directed through the cards and does not escape through the top of your system AN Caution Fan installation should be done by a qualified technician Improper installation procedures can result in damage to your Axio components and or your computer system Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd is not responsible for any damage caused by faulty installation Before you install your Matrox Axio card set 12 Format your A V drives using NTFS Your A V drives must be formatted using NTFS for use with Matrox Axio because NTFS ove
164. er white luminance levels Luma 16 235 Uses the standard range of luminance levels in your matte to key your foreground image 8 To reverse the result of your track matte effect select Reverse This inverts the key to give you the opposite result transparent areas of your foreground image become opaque and opaque areas become transparent Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 203 Creating a twirl effect The Matrox twirl effect lets you create twirl patterns that twist and rotate your video and graphics clips into spirals coils or whirlpools e X amp Y Position Sets the position of the twirl along the horizontal and vertical axes Inner Radius Determines the circumference of the center of your twirl The higher the radius the larger the center of the twirl becomes Outer Radius Width Height Use this control to adjust the width and height of your twirl simultaneously The higher the value the larger your twirl becomes If you clear Fixed Aspect Ratio you can adjust each control individually Angle Sets the angle of your twirl in degrees nvert Lets you reverse the direction of the twirl so that it twirls outward from the inner radius e Smoothness Sets the smoothness applied to the colors in the twirl The higher the value the less sharp the colors become This is useful if you want to remove artifacts that may appear when using a high angle for your twirl Crop Allows you to crop
165. erent aspects of a video signal such as its hue saturation and contrast progressive scanning A method of creating a video image by drawing all the lines of a screen sequentially so that the complete image is displayed in one pass VGA displays and some HDTV formats use progressive scanning Progressive scanning produces smoother pictures than interlaced scanning but uses more bandwidth pulldown detection A method of identifying the extra video frames that are added when 24 fps film footage or 23 98 fps progressive video is converted to 29 97 fps interlaced video See also 2 3 pulldown and advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown R realtime effect An effect that is played back instantly without having to be rendered by an editing program Appendix D Matrox Axio Glossary render To compute an image or effect using a nonlinear editing compositing or animation program The result is generally saved in a file on the computer A so called compile RGB parade A specialized scope that displays the red green and blue components of a video signal RGB video A component video signal that uses three signals to carry the separate Red Green and Blue channels of colored images ripple effect A Matrox effect that lets you create 3D ripple patterns that simulate a flag waving ripples in a pond or a dream sequence roll 1 Vertical movement of text across the screen Also called scroll See also crawl 2 Unwanted vertical roll of a vi
166. erns gt To set up a Matrox mask mosaic effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Mask Mosaic to expand the property list 7 hk Matrox Mask Mosaic e D Mosaic Settings D Mask Settings D Crop Mosaic Settings Let you adjust the size of the mosaic blocks and the sharpness of the color in the mosaic effect Block Width and Block Height Use these controls to set the width and height of the mosaic blocks in your effect If you select Fixed Aspect Ratio you only need to adjust the block width and the height will be set to the same value Color Sharpness Select this to sharpen the color of each mosaic block in your effect This causes each block to take on the predominant color of that section of the underlying image instead of the average color MaskSettings Let you select the mask pattern and adjust the transparency settings for your effect Select Shape Click the button to the right of the current pattern to see the list of available mask patterns 7 Select Shape Click here to selecta new pattern Shape Transparency Sets the transparency of the shape and the area around the shape At the default setting 0 the shape is completely opaque and the area around the shape is transparent Dragging the slider to the left increases the transparency of the shape which makes the mosaic effect less apparent Dragging the slider to the right decreases the transparency of the area around the shape which inc
167. es x1 x4 x8 and x16 Also called PCIe slot PCI X slot A type of PCI slot that increases the speed at which data can move within the computer from 66 MHz to up to 133 MHz The Matrox X io card and X effects card are each installed in a PCI X slot running at 100 MHz P frame Predicted frame A frame created during the MPEG or MPEG 2 IBP compression process A P frame is created by using motion vectors to predict the differences between it and the closest previous I frame or P frame This forward prediction allows for higher compression than with I frames but not as high as with B Glossary of terms 288 frames P frames like B frames contain only predictive data and therefore cannot be edited independently pixel Picture element The smallest portion of an image that can be written to a display Each pixel in an image represents a single dot on the computer screen A picture s resolution depends on the number of pixels on the screen Plug and Play A hardware standard for auto configuration It refers to the ability of computer hardware to detect and configure expansion devices such as your Matrox hardware Windows XP and Windows 2000 support Plug and Play plug in Software that adds functionality and or features to an application For example the Matrox realtime plug in for Adobe Premiere Pro adds realtime Matrox effects and transitions to Adobe Premiere Pro proc amp Anelectronic device that adjusts the diff
168. es the speed of the export because realtime video segments that have no effects will be copied directly to disk without recompression assuming that the compression and video format of your video clips matches the format to which you re exporting Choose OK to save your export settings Note Exported audio will be embedded in your avi file and also saved as one or more separate wav files in the same folder as your avi file Matrox Axio does not support audio only exports to an avi file 101 Exporting to a Matrox avi file 102 Exporting to a Matrox mxf file Matrox Axio lets you export your Premiere Pro sequence to Matrox mxf files that are compatible with the Panasonic P2 or Sony XDCAM file format For example you can choose to export your sequence to mxf files in Panasonic P2 format directly to your P2 playout server or export the files to your hard drive and copy them to your playout server The supported formats for exporting to a Matrox mxf file depend on your project s video format as shown below Note When exporting to Sony XDCAM files you can export only to SD format Project video format Supported export format s NTSC NTSC PAL PAL 486p 23 98 fps NTSC 720p 23 98 fps 720p 23 98 fps or NTSC 720p 25 fps 720p 25 fps or PAL 720p 29 97 fps 720p 29 97 fps or NTSC 720p 50 fps 720p 50 fps or PAL 720p 59 94 fps 720p 59 94 fps or NTSC 1080i 25 fps 1080i 25 fps or PAL 1080i 29
169. est level of brightness the flicker will attain Note Ifyou enable Manual Control you can use Highest Intensity to control the flickering by creating keyframes at various levels of brightness Randomize Specifies the amount of random flickering that will occur For example at 0 there will be no randomization and the flickering follows a rhythmic beat The higher the value the more random the flickering becomes Color Gain and Color Addition Red Green Blue You can use the controls under Color Gain and Color Addition to individually fine tune the colors of your image To proportionally increase or decrease the red green and blue values select Lock Colors The Color Gain controls for Red Green and Blue let you increase or decrease the intensity of a particular color present in your image For example increasing the Red value increases only the red color component of your image without affecting the other colors Color Addition lets you adjust all colors in your image by a given amount of Red Green or Blue For example increasing the Red value increases the amount of red throughout your entire image Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 185 Creating an old movie effect 186 Creating a page curl effect The Matrox page curl effect lets you create page curls that are truly 3D with full motion video on the reverse side and realistic highli
170. f you ll be rendering audio set the audio sample rate to 48 kHz and the sample size to 16 bit mono or stereo For best results make sure you clear your program s Data rate limit option for rendered material This ensures that your avi files will be rendered at the particular video quality you select f you re using Adobe Premiere Pro set the Fields for rendering to Lower Field First for NTSC video Upper Field First for PAL and interlaced HD video or No Fields Progressive Scan for progressive video Note Before rendering a lot of material check that your rendered animations and transitions such as wipes and slides play back smoothly If they appear jumpy try adjusting the field dominance or field order for your rendered material For example if your transitions appear jumpy with the field dominance set to Odd field or Field 1 try switching the setting to Even field or Field 2 Selecting color space conversion options When you render material to an avi file using a Matrox VEW codec you can determine how you want the luminance levels and chroma information to be processed during the color space conversion that s performed during the render Note The default settings for color space conversion provide good results for most applications We recommend that you change these settings only when needed for special purposes gt To select the color space conversion options you want 1 Right click My Computer then choose Manage
171. finishing quality HD video for broadcast Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows HD codec and transferred to a remote editing workstation Remote editing System with Matrox VFW codecs installed The offline edit is completed and trimmed on the System using Adobe Premiere Pro with the appropriate project setting for example 480x270 23 98 fps Offline edit Premiere Pro project prproj file is imported into the online editing project on Matrox Axio 247 Using the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec The Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec allows you to control the data rate of the video that you are capturing or exporting At low data rates about 50 Mb sec the codec can be used to capture video for an offline editing project At high data rates 100 Mb sec or higher the codec can be used to capture high quality video for an online editing project that uses less disk space than an uncompressed video project For HD projects that do not require uncompressed video data for compositing the MPEG 2 I frame HD codec can be used to export finishing quality HD broadcast video The VFW MPEG 2 I frame HD codec allows you to render and play back MPEG 2 I frame HD clips in VFW applications such as Adobe After Effects On a system without the Matrox Axio hardware the VFW MPEG 2 I frame HD codec can be used to render and play back HDV 10801 1440x1080 25 fps and 29 97 fps clips only MPEG 2 I frame HD codec workflow example for off
172. for your Matrox Axio hardware and the Matrox Axio realtime plug in for Adobe Premiere Pro Hardware detection D Turn on your computer Once Windows restarts the Found New Hardware Wizard detects your Matrox Axio hardware Because the Matrox Axio utils Setup program will automatically detect your devices and install the appropriate drivers simply press ESC or click Cancel to close the Found New Hardware Wizard Important The Found New Hardware Wizard will appear for each of your Axio hardware components Make sure that you close the Found New Hardware Wizard each time it appears To ensure a smooth Matrox Axio software installation it is essential that you do not let the Found New Hardware Wizard try to install any drivers The Found New Hardware Wizard will only appear the first time you start your computer after installing your Axio hardware Installing Adobe Premiere Pro D You must install Adobe Premiere Pro before installing Matrox Axio utils Important You must install Adobe Premiere Pro and Matrox Axio utils on an NTSF formatted drive usually your system drive gt To install Adobe Premiere Pro 1 Close all Windows programs 2 Insert the Adobe Premiere Pro installation DVD in your DVD ROM drive 3 From the displayed menu choose to install Adobe Premiere Pro When the setup program starts follow the onscreen instructions Note When you install Matrox Axio utils Matrox plug in files will
173. frames five frames of video are needed for a total of 10 video fields Therefore one additional video frame or two video fields must be created To accomplish this the first and third frames of a four frame film or progressive video sequence are each converted to two video fields The second and fourth frames of the sequence are converted to three video fields to make up a total of five interlaced video frames The following diagram demonstrates the process Film frames 24 fps or progressive frames 23 98 fps A C Video fields 29 97 fps Video frame A Video frame B Video frame C Video frame D Video frame E Standard 2 3 pulldown is accomplished by representing the first frame of film or progressive video frame A as two fields of video fields a1 and a2 the second frame frame B as three fields of video fields b1 b2 and b3 the third frame frame C as two fields fields c1 and c2 and the fourth frame frame D as three fields fields d1 d2 and d3 This sequence repeats six times each second Appendix A Understanding Standard and Advanced Pulldown 233 Performing a standard reverse pulldown 2 3 cadence reverses the process by converting 29 97 fps interlaced video to 23 98 fps progressive video This is achieved by discarding a video frame two video fields from the sequence From the diagram above a typical standard reverse pulldown would discard fields b3 and d1 This means that video frames C and D must be rea
174. g Split VIEW sipres a HER ERRXR CEPR EY ERE QA EXER EUXTEREZEKERRE MEA XE MEE EVE YU SEVA Ns 127 Working with Split View in the Program Monitor eeseeeeeeeee 127 Using the color balance crepitu obit ua t Fees neu P read tet 129 Performing sen auto balance cessere return era t roa eiR ERR S a REPE I E PEE 132 Matching colors between two clips neueren nr naeh ni rane 133 Using the luma mapping drapl asvece iie aue noo ntt kie snarar aias 135 Creating a secondary color correction uus 137 Using the selective key graphice ieceiidieate ez eio ese abdo iarasi 142 Creating a color pass eiTect aoo eere iocus nte Xaula enirn aaa 147 Creating a SD DVE effGct ciii iisi idea iare asumir oniani ada 148 Creating a 4 corner pin effect eeue ese eeeeeeesee 150 Creating a blur soft focus effect eeueeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeee 152 Overview of the chroma key effects eeeseeeeeeeesee 153 Contents Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect 154 Using the chroma key graph to modify key colors and perform an auto Key sccisisassesbadinancasxioinaiaisniestaaueeonbiasinewubdapmreanenesiaains 157 Creating a cube effect cs rseracy bat orto as UR ved UenISUDENENNUEE MU D EE 160 Creating a crystallize effect c cicero ccena nee na nns 163 Creating an impressionist effect
175. g the render Instead you should use Adobe After Effects to render your effects with alpha to a Matrox VFW avi file Although Matrox has tested many VFW programs there may be certain operational limitations when using Matrox Axio with some of these programs as well as with untested programs Chapter 10 Using Matrox Axio with Video for Windows Programs 211 Using VFW programs without the Axio hardware If you installed the Matrox VFW software codecs see Installing the Matrox VFW software codecs on a system without the Axio hardware on page 56 you can render and play back Axio compatible avi files using your VFW program without having the Axio hardware in your computer For example if you captured clips to Matrox offline HD format using Adobe Premiere Pro you could edit and play back those clips on a system without the Axio hardware assuming that you installed the Matrox VFW software codecs on that system Note You must have the Matrox Axio hardware for full support of the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec The Matrox DVCPRO HD codec and the Alpha Matrox MPEG 2 I frame codecs are available only on a system that has Axio hardware Before you start rendering Before you start rendering material to a Matrox avi file make the following settings in your Video for Windows program Setthe appropriate frame rate for the video format to which you are rendering For example if you are rendering to PAL format set the
176. ghts You can control the position rotation scaling and zooming of the page curls in 3D space and apply softness to the edges You can also apply page curls on graphics to create great looking text effects gt To set up a Matrox page curl effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Page Curl to expand the property list Page Curl Fold Type You can select Page Peel or Page Roll as your page curl type this setting is active for the duration of your effect Fold Angle Sets the angle of your page curl in degrees Alternately you can set the number of spins for your page curl Curl Radius Determines the tightness of your page curl For example a radius of 0 produces the tightest page curl and the higher the radius the looser the page curl Progression Sets the progression of your page curl pattern at any keyframe In order to see your page curl progress you need to apply at least two keyframes to your clip To create a standard page curl create a keyframe at the first frame of your clip with Progression set to 096 and another keyframe at the last frame of your clip with Progression set to 100 For more information about creating keyframes see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Edge Softness Creates a soft edge on your page curl Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro N 187 Curl Softness Creates a soft edge on the section of the page that is curling Note Yo
177. gt To set up a Matrox 3D DVE effect Click the triangle next to Matrox 3D DVE to expand the property list Transform Use these properties to apply or change various transform settings such as the position scale and rotation settings of your clip For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Border Settings Allow you to create a border or soft edge on your clip Border Outside Softness Lets you adjust the softness of the edge of your clip or outside edge of your border The higher the softness value the less sharp the edge becomes If your clip is skewed you may get more desirable results using the Border Outside Skewed Softness control Border Outside Skewed Softness If you altered your clip so that the perspective is skewed you should use this option to apply softness to the edges of your clip Border Type Allows you to select the type of border you want None Flat Gradient or Alpha Edge Click the triangle on the right to expand the list of border types Click here to ied oui border type Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro Note The Alpha Edge border type is for use with alpha keyed graphics only Border Width Use this control to adjust the border along the X and Y axes simultaneously The higher the value the wider your border becomes If you clear Fixed Aspect Ratio you can adjust each axis individually X Border Width Use this control t
178. hat lets you project a realistic shadow from any source that provides alpha key information such as Matrox DVEs and titles with an alpha channel shine effect A Matrox effect that lets you create rays that shine through text or add shimmer to an object in your clip You can also use the shine effect to make 2D text appear as 3D text SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers A professional society of motion picture and television engineers that prepares standards and documentation for television production spatial redundancy reduction See intra frame compression striping a tape Preparing a tape for editing by recording continuous control track time code and a video signal such as black or color bars super See graphics overlay super black Video that is darker than the standard black level See also super white 289 super white Video that is brighter than the standard white level See also super black surface finish A Matrox effect that lets you apply various surface textures to your clips such as metal brick wood or granite with color spot lighting SVCD Super Video CD A standard for storing video and audio on a CD that provides better video quality than VCD and standard VHS Video is compressed using MPEG 2 at 2500 Kbps and audio is compressed as MPEG 1 layer II at 224 Kbps An SVCD can hold about 30 minutes of material Super Video CDs will play back on some DVD set top players
179. he Matrox VFW software codecs that was provided with another Matrox product such as Matrox DigiSuite or Matrox RT X100 you must remove those codecs from your computer using Add or Remove Programs in Windows Control Panel before installing the VFW software codecs provided with Matrox Axio gt To install the Matrox VFW software codecs 1 From the Matrox Axio menu choose Install Matrox VFW software codecs 2 Follow the onscreen instructions An information box indicates when the installation is complete Removing your Matrox Axio software You can remove the various Matrox Axio software components as follows To remove Matrox Axio utils from your computer choose Start gt All Programs gt Matrox Axio utils gt Uninstall Matrox Axio utils You can also choose Uninstall Matrox Axio utils from the Matrox Axio menu To remove only the Matrox effect patterns from your computer choose Start gt All Programs gt Matrox Axio utils gt Uninstall Matrox Effect Patterns You should not remove only the Matrox effect patterns unless you ll be re installing Matrox Axio utils Toremove only the Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins from your computer choose Start gt All Programs gt Matrox Axio utils gt Uninstall Matrox WYSIWYG Plug ins To remove the Matrox VFW software codecs from a computer without the Matrox Axio hardware use Add or Remove Programs in Windows Control Panel Chapter 6 Installing Your Matrox Axio Software Working
180. he audio cable bracket eere 44 Connect your X linkLE 1394 cable to your computer 45 Using the X linkLE S Video adapter cables 45 Typical Matrox Axio LE connections eeeeeeeeeee 47 XinkLE analog component CONNESCHONSG uisesseexsir nn reb ty e EXTR E REX ERR ES 47 AXJnkLIs Svideo Congo oS xoi osten uie gir ek iel ael asi gin EERE 48 X linkLE digital video connections cece eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeceeseteeeeeenteneoees 49 Chapter 6 Installing Your Matrox Axio Software Overview of the software installation eeeeeeseese 52 Hardware detection ccicscccctsccsctscsecsscseciieeteliceisiieeniiewentieeciiiecsesiaecacna 52 installing Adobe Premiere Pro eror tetut rtu seeded reno n paSE rer UT PREEE 52 Installing other third party programs eere 53 Installing Matrox Axio utls 1 eieeceiaee erani aream rna cn rinse enaa 54 Adding the Matrox WYSIWYG plug in to NewTek LightWave 3D 55 Installing additional Matrox effect patterns or removing unneeded patterns eese 55 Installing additional Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins or removing unneeded plug ins eee 55 Installing the Matrox VFW software codecs on a system without the Axio hardware eere eere ee int pe nr eEERERPDRSEREEeRERPD REPE 56 Removing your Matrox Axio softw
181. he color spectrum to move the indicator to different regions in the cube to adjust the Hue Aperture Saturation and Saturation Threshold Map Plot Show Key Auto Key mm Indicator Handles D Hue 2 Saturation 3 Saturation 4 Aperture 5 Luminance Threshold Note This graph will contain a luminance spectrum only if you are creating a chroma key shadow effect You can drag the handle in the luminance spectrum to adjust the Luminance Plot Click this button to plot the colors and luminance values that are present in the current frame of your clip You can drag the handles in the chroma plot graph to move the indicator to different regions in the graph to adjust the Hue Aperture Saturation and Saturation Threshold The luma plot histogram shows each luminance value present in your image as a Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect 158 vertical line A longer line indicates a higher amount of pixels in your image of that line s luminance value Map Plot Show Key Auto Key mm Indicator Note The Plot graph will contain a luma plot histogram only if you are creating a chroma key shadow effect You can drag the handle in the luma plot histogram to adjust the Luminance D Hue 2 Saturation 3 Saturation 4 Aperture 5 Luminance Threshold Show Key Click this button to display the matte used to create your key effect This enables you to further refine your key For example when
182. he edges of your clip along the x horizontal and y vertical axes You can adjust the softness controls individually or if you select Fixed Aspect Ratio you only need to adjust the x axis The higher the softness value the less sharp the edges become Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 181 Nonlinear Softness Select this option to make the boundaries of the softness region less obvious Enabling this option makes your edge softness controls produce results similar to the border softness controls in the Matrox 3D DVE effect e Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Creating a move amp scale effect 182 Creating an old movie effect The Matrox old movie effect lets you create an old film look on your clips by adding noise dust streaks jitter and flickers gt To set up a Matrox old movie effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Old Movie to expand the property list v eo Random Artifact Generator Adjust this setting to change the placement of artifacts in your clip The artifacts are randomly distributed based on the value you select For example if you notice the streaks in your clip are always in the same place you can use this setting to move them Border Settings Round Corner Size Allows you to round the corners on the edges of your clip Softness Lets you adjust the amount of softness on the edg
183. hod list is available select the pulldown method you want to be applied to your output video Standard 2 3 or Advanced 2 3 3 2 You should select Advanced 2 3 3 2 only if you ll be recording to a DV 1394 device that supports this pulldown method Depending on your project s frame rate and the current master output format a pulldown method may automatically be selected Select Allow Super White to allow the highest luminance level of your video output to exceed the standard maximum white level Select Allow Super Black to allow the lowest luminance level of your video output to fall below the standard black level Note Super white and super black should not be allowed when producing your final video production for broadcast Under Analog Setup NTSC select the setup level you want for your NTSC analog video this affects both the input and output OIRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE You should select this option only when working with a commercial DV 1394 device that uses the Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE For example if the video appears too bright when you play back DV clips on your NTSC monitor you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output your DV clips at the correct brightness 7 5 IRE Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7 5 IRE Under Advanced Settings use the following sliders to make timing adjustments to your video output SC HPhase Advances or delays the video output s subcarrier phase with respe
184. hrough See also alpha key and luma key chrominance The color portion of a video signal that carries the hue and saturation information See also luminance codec Compressor decompressor A processor that compresses video to reduce its file size by eliminating redundancies in information It also decompresses files to play them back color bars A standard test signal that appears as a series of vertical rows of color by which the chrominance and video levels of a camera s output or a recorded signal can be checked color correction effect A Matrox effect that allows various color properties of an image to be adjusted There are controls for adjusting the intensity level for hue saturation contrast and brightness The color correction effect can correct improper color levels of an image that are due to varying Glossary of terms 282 lighting conditions or incorrect camera settings See also white balancing compile See render component video A video signal having separate channels for the video information as opposed to a combined composite signal Y R Y B Y video is a component video signal composite video A video signal containing luminance and chrominance information that has been combined using a video standard such as NTSC or PAL Composite video often uses a single RCA or BNC cable connection See also component video contrast The difference in brightness between the lightest and darkest
185. i rr n rue u o a x oe cue ac REu Ege SERE 257 Editing HD projects on a Matrox Axio SD system 259 Supported video compression formats 260 Contents Matrox AXO MD csin peli EVER VEM ends rod ke luc dde bla 260 Matrox AIO OD A ordered t acria ae EE ESI2 d ated 261 Matrox Zodo PE ceisssazotcdbixrtuilaxiutta spin CLE er adie VUL dS Te p ate RM 262 Supported master output formats on Matrox Axio HD and SD 263 Supported main and secondary SDI output formats n M tr AXIO EE occ jess cc ctewte nected siaicisin ise iiireiiii e eR i a Pee Ci ap CEN ds 264 Appendix C Matrox Axio Specifications KAO CAPO eT 266 el elal go eer eee errr eer ren eres rere eT ren errr rer rere rere gee tee ttt re 266 Typical operating voltages and current consumption 266 Environmental specifications i erecto ir Lect aree tedlva iru ce R Ta cuir de eel 266 p eurqge geem tia eda Wetiaiteiieiiesheiiesieite iesiecheiees Meienieie en ened 267 COSMO Q 267 Typical operating voltages and current consumption 267 Environmental spocificalorie vices eae prete Uii pode pu rS Hex Rae ETE 267 AX Mnkspibreakout DOX sedens teE contrat gn Un dsnE M nM RURA RA RAN RIXA NER MEKEEEE 268 General sasara I a aaa 268 Typical operating voltages and current consumption 268 video input sigreleicicsicer back ener
186. ics clips that have an alpha channel Lock Channels Select this to apply the same blur settings to all channels When you adjust the setting for the Red Blur Amount the same settings will be applied to the other channels Color Gain Settings Let you adjust the amount of color in your clip within the blurred area Red Green and Blue Color Gain Use these controls to individually fine tune the intensity of a particular color present in your clip For example you can increase the Red value to increase only the red color component of your clip within the blurred area Lock Channels Select this to apply the same color gain settings to all channels When you adjust the setting for the Red Color Gain the same settings will be applied to the other channels MaskSettings Let you select the mask pattern and adjust the transparency settings for your effect Select Shape Click the button to the right of the current pattern to see the list of available mask patterns 7 Select Shape Clickhereto selecta new pattern Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro N Shape Transparency Sets the transparency of the shape and the area around the shape At the default setting 0 the shape is completely opaque and the area around the shape is transparent Dragging the slider to the left increases the transparency of the shape which makes the blur less apparent Dragging the slider to the right decreases the tra
187. ied and there is no alpha key information to crystallize Whereas if you apply a Matrox 3D DVE to the same clip and then you apply the crystallize effect you will be able to apply and see the crystallized edges because the Matrox 3D DVE effect contains alpha information Mask Settings Let you select a mask pattern and adjust the transparency settings to define the area where you want to apply your crystallize effect Enable Mask Select this option to enable the mask Creating a crystallize effect 164 Select Shape Click the button to the right of the current pattern to see the list of available mask patterns Click here to select a new pattern Shape Transparency Sets the transparency of the shape and the area around the shape At the default setting 0 the shape is completely opaque and the area around the shape is transparent Dragging the slider to the left increases the transparency of the shape which makes the crystallize effect less apparent Dragging the slider to the right decreases the transparency of the area around the shape which increases the amount of crystals outside the mask area Outside Transparency Sets the transparency level of the area outside your mask Note The Outside Transparency setting is applicable only if you ve scaled down moved or rotated your mask using the transform controls so that the mask doesn t cover the entire screen Softness Lets you apply the crystallize effect to
188. if you use the selective key properties to select red as your Hue color the color correction will be applied to the red regions in your clip You can enable each keyer Hue Saturation and Luma individually or enable all three at the same time to get the desired results Graphical Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes when you adjust the selective key Numerical settings You can also modify the settings directly within the graph and perform an auto key For more information see Using the selective key graph on page 142 Numerical Lets you adjust your key settings numerically by entering values in the text boxes or by dragging the corresponding sliders e Hue Key This type of key lets you select areas to be keyed affected by the color correction based on their hue Enable Select this to enable the Hue Key properties and hue key indicator in the selective key graph Hue Usethis to rotate the indicator around the perimeter of the color spectrum so that you can select different hues colors on which to key Aperture Use this to widen or narrow the aperture of the indicator to increase or decrease the range of colors on which you want to key Softness Sets the amount of softness applied to the range of colors specified in the aperture region Saturation Key This lets you select colors to be keyed affected by the color correction based on their saturation value Pale colors have a low sat
189. ile is transferred to the Matrox Axio system so that it can be used to complete the project s online version On Matrox Axio a new online project is created using a finishing quality project preset such as an Uncompressed HD project preset The offline project file is then imported into the new online project The offline clips are unlinked and recaptured at full resolution using the codec specified by the project preset The online editing project is then exported to tape for broadcast Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows 245 This workflow scenario is represented in the following diagram Offline clips transferred to remote editing system Video footage Matrox Offline HD shot as any codec used to supported HD capture clips format Remote editing system with Matrox VFW codecs installed The offline Matrox Axio offline edit is completed and editing project using trimmed on the any Offline HD system using Adobe project preset Premiere Pro with the appropriate t project setting for example 480x270 23 98 fps Offline edit A new Matrox Axio Premiere online editing project is created using any Pro project finishing quality HD prproj file transferred video project preset such as MPEG 2 to Matrox I frame HD or an Axio system Uncompressed HD project preset The offline project is imported into the new project and the offline clips are unlinked and recaptured at full
190. ime playback is also supported when mixing SD and HD clips in the same project as explained in Mixing SD and HD clips in a project on page 68 When exporting an HD project to disk you can choose to downconvert the HD video to any of the supported SD video formats For details see Exporting to a Matrox avi file on page 99 and Exporting to a Matrox mxf file on page 102 Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows Matrox Axio SD SD project DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame 261 HD project video processing is set to 8 bit DV 1394 input only DVCPRO HD HDV Playback Export to disk DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame Legacy Matrox DigiSuite and RT series files DV DVCAM DVCPRO DVCPRO50 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame DVCPRO HD HDV 8 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD Offline HD DVCPRO HD 8 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD Offline HD Render previews DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame DVCPRO HD 8 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD Offline HD DV 1394 export to tape DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPROS50 DVCPRO HD HDV DVCPRO HD is supported only for 1080i and 720p projects DV 1394 capture is not supported for 720p 25 fps and 50 fps projects DV 1394 export to DVCPRO HD is supported only for 1080i and 720p 59 94 fps p
191. ing and will play back in real time without dropping frames that is there is no red indicator bar above the segment The Matrox CPU based effects are wipes color corrections chroma keys luma keys move amp scale the chroma clamper and Adobe Premiere Pro s crop and speed change The Matrox hardware accelerated effects are all the other Matrox effects such as page curls 3D DVEs surface finish effects Premiere Pro fixed effects and fades etc Note On Axio LE the hardware accelerated effects will be available only if you have a display card that supports the Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro For more information see Enabling and disabling the Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro on page 229 Matrox Axio constantly analyzes your sequence as you work and will identify which segments require rendering with a red indicator bar above the segment For example once playback of the sequence has stopped a red bar will appear over segments of the sequence that have dropped frames Even when your system is idle Matrox Axio will analyze segments to determine if they require rendering Certain complex effects or combinations of effects can cause dropped frames when previewing Matrox Axio will always provide a preview of your output at the best frame rate possible by analyzing the segments and dropping frames systematically If you find that you have dropped frames when you export your pr
192. ing diagram provides a typical workflow when using a 1080p 23 98 fps preset for an online editing project on Matrox Axio HD video footage shot as 1080p 23 98 fps Matrox Axio performs standard reverse pulldown with A frames appearing at time codes 0 and 5 Film footage shot at Matrox finishing quality M Film footage shot at 24 fps and transferred HD MPEG 2 I frame HD 24 fps and transferred by telecine to or Uncompressed HD by telecine to 1080p 23 98 fps codec used to capture 1080i 29 97 fps HD video clips HD video HD video footage from mxf files imported to Matrox Axio editing project t project using any finishing quality 1080p 23 98 fps Matrox Axio performs an project preset Matrox Axio advanced reverse pulldown r lt m performs when Panasonic P2 standard 1080 24pA files are played pulldown back on the timeline l Exported to tape as 1080p 23 98 fps Exported to disk such as to an Exported to tape as Exported to tape as MPEG 2 file for 1080i 29 97 fps NTSC finishing DVD authoring or a finishing quality quality video for Matrox avi or mxf video for broadcast broadcast file finishing quality video for broadcast Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows 253 Other Matrox Axio HD workflows This section provides examples of some Matrox Axio HD workflows where a pulldown is not always required 1080p 24 fps workflow example When working with a 1080p 24 fps project preset
193. ing the chips and other components on the circuit board Try to handle the card by its edges Try to work in an area where the relative humidity is at least 50 Do not wear wool or synthetic clothing These fabrics tend to generate more static electricity than cotton which is best for this kind of work Turn off the power switches on your computer and its connected components Once you ve opened your computer drain static electricity from your body by touching a bare metal surface on your computer chassis before you install or remove any parts of your system If you have a grounding wrist strap use it while handling and installing any components in your computer Providing adequate ventilation Before using your Matrox Axio system you must ensure adequate ventilation in your computer Because your Matrox Axio LE card produces a significant amount of heat forced air ventilation is extremely important Inadequate ventilation may result in erratic operating behavior Note Your Matrox Axio system is equipped with numerous temperature sensors to let you monitor the operating temperature of your various Matrox Axio hardware components These temperatures are displayed in the Matrox X info program see Monitoring Your Matrox Axio System on page 225 for more information Chapter 4 Installing Your Matrox Axio LE Hardware 33 To provide as much airflow as possible over the card you must install a fan as explained below Posi
194. ing the m icon on your Windows taskbar Note Ifyou do not see the icon right click the taskbar and choose Properties then clear the Hide inactive icons option and click OK Monitoring your Adobe Premiere Pro memory usage When Adobe Premiere Pro is running you can monitor your Adobe Premiere Pro memory usage To do this hold your mouse pointer over the Matrox X info i icon A pop up message will display the current Adobe Premiere Pro memory usage If your Adobe Premiere Pro memory usage is very high X info will issue a warning message with additional information Displaying system information To display information about your Matrox Axio system select System from the Display Information About list On this page you can see Install Information such as the install path and version of Axio utils You can also create an HTML log file of your system information which can be useful for troubleshooting To create this log use the Browse button under System Information Log to select the path and name of the log then click Chapter 12 Monitoring Your Matrox Axio System 227 Create If Open file after scan is selected the HTML system log opens after it is created m Matrox X info Display Information About System v System Information Install Information Matrox Axio utils Version 1 0 7 2150 Matrox Axio utils Path C Program Files Matrox Axio utils Matrox Plug in For Adobe Premiere Pro Path C PROGRAM FILES ADOBE A
195. ing using Matrox Media Encoder esses 110 Setting up Matrox DV HDV device control 111 Exporting your sequence to tape eere 111 Preparing your tapes Tor recorcing eiue heo eerta nth thu Rae nu Ert ne R n ER rens 111 Avoiding missing frames when exporting to DV tape 111 Exporting to DV tape using DV 1394 device control 112 Creating an SD project in 16 9 format 114 Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro Avalable eTTects scia Sis ace MMERIURI E Pexp RIDE ee Ee 116 How to apply a Matrox video effect in Adobe Premiere Pro 117 How to apply a Matrox video transition in Adobe Premiere Pro 117 TRANSTORMING your clips roce tees vut MR a E RIRK ERE A uM AE RUN REM pEU EMEN 118 Using the transformi entos uiia iiu eee seseituicie o NE e petas 118 Transforming a clip in the Program Monitor essen 120 Cropping your C ll aius sepan nuu n puh th paa o R cR aa ERR uER a Eel k eae eK ERR i 121 Using Select GOD sixabega ket RARE e E EEPREEKES FERES OFREEEXI RARE AREV AE 122 Applying a mask to your effect eeeeueeeeeeeeeee 123 Using Select Mask oat hii re pri El a teni bia VAR MN I RR emails 124 Creating a primary color correction eeeeeeeeeeee 125 Usin
196. insnnscasossindsndacastnoensiedersieesennesnseiaevsenenas 2 Matrox AXo Key TOS Gs isa reeex Dre EH RU FEHERR REEL EATER REA VE VERA VUE RE VE x 2 Features of Matrox Axio IEEE ERR eo nde te TAEA 3 Features of Matrox Axio SD iicekecee tero ucro p Rei PRI RIdRxIR El vu RR Ge aeaa aE 3 Features of Matrox Axio LE 2 niei eire a PRo Rip Enw Or n e ue ie NP E DES 3 Hardware supplied for Matrox Axio HD and SD 4 Hardware supplied for Matrox Axio LE euueusee 4 Matrox Axio HD and SD system requirements 4 Matrox Axio LE system requirements eeeseeeeeeee 5 About this randi 2 ioeisut etin ouo Se a PIS enXN Ra RN ES 6 DEV IS CONVSMHOMNS RT EE EDT 6 How video formats are expressed sss 6 Lastminute ITOK NABI OM uiae aes dca iier ra ipie n eUdr ive uir tins RII a ME INI QD RS 7 Chapter 2 Installing Your Matrox Axio HD or SD Hardware Before you install your Matrox Axio card set 10 Avoid costly dalTidde iain EAE AREEEEE EYE YIRE KE X EXE YEREYUKOX XR I CD Ee 10 Providing adeguate ventulation u ior ep eure aaia 10 Forrnat your A V drives USING NTFS uisiisookr e rr DX EA Ek n tad 12 Use the PCI retainer brackets surcinski 13 Removing the PCI retainer bracket sees 13 Connect the internal power supply cable to your X io card 14 Set the power
197. ints towards the center of the clip while positive values move the corner points outward Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 149 Creating a 3D DVE effect 150 Creating a 4 corner pin effect The Matrox 4 corner pin effect lets you anchor each corner of a video or graphics clip onto points in an underlying clip even if the underlying clip is angled or skewed You could use this effect for example to overlay a video clip onto an underlying clip of a television screen gt To set up a Matrox 4 corner pin effect Click the triangle next to Matrox 4 corner Pin to expand the property list vy X Matrox 4 corner Pin e Top Left Corner 0 0 0 0 Top Right Corner 720 0 9 0 Bottom Left Corner 0 0 486 0 Bottom Right Corner 720 0 486 0 b Edge Softness 0 0 D Skewed Edge Softness 0 0 p Crop D Preview Settings Top Left and Top Right Corner Use these controls to horizontally and vertically position the top left and right corners of your clip Bottom Left and Bottom Right Corner Use these controls to horizontally and vertically position the bottom left and right corners of your clip L Tip You can easily position each corner of your clip directly in the Program Monitor To do this click the Transform icon 7 Tk beside Matrox 4 corner Pin in the Effect Controls panel A cursor will appear at each corner of your clip in the Program Monitor
198. ion To prepare your workspace for color correction choose Window gt Workspace gt Color Correction gt To set up a Matrox color correction Click the triangle next to Matrox Color Correction Primary to expand the property list D Enable Split View Select this option to split your clip into two sections in the Program Monitor and on your video monitor One section will display your clip as you adjust the color correction controls and the other section of the clip will remain unchanged For more information see Using Split View on page 127 O Important This option is for preview only You should clear it before you render your clip otherwise the split will appear in your video output Proc Amps The processing amplifier proc amp controls allow you to adjust different aspects of your clip Hue Adjusts the tint of the colors in the image Creating a primary color correction 126 Saturation Adjusts the saturation vividness of the image s colors Contrast Adjusts the difference in luminance between the lightest and darkest areas of the image Brightness Adjusts the level of black in the image Color Balance These controls let you adjust the mixture of colors in your clip Graphical Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes when you adjust the color balance settings You can also modify most of the color balance settings directly within the graph For more informa
199. ips in Windows Explorer 60 3 In the Choose Details dialog box select the check boxes corresponding to the desired Matrox or Matrox P2 details Detail names followed by Matrox P2 are specific to Panasonic P2 files for example User Clip Name Shooter Shooting Location and Scene No 4 Click OK Creating Matrox EZ M SF files for playback with VFW applications Many animation compositing and motion graphics applications used by video editors read Video for Windows VFW avi files but these applications are not designed to read mxf files The Matrox EZ MXF utility creates a very small reference avi file along with the associated mono wav files from an mxf file without modifying the contents of your original mxf file or its metadata Your VFW application plays the created avi and wav files which reference the original mxf file Note Windows Media Player does not support mxf files You can therefore use the Matrox EZ MXF utility to create reference avi and wav files for your mxf files that you want to play back using Windows Media Player You can configure Matrox EZ MXF to create only video files only audio files or both types of files By default Matrox EZ MXT is set to create both video and audio files L To create Matrox EZ MXF files 1 In Windows Explorer right click the desired mxf file or selected files and choose Matrox EZ MXF AVI Configure Configure Matrox EZ MXF AVI IV
200. ips using analog or SDI input on a Matrox Axio SD system you can capture native HDV and DVCPRO HD clips over the 1394 interface for editing in your HD projects You can also import HD mxf files to your HD projects on Matrox Axio SD or HD When you re ready to deliver your final HD project you can use your Matrox Axio SD system to export to SD format downconvert the HD video to NTSC or PAL or export to HDV or DVCPRO HD format over the 1394 interface Note Youcan t edit a 1080p 24 fps project on Matrox Axio SD The following diagram illustrates a typical workflow for editing HD projects on a Matrox Axio SD system Matrox Axio HD or LE Matrox Axio SD HDV or Clips DVCPRO HD captured from clips captured SDI input HDV or DVCPRO HD clips captured natively over the natively over using any HD y the 1394 we 1394 interface interface HD video Matrox Axio editing Matrox Axio editing HD video footage project using an HD project using an HD footage from mxf project preset ii project preset from mxf files except 1080p 24 t Clips and project are stored on a shared storage device The projec can a be Deliver as SD or Deliver as HD or SD 9Penec on Matrox deliver as HD over Axio HD SD or LE the 1394 interface for editing 259 Editing HD projects on a Matrox Axio SD system 260 Supported video compression formats Matrox Axio HD SD project DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 and 10
201. is not working properly Once X info has detected a hardware problem the Matrox X info Notification dialog box will be displayed to give you details of the problem and further instructions You will not be able to close this dialog box until the problem has been resolved Chapter 12 Monitoring Your Matrox Axio System Understanding Standard and Advanced Pulldown This appendix describes the most common pulldown methods and explains how and when these pulldown methods are employed by Matrox Axio 232 Overview Part of your project s workflow may involve the application of a pulldown technique to convert your input video to your project s video format Pulldown can also be applied to your output video to meet certain requirements When a pulldown is required in your project Matrox Axio performs either a standard 2 3 pulldown or an advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown Standard 2 3 pulldown Standard 2 3 pulldown is often used as part of the telecine process to transfer 24 fps film footage to 29 97 fps interlaced video This pulldown method is also used to convert any 23 98 fps progressive video to 29 97 fps interlaced video such as for converting 486p 23 98 fps video to NTSC In order to convert 24 fps film or 23 98 progressive video to 29 97 fps interlaced video additional video frames and more specifically video fields must be created and added to the video sequence For example to convert a sequence of four film or progressive
202. is at least 5096 Do not wear wool or synthetic clothing These fabrics tend to generate more static electricity than cotton which is best for this kind of work Turn off the power switches on your computer and its connected components Once you ve opened your computer drain static electricity from your body by touching a bare metal surface on your computer chassis before you install or remove any parts of your system If you have a grounding wrist strap use it while handling and installing any components in your computer Providing adequate ventilation Before using your Matrox Axio equipped system you must ensure adequate ventilation in your computer Because your Matrox Axio components are positioned closely together they produce a significant amount of heat Forced air ventilation is therefore extremely important Inadequate ventilation may result in erratic operating behavior Note Your Matrox Axio system is equipped with numerous temperature sensors to let you monitor the operating temperature of your various Matrox Axio hardware components These temperatures are displayed in the Matrox X info program see Monitoring Your Matrox Axio System on page 225 for more information Chapter 2 Installing Your Matrox Axio HD or SD Hardware 11 To provide as much airflow as possible between the cards you must install a fan as explained below Position a fan directly facing the end of the Matrox Axio cards with the PCI retain
203. isplay setting on the monitor Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 5 10 If the Pulldown Method list is available select the pulldown method you want to be applied to your output video Standard 2 3 or Advanced 2 3 3 2 You should select Advanced 2 3 3 2 only if you ll be recording to a DV 1394 device that supports this pulldown method Depending on your project s frame rate and the current master output format a pulldown method may automatically be selected Under Analog Setup NTSC select the setup level you want for your NTSC analog video OIRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE You should select this option only when working with a commercial DV 1394 device that uses the Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE For example if the video appears too bright when you play back DV clips on your NTSC monitor you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output your DV clips at the correct brightness 7 5 IRE Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7 5 IRE Select Allow Super White to allow the highest luminance level of your video output to exceed the standard maximum white level Select Allow Super Black to allow the lowest luminance level of your video output to fall below the standard black level Note Super white and super black should not be allowed when producing your final video production for broadcast Under Component Gain use the sliders to increase or decrease the Y luminance Cb blue minus luminan
204. ity of the streak pattern Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Color Use this to set the streak color Jitter Manual Control Select this option to disable Probability and manually control the amount of jittering by using only the Offset control Probability Specifies how often the jitter will occur The higher the value the more probable the jitter Offset Specifies how far the image jitters vertically upward Distance Between Frames Sets the space in between the current frame and the next frame jittering upwards The higher the value the more space between the two frames Flicker Manual Control Select this option to manually control when the flickering occurs by using only the Highest Intensity control Enabling this option will disable all other flicker controls Frequency Specifies the amount of flickering that occurs The higher the value the more flickering you will see Lowest Intensity Sets the lowest level of brightness which creates a progression from dark to bright between this level and the Highest Intensity level during the flicker Lower values will start the flicker at a Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro darker level For example if you want your flickering to progress from complete darkness to normal brightness you would select 0 for the Lowest Intensity and 100 for the Highest Intensity Highest Intensity Sets the high
205. ix E Matrox Axio Customer Support Getting the most support o osecciesas ise esunu ko hsebRA e ERI RsPRAR ka 294 Regot atO acces e P 294 Keep up to date with our website sess 294 Contacting US aci EE UE HR E DE RU estar uA R GE EPA FEROX ERR Reena ei 294 ING GX erre nm 295 Contents Introducing Matrox Axio This chapter outlines some of the features of Matrox Axio lists the contents of your kit provides the Axio system requirements and describes the available Matrox Axio documentation Welcome to Matrox Axio The Matrox Axio realtime HD and SD editing platforms let you work at the highest finishing quality with the most comprehensive realtime feature set and the most versatile codec technology Matrox Axio key features The following are key features of all Matrox Axio systems Makes Adobe Premiere Pro the foremost HD and SD editor for broadcast and post production Full resolution mixed format multi layer realtime editing of HD and SD video graphics and effects Realtime Matrox Flex CPU effects such as color correction speed changes and chroma luma keying Realtime and accelerated Matrox Flex GPU effects such as 3D DVEs blur glow soft focus shine and much more Native mxf file support for Panasonic P2 Sony XDCAM and Sony XDCAM HD in Adobe Premiere Pro and After Effects Extensive native codec support in HD and SD uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame DVCPRO HD MPEG HD HDV 1080i and 720
206. ject s video format and the video output will be downconverted this includes appropriate color space conversion from HD to SD The second SDI output won t be available however for a 1080p 24 fps project Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 79 4 If the Aspect Ratio Conversion list is available such as when the video output for an HD project is downconverted to NTSC or PAL select one of the following settings for the video output 16x9 Letterbox Outputs the widescreen 16 9 picture in letterbox mode by adding black bars at the top and bottom of the picture for display on a standard 4 3 television screen Anamorphic Outputs the widescreen 16 9 picture as horizontally compressed 4 3 video which retains the picture s full vertical resolution for display on a widescreen television To display the video with the correct proportions on an NTSC or PAL monitor select the 16 9 display setting on the monitor 5 If the Pulldown Method list is available select the pulldown method you want to be applied to your output video Standard 2 3 or Advanced 2 3 3 2 You should select Advanced 2 3 3 2 only if you ll be recording to a DV 1394 device that supports this pulldown method Depending on your project s frame rate and the current main SDI output format a pulldown method may automatically be selected 6 Under Analog Output you can specify your analog output format NTSC setup level and output type O
207. ject Settings General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Video Output tab then click the Advanced tab oUGENM 5 NI E OE 3 Use the Horizontal Delay sliders to advance or delay the horizontal timing of your SDI and analog video outputs 4 Select Allow Super White to allow the highest luminance level of your video output to exceed the standard maximum white level Select Allow Super Black to allow the lowest luminance level of your video output to fall below the standard black level Note The Allow Super Black and Allow Super White options affect both your SDI and analog video outputs Super white and super black should not be allowed when producing your final video production for broadcast 5 Use the SC H Phase slider to advance or delay your analog video output s subcarrier phase with respect to the horizontal sync of your genlock source for composite video only 6 Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 81 Specifying your audio output settings X linkHD and X linkSD Matrox Axio HD and SD let you customize your audio output settings such as to adjust the volume of your analog audio output select your SDI audio output format and indicate which channels you want to output when playing mono stereo and 5 1 surround audio tracks lt gt To specify your audio output settings 1 Choose Project gt Proje
208. just the depth of the effect X Y Z Rotation Use these controls to set the number of times the clip spins Each rotation of 360 produces one spin on the selected axis You can have positive or negative rotation from 360 to 360 X Y Z Rotation Center Offset Use the Rotation Center Offset controls to set the pivot point or center of rotation of your clip on the x horizontal y vertical and z depth axes When Rotation settings are applied your clip spins around this point You can use positive or negative pixel values to offset your clip on each axis In the illustrations below notice how different Offset values can affect the rotation of the cube Z Z X X Y Y Figure 1 Offset at 0 0 0 Figure 2 Offset at 100 0 0 In Figure 1 the Offset values are 0 0 0 so the center of rotation for the cube is where the x y and z axes meet In Figure 2 the Offset value for the x axis is set to 100 thus moving the cube and the pivot point to the right so when the cube is rotated it has a wider arc when spinning around the axes Transforming your clip 120 Transforming a clip in the Program Monitor You can use your left mouse button to resize position and rotate your clip directly in the Program Monitor Effects that support transforming a clip in the Program Monitor have the Transform icon to left of the effect name in the Effects Controls panel v Jik Matrox 3D DYE
209. ke sure that you specify the same scratch disk settings for all your projects This will help shorten the amount of time it takes to open new or existing projects Displaying warnings in Adobe Premiere Pro s Events panel Matrox Axio uses Adobe Premiere Pro s Events panel to issue certain error messages and warnings To display these either double click the alert icon i or on Adobe Premiere Pro s status bar or choose Window gt Events For more information about using the Events panel see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Setting up your scratch disks 68 Mixing SD and HD clips in a project Matrox Axio supports realtime playback of SD clips in an HD project and HD clips in an SD project To do this however the clips must be scaled to your project s frame size If you want the scaling to be performed when you import the clips into your project choose Edit gt Preferences gt General and select Default scale to frame size This option does not affect clips that have already been imported into your project To scale individual clips in a sequence right click the clip in the Timeline panel and choose Scale to Frame Size Depending on your project s video format realtime scaling of clips is supported as shown in the following table Project video format Supported realtime scaling 1080i 29 97 fps Upscale NTSC and HDV 10801 29 97 fps clips 1080i 25 fps Upscale PAL and HDV 1080i 25 fps
210. king frame rate conversions in DV video only It is used to convert 486p 23 08 fps video to NTSC 486i 29 97 fps video This conversion is used when video footage is acquired by a DV camera at 23 98 fps and recorded to DV tape with the recorder set for advanced pulldown called 24PA or 24P Advanced mode on some devices Advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown differs from standard 2 3 pulldown in that the two middle frames of the video sequence are each converted to three video fields Advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown 234 The following diagram demonstrates the process Progressive frames 23 98 fps A C Video fields 29 97 fps Video frame A Video frame B Video frame C Video frame D Video frame E Advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown is accomplished by representing the first frame of progressive video frame A as two fields of video fields a1 and a2 the second frame frame B as three fields of video fields b1 b2 and b3 the third frame frame C as three fields fields c1 c2 and c3 and the fourth frame frame D as two fields fields d1 and d2 Performing an advanced reverse pulldown 2 3 3 2 cadence reverses the process by converting 29 97 fps interlaced video to 23 98 fps progressive video This is achieved by discarding a video frame two video fields from the sequence From the diagram above a typical advanced reverse pulldown would discard video fields b3 and c1 This means that the application can remove video frame C from the sequence
211. ks to the new genlock source Under Genlock Video Format select your genlock source s video format If you can t select a video format make sure that your genlock source matches the specified video format When the genlock source is set to Internal the genlock video format is set to your project s master output format on Matrox Axio HD or SD or your project s main SDI output format on Matrox Axio LE Important To ensure good capture results make sure that your genlock source s video format matches the format of your captured material Under Advanced Settings drag the Horizontal Delay and Vertical Delay sliders to adjust the horizontal and vertical timing of your video outputs with respect to your genlock source This lets you compensate for cable delays within your system Select Reference Termination if you want to terminate the analog sync signal This option is not available on X linkLE Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box 89 Defining your General settings 90 Selecting your DV 1394 output settings You can choose to output a sequence from the Timeline panel over the 1394 interface to perform an export to DV tape and select the format you want for your DV 1394 output Note These settings are not needed to export to an HDV device and the DV 1394 Output page won t be available if you re working with an HDV 1080i or a 1080p project gt To select your DV 1394
212. l progression between this color and the Gradient Lower Boundary color Drag the slider to progress through the various colors in the gradient For example if you selected a gradient that 195 Creating a shine effect 196 progresses from black to white and you want your gradient to end at dark gray drag the slider to 10 Noise Use these controls to apply noise patterns to your shine effect Noise Pattern Allows you to select a noise pattern Click the button on the right to see the list of available patterns Click here to select a noise pattern Amount Sets the amount of noise that will be applied to your effect The higher the value the more apparent the noise pattern becomes Size Sets the size of the artifacts in the noise pattern Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the artifacts or to the left to shrink them X Progression Sets the progression of the noise pattern along the horizontal axis YProgression Sets the progression of the noise pattern along the vertical axis Postprocessing Use these controls to define how your shine colors blend with your source image s colors Each mode involves a calculation that uses the pixel values from your shine effect and the source image Mode Use this to select the mode you want to use for blending Click the triangle on the right to expand the list None There is no blending only the shine pixels are displayed Add Adds the sour
213. line editing In this workflow example the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec is used to capture video clips for use in an offline editing project The clips are captured with Matrox Axio at a data rate of 50 Mb sec and then used to complete an offline editing project When the offline edit is complete the project is trimmed and the offline clips are unlinked and then recaptured using a finishing quality HD video codec such as the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec at a data rate of 100 Mb sec or higher or a Matrox Uncompressed HD codec The online editing project is then exported to tape for broadcast Using the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec 248 This workflow scenario is represented in the following diagram Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec set at 50 Mb sec used to capture clips Video footage shot as any supported HD format Matrox Axio offline editing project using any Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD project preset Offline project is trimmed offline clips are unlinked and recaptured usng a finishing quality HD codec such as MPEG 2 I frame HD at 100 Mb sec or higher Exported to tape as finishing quality HD video for broadcast MPEG 2 I frame HD codec workflow example for online editing In this workflow example the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec is used to capture video clips for use in an online editing project The clips are captured with Matrox Axio at a data rate of 100 Mb sec or higher and then used to complet
214. lines on setting up your realtime effects see Matrox Axio realtime guidelines on page 207 When you install Matrox Axio utils all the Matrox effects are added to Adobe Premiere Pro and the Matrox Flex CPU effects are added to Adobe After Effects You set up Matrox effects in your productions the same way as other effects included with your Adobe software For example you apply a Matrox transition to your clips in Adobe Premiere Pro just as you would any other type of transition except that the controls provided let you create a Matrox transition as is explained in this chapter Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro D 117 For instructions on how to apply effects to your productions in Adobe Premiere Pro or Adobe After Effects refer to your Adobe documentation Important To use the Matrox realtime plug in for Adobe Premiere Pro you must have defined your Adobe Premiere Pro settings for use with your Matrox Axio system as explained in Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings How to apply a Matrox video effect in Adobe Premiere Pro The Matrox realtime plug in for Adobe Premiere Pro allows you to apply many realtime video effects to your clips To apply a Matrox video effect to a clip drag the desired effect from the Effects panel onto the clip in the Timeline panel By default the Matrox video effects are found in the Matrox bin under Video Effects L Tips e You can also apply pr
215. lines per frame refreshed at a rate of approximately 30 frames per second Broadcast systems in North America and Japan use the NTSC standard O old movie effect A Matrox effect that lets you simulate the look of old film by adding noise dust streaks jitter and flickers to your clip organic wipe A wipe effect that uses a grayscale gradient pattern to switch from one image to another by gradually revealing the second image according to the pattern 287 P page curl A Matrox effect that lets you peel or roll an image off the screen to reveal another image PAL Phase Alternate Line A video standard that uses a composite interlaced display comprised of 625 scan lines per frame refreshed at a rate of 25 frames per second This is the broadcast video standard for most of Europe pan amp scan effect A Matrox effect that lets you convert clips from one aspect ratio to another such as from 16 9 to 4 3 PCI slot Connection slot to a type of expansion bus found in many computers It is smaller in size than older ISA slots and provides connections to the PCI host bus at speeds up to 66 MHz PCle slot See PCI Express slot PCI Express slot A type of PCI slot that uses a different and much faster communications protocol than a 32 bit PCI slot PCI Express can accommodate the higher speeds required for high performance peripherals such as display cards and network controllers PCI Express slots are available in different siz
216. lity of limiting the color correction to a specific range of pixels using the selective key properties For example secondary color correction can be used to change the color of a dress deepen the background sky color or to achieve an effect where only one object or person remains in color while the rest of the image becomes black and white For details on how to isolate a color and make the rest of the clip black and white see Creating a color pass effect on page 147 i Tip Adobe Premiere Pro includes a workspace setup that is optimized for working with clips and effects to facilitate color correction To prepare your workspace for color correction choose Window gt Workspace gt Color Correction gt To set up a Matrox secondary color correction Click the triangle next to Matrox Color Correction Secondary to expand the property list Enable Split View Select this option to split your clip into two sections in the Program Monitor and on your video monitor One section will display your clip as you adjust the color correction controls and the other section of the clip will remain unchanged For more information see Using Split View on page 127 Proc Amps The processing amplifier proc amp controls allow you to adjust different aspects of your clip Creating a secondary color correction 138 Hue Adjusts the tint of the colors in the image Saturation Adjusts the saturation vividness of the image
217. ls under the Source Monitor to go to the frame in your target clip that contains the colors you want to match to your reference clip Creating a primary color correction 134 6 Select a reference color from your reference clip by using the Reference Color eyedropper under the color map you want to affect Master Shadows Midtones or Highlights Reference Match m 20 H Reference Color eyedropper For example to match a very dark color in your reference clip to your target clip click the Reference Color eyedropper under the Shadows color map and click or click and drag on the desired color in your reference clip Select a match color from your target clip in the Source Monitor window by using the Match Color eyedropper under the corresponding color map Master Shadows Midtones or Highlights Reference Match mc H o x Match Color eyedropper Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 135 Using the luma mapping graph To modify your luma mapping values directly in the graph click the triangle next to the Luma Mapping Graphical property to expand it e Map This is the default view when you first expand the Graphical property You can drag the handles in the graph to adjust the Input and Output levels for black and white as well as the Gamma a Map Plot DS Auto Black Auto White eens E a5 ee ee e eda an pr T 4 M 1 D 1 1 1 D 1 nous
218. lt the sliders are locked so that they move together To move each slider independently click the lock button to disable it The Left slider adjusts the analog audio outputs 1 3 and 5 The Right slider adjusts the analog audio outputs 2 4 and 6 From the XLR Output Impedance list select the impedance setting you want for your balanced analog XLR audio output such as Hi Z high impedance Note On Matrox Axio LE the bit depth for your embedded SDI audio is set to 24 bit as shown under SDI Audio Output Format Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Defining your General settings 86 Displaying settings for mono and stereo mapping X linkLE Matrox Axio LE lets you display mono and stereo mapping settings that show which channels are used to output your audio when playing back mono and stereo audio tracks in your sequence gt To display your mono stereo mapping settings 1 Choose Project Project Settings General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Audio Output tab then click the Mono Stereo Mapping tab This page shows that when playing mono and stereo audio tracks audio is output to the first embedded SDI audio output pair and the first analog audio and AES EBU output pairs ANALOG AUDIO OUT 1 and OUT 2 and AES EBU OUT 1 2 on X linkLE Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 87 Displaying settings for 5 1 surround mapping X linkL
219. lue you set black in your clip to a higher luminance value which compresses the luminance range and darkens your clip proportionally Output Levels Black and White These controls let you map the values under Input Levels to any level of black and white You can Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro reduce contrast in your clip or reverse the luminosity of your clip by setting black to a higher value than white Gamma Use this to adjust the midtones in your clip without adjusting black or white Mask Allows you to apply a mask to your effect For more information see Applying a mask to your effect on page 123 Using Split View The Split View option allows you to split your clip in two for preview on your Program Monitor and your video monitor One section displays your clip as you adjust the color correction controls while the other section of the clip remains unchanged There are two ways to enable Split View You can select the Enable Split View option in the Effect Controls panel or work directly in Adobe Premiere Pro s Program Monitor using your mouse Working with Split View in the Program Monitor To activate the Split View controls in the Program Monitor click the Transform icon 1 Tk beside the name of the Matrox color correction effect in the Effect Controls panel The Split View button will appear in the upper left corner of the Program Monitor Split View button Enable Split Vie
220. luminance values Oversaturated Luma Uses the oversaturated luminance values only Threshold Use this to proportionally increase or decrease the region outside your Mode range For example if you chose Red Only as your mode raising the Threshold will cause only the really bright red areas of your image to be affected by the shine Color Remapping These controls allow you to apply a color gradient to your effect For example you may want to simulate the look of a crackling fire by using a gradient that contains orange red and white Enable Color Remapping Select this option to enable color remapping Gradient Allows you to select a gradient Click the button on the right to see the list of available gradients You can use the Gradient Lower Boundary and Gradient Upper Boundary controls to specify a range of colors from the gradient you choose Use Gradient Built in Alpha Select this option when using a gradient that contains an alpha channel Gradient Lower Boundary Sets the starting color from the gradient you chose which will create a gradual progression between this color and the Gradient Upper Boundary color Drag the slider to progress through the various colors in the gradient For example if you selected a gradient that progresses from black to white and you want your gradient to start at medium gray drag the slider to 50 Gradient Upper Boundary Sets the end color from the gradient you chose which will create a gradua
221. material to an avi file such as in the case of a completed video production or an animation you can use a Matrox codec to create a Matrox avi file For example you may want to render an animation to Matrox DV DVCAM format so that you can record it onto DV tape You could also use your VFW program to render video to a Matrox avi file so that you can import the file as a realtime clip into your Adobe Premiere Pro projects on Matrox Axio When rendering compositions or animations that have an alpha channel you can select a Alpha Matrox VFW codec to render to a Matrox uncompressed or MPEG 2 avi file that includes the alpha key information This avi file will play back in real time on your Axio system and will be automatically keyed when you place the clip in your Adobe Premiere Pro sequence The following sections explain the various settings that you need to make to render material using a VFW program with your Matrox Axio system For details on exporting video from Adobe Premiere Pro to a Matrox avi file see Exporting to a Matrox avi file on page 99 Using Adobe Premiere Pro to export video on your Matrox Axio system lets you overcome the 2 GB avi file limit of VFW programs Remarks Speed changes are not supported on Matrox VFW avi files with alpha Youcan t use Adobe Premiere Pro to render effects with alpha using the Matrox VFW Alpha codecs because Premiere Pro does not preserve the alpha key information durin
222. mats for exporting to a Matrox avi file depend on your project s video format as shown in the following table Project video format Supported export format s NTSC NTSC PAL PAL 486p 23 98 fps 486p 23 98 fps or NTSC 720p 23 98 fps 720p 23 98 fps 720p 59 94 fps NTSC or 486p 23 98 fps 720p 25 fps 720p 25 fps 720p 50 fps or PAL 720p 29 97 fps 720p 29 97 fps 720p 59 94 fps or NTSC 720p 50 fps 720p 50 fps or PAL 720p 59 94 fps 720p 59 94 fps or NTSC 1080i 25 fps 1080i 25 fps or PAL 1080i 29 97 fps 1080i 29 97 fps or NTSC HDV 1080i 29 97 fps HDV 1080i 29 97 fps or NTSC HDV 1080i 25 fps HDV 1080i 25 fps or PAL 1080p 23 98 fps 1080p 23 98 fps 1080i 29 97 fps NTSC or 486p 23 98 fps 1080p 24 fps 1080p 24 fps 1080p 25 fps 1080p 25 fps or PAL For example if you have an NTSC project you must select an NTSC codec If you have an HDV 1080i 29 97 fps project you can select an HDV 1080i 20 97 fps codec to export to HD format or you can select an NTSC codec to downconvert the HD video to NTSC this includes appropriate color space conversion from HD to SD Downconverting an HD project to SD however is supported only for projects with an 8 bit video processing format Exporting to a Matrox avi file 100 gt To export your sequence to a Matrox avi file 1 Choose File gt Export gt Movie Click the Settings button and from the File Type list select M
223. matting drives as 12 34 NTSC setup level selecting for analog video 75 77 79 O Offline HD codec See Matrox Offline HD codec Offline HD project creating on Matrox Axio 240 creating VFW on remote workstation 241 recapturing clips for online project 242 workflow examples 244 Old movie effect creating 182 P P2 files See Panasonic P2 files Page curl creating 186 Pan amp scan effect creating 188 Panasonic P2 files exporting to disk 102 using in projects 58 Panasonic VariCam capturing material from 93 257 PCI retainer bracket removing 13 35 using 13 35 Photoshop WYSIWYG plug in See Adobe Photoshop WYSIWYG plug in Pixel aspect ratio selecting for render in Adobe Premiere Pro 100 Power selection switch setting on X effects card 15 Power supply connecting external to X effects card 19 connecting internal cable to X effects card 16 connecting internal cable to X io card 14 Preconfigured Matrox effects applying 117 Proc amps adjusting using Matrox color correction 137 Project presets for HD material 239 for SD 24P material 236 loading for Matrox Axio 66 See also Matrox Axio workflows Pulldown description of advanced 233 description of standard 232 used in 486p 23 98 fps project 236 used in HD projects 251 Pulldown method selecting for output on X linkHD 75 selecting for output on X linkLE 79 selecting for output on X linkSD 77 R Realtime plug in for Adobe Premiere Pro 3D DVE creating 148 4 corner pin c
224. n documentation Alternate Sets an alternate zig zag scanning pattern of the AC coefficient of the DCT block as defined in the ISO IEC 13818 2 figure 7 3 specification documentation Use this setting when capturing or rendering video at a high data rate for example at a data rate of 100 Mb sec or higher Under Rounding Type select one of the following MPEG 2 Rounds the AC coefficients up to the nearest whole number when calculating the quantization coefficient Matrox Custom Truncates the AC coefficients to the lowest whole number when calculating the quantization coefficient In some cases this setting may yield less artifacts in graphics Select the Force Frame based DCT setting to render macroblocks as frames rather than as fields In some cases graphics will yield less artifacts if this option is selected Click OK to save your settings The settings you selected will be used each time you render material with your program until you change the settings again 217 Rendering material to a Matrox VFW avi file 218 Your notes Chapter 10 Using Matrox Axio with Video for Windows Programs 11 Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug ins This chapter explains how to use the Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel and plug ins available with Matrox Axio so that you can display the contents of your composition or animation on your video monitor 220 Overview Together with your Matrox Axio hardware the Matrox WYSIWY
225. ncluding bracket 13 875 x 4 9 Overall thickness including components 0 75 Typical operating voltages and current consumption Voltage 3 3V 5V 12 V 12V Current 2 0A 0 5 A 0 5A 0 15 A Total power consumption 18 0 watts Appendix C Matrox Axio Specifications Video input signals Signal Type Qty Voltage Impedance Composite Video 1 1 0 V 75 Q OR Y C Video 1 Luminance signal Y 1 0 Vp 750 oo signal PAL 0 300 Vp burst 75 0 NTSC 0 286 V p burst 750 NTSC EIAJ 0 286 V p burst 75 Q OR Component Video 1 Luminance signal Y 1 0 Vp 750 Chrominance signal PAL 0 700 V at 100 color bar 75 0 B Y R Y NTSC 0 700 V at 75 color bar 750 NTSC EIAJ 0 757 V at 75 color 750 bar HD 0 700 Vp at 100 color bar 750 SD SDI HD SDI Video 1 Compliant with 75 0 SMPTE 259M SMPTE 292M Reference In 1 SD 1 0 Vp 75 Q HD 1 0 Vis tri sync 75 Axio LE card 276 Video output signals Signal Type Qty Voltage Impedance Composite Video 2 1 0 V 75 see note below Y C Video 1 Luminance signal Y 1 0 Vp 75 0 Chrominance signal PAL 0 300 Vp burst 75 C NTSC 0 286 V burst 75 NTSC EIAJ 0 286 V p burst 75 OR Component Video 1 Luminance signal Y 1 0 Vp 75 Q Chrominance signal PAL 0 700 V at 100 color bar 75 Q B Y R Y NTSC 0 700 V at 75 color bar 75 NTSC EIAJ 0 757 V at 75 colo
226. nd of the X linkLE balanced analog audio cable to the Analog Audio connector at the back of your X linkLE breakout box Tighten the thumb screws until snug to ensure a stable connection Analog Audio MALOR Back of X linkLE breakout box partial view Axio LE balanced analog audio cable connector A f Oo o X linkLE balanced analog audio cable gt Qy Cetetietensteteto O Axio LE audio cable o o bracket TJ 2 Attach the opposite end of the X linkLE balanced analog audio cable to the balanced analog audio cable connector labeled A on your installed Axio LE audio cable bracket Tighten the thumb screws until snug to ensure a stable connection AY Caution Use extra care when attaching the cable to its respective connector bent pins can cause your Matrox Axio LE system to not perform properly Also do not bend the attached cable too sharply Excessive bending or flexing can damage internal shielded wires Chapter 5 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio LE 45 Connect your X linkLE 1394 cable to your computer 1 Connect one end of the X linkLE 1394 cable to the 1394 connector at the back of your X linkLE breakout box matrox Back of X linkLE EA Analog Audio 4 breakout box o E 5L partial view o o p 1394 cable connector bracket on your computer ET L 1394 X linkLE 1394 cable 2 Attach the opposite end of the X linkLE 1394 cable to the 1394
227. needed to make a complete scan of an interlaced video frame In the NTSC system two consecutive fields of 262 5 lines each create a frame of 525 scan lines In the PAL system two consecutive fields of 312 5 lines each create a frame of 625 scan lines FireWire Apple Computer s original implementation of the technology that would be standardized as IEEE 1394 in 1995 Flex CPU effect See CPU based effect Flex GPU effect See hardware accelerated effect frame A single video image An interlaced video frame is comprised of two consecutive fields the odd and even fields G GOP Group of Pictures The sequence of I B and or P frames produced during MPEG or MPEG 2 compression This sequence of frames contains all of the information required to reproduce a complete video segment The longer the GOP the less editable it is GPU Graphics processing unit A processor that is used primarily for computing 3D functions such as processing 3D DVEs and lighting effects Because the calculations required to process these effects are CPU intensive the GPU lifts this burden from the CPU to allow it to perform more efficiently A high performance display card is sometimes referred to as a GPU graphics card See display card graphics overlay Text or a graphics image that s superimposed on video A so called super Appendix D Matrox Axio Glossary H hardware accelerated effect An effect that requires the assis
228. nel you want to record on that track Mute Track Record Enable Volume Play Stop toggle Record 4 Click the Record button to prepare the sequence for recording Click the Play button to begin recording and speak into the microphone Note During recording there s a slight delay in the audio preview of your voice over To mute the preview click the Mute Track button 4 or you can choose to lower the track volume by dragging the Volume slider Click the Stop button Bl to stop recording Your voice over will be added to the selected audio tracks as wav files Adding a voice over to your sequence 110 Exporting using Matrox Media Encoder You can use Matrox Media Encoder to export clips from a sequence in the Timeline panel to various formats for specific media delivery such as Windows Media or RealMedia streaming media format or MPEG 2 format for DVD authoring For example you can use Matrox Media Encoder to export video from your sequence to an MPEG 2 Elementary m2v file that s suitable for use with Adobe Encore DVD Matrox Media Encoder provides the same export formats as Adobe Media Encoder and benefits from hardware acceleration on Matrox Axio To avoid having inverted fields in your exported files when exporting material for DVD authoring you must select the appropriate field order for the export according to your projects s video format as shown in the following table Project video format Fiel
229. ngle next to the Select property to expand it then click the Select Crop button Note When working with the Matrox cube effect Select Crop is available only for the primary source Select Crop The Select Crop dialog box allows you to crop your clip in two ways Click and drag directly in the Select Crop window to create the rectangular cropping area To resize your cropping area drag any side of the rectangle For example drag the right side of the rectangle to crop the right edge of your clip To resize the entire cropping area at once drag one of the corners the corner that s diagonally opposite the corner you are moving will remain stationary Use the Left Right Top and Bottom controls to crop any edge by a given number of pixels You can enter values in the text boxes or drag the sliders to resize your crop area For example drag the Left slider to crop the left edge of your clip Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 123 Applying a mask to your effect Many of the Matrox effects allow you to add a mask to define the area where you want to apply your effect For example you may want to apply a color correction to only one area of your clip and leave the rest of the clip untouched Adding a mask to the chroma or luma key effect and selecting Transparent Outside Mask lets you disable keying in the area outside the mask so that only the underlying image a
230. nimum system configuration Intel Xeon dual CPU at 3 4 GHz or faster or AMD Opteron 250 dual CPU or faster An internal power supply of at least 530 watts with one free outlet for the X io card and an additional free outlet if you ll be providing power to the X effects card from your computer s internal power supply 2 GB or more of physical memory RAM 2 free PCI X expansion slots running at 100 MHz Added ventilation fan as explained in Providing adequate ventilation on page 10 Display card with at least 128 MB of onboard memory DVD ROM drive for the software installation Chapter 1 Introducing Matrox Axio Microsoft Windows XP with Service Pack 2 Adobe Premiere Pro 2 0 For up to date information about Matrox Axio HD and SD system requirements contact your Matrox Axio dealer D Important If you provide power to the X effects card from your computer s internal power supply upgrading your system with devices that consume a lot of power can cause your Axio system to become unstable Devices that consume considerable power include faster CPUs advanced display cards such as cards that support NVIDIA SLI technology and additional hard drives Before upgrading your system check with your Matrox Axio dealer Depending on the power requirements of your system upgrade you may need to switch to the external power supply for the X effects card Matrox Axio LE system requirements Matrox Axio LE requires a compu
231. nique used to incorporate the video and audio portions of a video clip into one file See also AVI 285 intra frame compression A video compression method that removes redundant information from within a frame Intra frame compression treats each frame of a video segment independently Several video compression formats use the intra frame method These include Motion JPEG DV and MPEG 2 I frame Also called spatial redundancy reduction Contrast with inter frame compression See also I frame Intra frame IRE unit An arbitrary unit designated by the Institute of Radio Engineers to define the amplitude of a video signal 1 IRE is equal to approximately 7 mV J JPEG pronounced jay peg Joint Photographic Experts Group A compression and storage standard used for still digital images See also Motion JPEG K key effect See alpha key chroma key and luma key keyframe A particular frame at which one or more effect settings have been defined Settings applied at a keyframe remain active on the clip until a later keyframe is defined to turn off or change the settings L lens flare effect A Matrox effect that lets you choose from many different patterns to simulate the light refractions caused by shining a bright light into the lens of a camera when taking a photo LTC Longitudinal Time Code Time code that is generally encoded as an audio signal onto a linear audio track of a tape This type of time code can be rea
232. nput for a 486p 23 98 fps project you must specify In and Out points for your captured clips manual captures are not supported From the Input Format list select the video format that matches your source video Depending on your project s video format you may not be able to change the input format If needed Matrox Axio will apply an appropriate pulldown method to convert the incoming video to your project s video format For example if your project s video format is 1080p 23 98 fps and you set the Input Format to 1080i 29 97fps a standard reverse pulldown 2 3 cadence will be applied to capture the video to 1080p 23 98 fps Note If you re working with an HDV 1080i 1440x1080 project your analog source video must be full size 1080i 1920 x 1080 but it will be captured to HDV 1080i 1440x1080 format From the Input Aspect Ratio list select the aspect ratio of your source video 4 3 or 16 9 For example to capture video that was recorded using the standard TV screen format select 4 3 To capture video that was recorded using the widescreen 16 9 format select 16 9 If you re defining capture settings for an HD project the Input Aspect Ratio will be set to 16 9 Under Capture Format select your desired capture format from the list If you re capturing from a DV 1394 device however video will be captured to native DV or HDV format the Capture Format will be set to Native DV HDV Chapter 8 Defining Your Ad
233. ns click File in the menu bar then click Save in the menu that appears The names of keys are displayed in small capital bold letters such as the CTRL key A plus sign is used to indicate combinations of keys and or mouse operations For example CTRL C means to hold down the CTRL key while pressing the C key SHIFT click means to hold down the SHIFT key while you click an item with the mouse How video formats are expressed With the exception of NTSC and PAL all SD and HD video formats are expressed in the Matrox Axio documentation and dialog boxes as follows VRp ori n fps Where VRis the vertical resolution porirepresents either progressive or interlaced video n fps is the frame rate in frames per second Here are some examples 486p 23 98 fps Represents 720x486 progressive video at 23 98 frames per second 720p 59 94 fps Represents 1280x720 progressive video at 59 94 frames per second Chapter 1 Introducing Matrox Axio e HDV 1080i 29 97 fps Represents 1440x 1080 interlaced video at 29 97 frames per second This format is used for HDV material 1080i 29 97 fps Represents full size 1920x1080 interlaced video at 29 97 frames per second Last minute information Any important information that wasn t available for inclusion in this manual by publication time is provided to you in one or both of the following The Axio Readme htm file on the Matrox Axio installation DVD
234. nsparency of the area around the shape which increases the amount of blurring outside the mask area Outside Transparency Sets the transparency level of the area outside your mask Note The Outside Transparency setting is applicable only if you ve scaled down moved or rotated your mask using the transform controls so that the mask doesn t cover the entire screen Softness Lets you apply blurring to the edges of your mask Invert Mask Select this option if you want to invert the opaque and transparent areas of your mask Apply Crop to Video Only Select this if you want the mask to be squeezed to fit your cropped clip If you don t select this option the mask will be cropped by the same amount that you crop your clip Transform Use these controls to apply or change various transform settings for your mask blur effect such as the position scale and rotation of the mask For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Note Ifyou are working in HD the mask blur effect may require rendering depending on your project s video format 177 Creating a mask blur effect 178 Creating a mask mosaic effect The Matrox mask mosaic effect lets you create a region of interest by adding a mask to your clip and applying a mosaic effect to it You can choose from many different mask patt
235. nstall your Matrox Axio card set Your Matrox Axio card set is designed to operate in your computer s PCI X slots If any of the slots in which you ll be installing your Axio cards contain other cards either move them to unused slots or remove them completely If you want to use a 133 MHz slot then you must configure the slot to run at 100 MHz in the computer s BIOS or using a jumper on the computer s motherboard For details about configuring your computer s PCI X slots see your computer s documentation To determine the particular slots in which you should install your X io and X effects cards for recommended systems and motherboards contact your Matrox Axio dealer D Important Any components that you have installed in your computer s PCI X slots must operate at 100 MHz or faster Otherwise these components might hinder the performance of your Axio card set Install your X io card 1 Make sure the internal power supply connector is connected to your X io card as explained in Connect the internal power supply cable to your X io card on page 14 Remove the metal plate located at the back of the slot you ll be using Save the screw for the mounting bracket Position your X io card over the slot that you ve chosen and push the card firmly and evenly until it s fully seated in the slot Using the fasten screw secure your X io card s bracket to the computer frame Connect the male end of the internal power supply c
236. nstalling the software you the original purchaser indicate your acceptance of these terms If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement please return the package unopened This Matrox software any included sample images and other files the Software is copyrighted by Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd All rights are reserved You are granted a license to use the Software only subject to the following restrictions and limitations 1 The license is to you the original purchaser only and is not transferable without written permission of Matrox 2 You may use the Software on a single computer owned or leased by you 3 You may not use the Software on more than a single machine even if you own or lease more than one machine without the express written consent of Matrox 4 You may make back up copies of the Software for your own use only subject to the use limitations of this license 5 You may not engage in nor permit third parties to engage in any of the following a Providing or disclosing the Software to third parties b Providing use of the Software in a computer service business network time sharing multiple CPU or multi user arrangement to users who are not individually licensed by Matrox C Making alterations or copies of any kind in the Software except as specifically permitted above d Attempting to disassemble decompile or reverse engineer the Software in any way e Granting sublicenses leases or other rights in
237. nt bracket Rackmount bracket 3 Using a hand screwdriver only no power screwdrivers carefully tighten each screw until snug Do not overtighten Chapter 5 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio LE 43 Connect your X linkLE audio video and SDI cables to the Axio LE card 1 Connect the X linkLE audio video cable from the back of the X linkLE breakout box to the X linkLE audio video cable connector labeled B on your installed Axio LE card Tighten the thumb screws until snug to ensure a stable connection Back of X linkLE breakout box partial view E E Analog Audio 3 1394 GER Axio LE audio video cable connector B X linkLE audio video cable Q NN A Axio LE PE 9 SDI m8 connectors X linkLE SDI cable Axio LE card bracket 2 Connect the X linkLE SDI cable from the back of the X linkLE breakout box to the respective SDI connectors labeled OUT A OUT B and IN on your installed Axio LE card AN Caution Use extra care when attaching the cables to their respective connectors bent pins can cause your Matrox Axio LE system to not perform properly Also do not bend the attached cables too sharply Excessive bending or flexing can damage internal shielded wires Connect your X linkLE audio video and SDI cables to the Axio LE card 44 Connect your X linkLE balanced analog audio cable to the audio cable bracket 1 Connect one e
238. ntensity Sets the darkness of the ripple shadow as a percentage Highlight Color Use this to select the highlight color Highlight Intensity Sets the darkness of the highlight as a percentage Border Settings Round Corner Size Allows you to round the corners on the edges of your clip Softness Lets you adjust the amount of softness on the edge of your clip by dragging the slider or entering a percentage in the text box The higher the value the less sharp the edge will become Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 191 Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Important Due to the shape of the ripple effect your effect may exceed the cropped area Ripple Softness Use this to add softness to the alpha channel in the ripple so that the outline of the ripple will appear smoother Transform Allows you to apply or change various transform settings for your ripple such as the size position and rotation of the ripple For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Creating a ripple effect 192 Creating a shadow effect D The Matrox shadow effect lets you project a realistic shadow from any source containing key information such as DVEs and titles with an alpha channel You can tint the shadow and position scale and rotate it to match the angle of the surface on which it is cast Applying blur to the
239. nward Mode Allows you to select the mode you want Additive or Blend Click the triangle on the right to expand the list Additive Adds the shine layers on top of one another repeatedly so the effect becomes brighter Blend Blends the shine layers together This mode is useful if you want to make two dimensional text appear to be three dimensional Precision Sets the amount of shine layers applied in the effect Higher values result in a cleaner more precise effect Note The higher the precision value the longer the shine effect will take to render Start Opacity Sets the opacity of the rays closest to the light source Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro End Opacity Sets the opacity of the rays furthest from the light source Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Preprocessing These controls allow you to isolate a channel as the input for the shine For example if you wanted to apply the shine to the alpha channel only you would select Alpha Only as your mode Enable Preprocessing Select this option to enable preprocessing Mode Lets you select the channel you want to use for your effect Click the triangle on the right to expand the list Red Only Uses the red channel e Green Only Uses the green channel Blue Only Uses the blue channel Alpha Only Uses the alpha channel Luma Uses the
240. ny other output such as SDI Axio performs a standard pulldown For more information about standard 2 3 pulldown and advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown see Appendix A Understanding Standard and Advanced Pulldown Working with SD 24P material 238 486p 23 98 fps workflow example The following diagram illustrates typical 486p 23 98 fps workflows using Matrox Axio Analog or SDI input output SD video footage Film footage shot at 24 fps acquired at 23 98 fps progressive Film footage telecined and transferred to an SD video tape format Standard 2 3 pulldown is performed with A frames appearing at time codes 0 and 5 Np NTSC video on tape NTSC video on tape or mxf files on Matrox Axio performs standard reverse pulldown 2 3 cadence me Matrox Axio using a 486p 23 98 fps project preset Matrox Axio performs m standard 2 3 pulldown Exported to disk such as to an MPEG 2 file for DVD authoring or a Matrox avi or mxf file Exported to tape as NTSC video for broadcast DV 1394 input output or mxf files on disk Camera performs either standard or advanced pulldown depending on mode selection when the acquired footage is recorded to tape or disk Matrox Axio detects original pulldown method then performs either an advanced reverse pulldown or standard reverse pulldown during capture or playback for mxf files Depending on the user s
241. o Note When exporting to an HD format the aspect ratio is set to 16 9 Click the Browse button to select the drive folder and file name for the export Note If you re exporting to Panasonic P2 files the appropriate P2 directory structure will be created for the exported mxf files if it doesn t already exist For example video files will be exported to the CONTENTSNVIDEO folder and audio files to the CONTENTS AUDIO folder Click Export to perform the export If you want to use the exported files in your Adobe Premiere Pro project you will need to import the mxf file s manually to the Project panel Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 105 Selecting your MPEG 2 I frame settings When you select the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame or Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD format to capture or export your video using Adobe Premiere Pro you can specify various options for the MPEG 2 I frame compression gt To select your MPEG 2 I frame options 1 Click the Configure button This displays a dialog box similar to the following Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Settings x muro e p o 2 Drag the Data Rate slider until your desired data rate is displayed The higher the data rate you select the better the video quality will be The range of available data rates depends on whether you re using the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD or SD format Important Depending on the capabilities of your system you may drop frames if yo
242. o MPEG 2 I frame HD format Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows 255 The following diagram provides a typical workflow when using a 1080i 25 fps or 20 97 fps preset on Matrox Axio Film footage telecined and transferred to HD tape Standard 2 3 pulldown performed for converting to 1080i 29 97 fps video only i Film footage shot 1080i video on tape at 24 fps Matrox finishing quality codec such as MPEG 2 l frame HD used to capture clips or HDV and DVCPRO HD clips captured natively over the 1394 interface Matrox Axio editing HD video footage project using any _ from mxf files finishing quality imported to project 1080i project preset Exported to disk Exported to Exported to tape Rees Zu og Exported to tape HDV or as 1080i MPEG 2 file for as NTSC or PAL DVCPRO HD finishing quality DVD authoring finishing quality over the 1394 video for ora Matrox E video for interface broadcast ei salle broadcast Other Matrox Axio HD workflows 256 Mixing 1080p and 1080i 25 fps source video When working in a 1080p 25 fps or 10801 25 fps project you can use either 1080i 25 fps or 1080p 25 fps clips as your source video Although the input format setting is always set to the project s video format both 1080p 25 fps and 10801 25 fps source video can be captured and used in a 25 fps HD project When these clips are captured by Matrox Axio they are saved to disk in the project s video format
243. o adjust the border along the X axis The higher the value the wider your border becomes Y Border Width Use this control to adjust the border along the Y axis The higher the value the wider your border becomes Border Inside Softness Sets the border softness on the inside edge of your border The higher the softness value the less sharp the edge or border becomes Border Outside Color Use the color picker or eyedropper to select the color you want for your border or the outside edge of your border if you selected Gradient as your border type Border Outside Transparency Sets the transparency of your border or outside edge of your border if you selected Gradient as your border type Levels range from opaque 0 to fully transparent 100 Note The next two properties Border Inside Color and Border Inside Transparency are available only if you selected Gradient as your border type Border Inside Color Use the color picker or eyedropper to set the inside color of your border which will create a gradient between this color and the outside color of your border Border Inside Transparency Sets the transparency of the inside color of your border Round Corner Size Allows you to round the corners on the edges of your border Corner Point Offset Allows you to move the position of the corner points of your border so that you can create various shapes for your 3D DVE Negative values bring the corner po
244. o connections External sync source VOT INE o n OUT E ysvc mra QU sol AUDIOR p out AUDIOL VIDEO Source Deck 1 Dytsot S VIDEO DV 1394 device 7 T ANALOG AUDIO Ny YCVESIN Pb YIN PUCIN N matrox O96 Oe 59 aaO a OWO A REFIN we O o o o o oue out saose vives our por our pyc our cou oU oU rasa 75 OHM A Recorder Deck 2 T BHO o 2 y SYNC W752 Non S SI OFF OUT a ci Program monitor input B YIB R YIR R YIR Q Q SDI IN B Y B Program monitor input Typical Matrox Axio LE connections 50 Your notes Chapter 5 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio LE Installing Your Matrox Axio Software This chapter explains how to install the software required to use your Matrox Axio system 52 Overview of the software installation Once you ve installed your Matrox Axio hardware and properly connected your devices you can proceed with the software installation This includes installing Adobe Premiere Pro and Matrox Axio utils Matrox Axio utils installs the drivers
245. o this you may not need to use the Delay Movie Start Exporting to DV tape using DV 1394 device control You can use Matrox DV HDV device control when exporting your Adobe Premiere Pro sequence to a DV 1394 device Remarks Youcan t export a 720p 23 98 fps 25 fps 29 97 fps or 50 fps project to a DVCPRO HD device over the 1394 interface As a workaround for a 720p 23 98 fps or 29 97 fps project you can export your sequence to a Matrox DVCPRO HD avi file in 720p 59 94 fps format see Exporting to a Matrox avi file on page 99 import your Matrox avi file to a new 720p 50 94 fps project and then export your sequence to tape DV 1394 export to HDV is not supported for 720p projects gt To export your sequence to tape over the 1394 interface 1 Open the project and activate the sequence you want to export to tape 2 Make sure your DV 1394 device is properly connected and turned on 3 Unless you re exporting to an HDV device make sure that you ve enabled the DV 1394 output for export to tape and selected a DV 1394 output format as explained in Selecting your DV 1394 output settings on page 90 Note If you re exporting to an HDV device Premiere Pro will detect that you re using an HDV device when you perform the export to tape and the video will be exported in native HDV format 4 If you re using a camcorder switch it to VTR mode 5 Load a striped recordable tape into your DV 1394 device Make sure that you
246. obe Premiere Pro Settings 10 93 Note The formats to which you can capture clips depend on your project s video format and Matrox Axio hardware For more information see Supported video compression formats on page 260 Matrox DV DVCAM Captures video to DV or DVCAM format Matrox DVCPRO Captures video to DVCPRO format Matrox DVCPRO50 Captures video to DVCPROSO or D 9 format Matrox DVCPRO HD Captures video to DVCPRO HD format Available only for HD projects with a format of 10801 or 720p Matrox 8 bit Uncompressed Captures video to 8 bit uncompressed format Matrox 10 bit Uncompressed Captures video to 10 bit uncompressed format Not available when capturing from X linkLE Matrox MPEG 2lI frame Captures video to MPEG 2 intra frame format using the 4 2 2 Profile Main Level at a selected data rate SD resolution only For the best results when capturing video clips on which you ll be applying chroma key effects you should use this codec instead of a DV codec Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Captures video to MPEG 2 intra frame format using the 4 2 2 Profile High Level at a selected data rate HD resolution only This is the only capture format available to capture analog or SDI video for an HDV 10801 project Matrox Offline HD Captures video to a proxy HD video format for offline editing purposes If you selected Matrox MPEG 2 I frame or Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD click the Configure
247. ode which is electronically encoded on the tape in the form hours minutes seconds frames See also drop frame time code LTC and VITC timeline The graphical representation normally a horizontal line of a video sequence It is usually divided into hours minutes seconds frames and is used to position video audio graphics and video effects that make up the sequence tonalrange The range of light and dark areas in an image Tonal range can be divided into three different areas shadows midtones and highlights Shadows are the darkest areas of an image highlights are the lightest areas and midtones are the areas with tones between the lightest and darkest areas track matte effect A Matrox effect that lets you superimpose one clip onto another using an animated matte sometimes called a traveling matte to determine how the two clips are composited keyed transform settings Settings that let you change the position size and rotation of a clip in the Matrox realtime plug in Transform settings can be applied on the x y and z axes of a clip traveling matte effect See track matte effect Appendix D Matrox Axio Glossary twirl effect A Matrox effect that lets you create twirl patterns that twist and rotate your video and graphics clips into spirals coils or whirlpools V VCD Video CD A standard for storing video and audio on a CD that provides slightly better video quality than standard VHS Video is compre
248. oject to tape and those segments were not identified with a red bar you can lower the Realtime Indicator Threshold For more information see Defining your General settings on page 69 The maximum number of layers that can be played back in real time depends on the capabilities of your system your project s video format the compression format of your clips and the number and complexity of the effects you ve applied to your clips Matrox Axio realtime guidelines 208 Supported graphics formats All full screen single frame graphics supported by Adobe Premiere Pro are supported in real time on Matrox Axio This includes all titling formats that Premiere Pro supports such as Adobe Title Designer prtl files For details on the supported formats see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Note Graphics rolls crawls and animations are not supported in real time Limitations You will need to render your effects if you do any of the following Apply any Field Options to a clip such as Always Deinterlace or Flicker Removal Apply a freeze frame effect to a clip using the Frame Hold command Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 10 Using Matrox Axio with Video for Windows Programs This chapter provides information you need to know when using Video for Windows programs to render material on your Matrox Axio system 210 Overview When using Video for Windows VFW programs to render
249. on controls may alter their shape Selecting this option will preserve it Position X Mean Position Sets the position of the brush strokes along the x axis X Position Variation Use this to set the maximum percentage that a brush stroke will move in relation to the X Mean Position value For example if you set the X Position Variation value to 5 each brush stroke will randomly move between 0 and 5 of the X Mean Position value Y Mean Position Sets the position of the brush strokes along the y axis Y Position Variation Use this to set the maximum percentage that a brush stroke will move in relation to the Y Mean Position value For example if you set the Y Position Variation value to 596 each brush stroke will randomly move between 0 and 5 of the Y Mean Position value Link X amp Y If you select this option you only need to adjust the x size values and the y size values will be identical Brush Opacity Mean Opacity Use this to set the opacity of the brush strokes Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Opacity Variation Use this to set the maximum percentage of opacity that a brush stroke will reach in relation to the Mean Opacity For example if you set the Mean Opacity value to 5 the opacity for each brush stroke will be randomly set between 0 and 5 of the Mean Opacity value Smoothness Sets the smoothness applied to the colors in the brush strokes The higher the value
250. on to configure a Matrox Uncompressed SD or HD resolution with or without alpha a dialog box similar to the following appears Matrox Uncompressed HD Settings Bit Depth Scan Mode g bit Interlaced C 10 bit Progressive 1 Under Bit Depth select the bit depth you want for your video 2 Under Scan Mode select the scan mode of your video 3 Click OK to save your selection The settings you selected will be used each time you render material with your program until you change the settings again Rendering material to a Matrox VFW avi file 216 Configuring the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame codecs When you click your program s Configure button to configure a Matrox MPEG 2 I frame codec SD or HD resolution with or without alpha a dialog box similar to the following appears Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD Settings E 50 Mb sec Frame Rate 29 97 v Cancel n uud Advanced gt gt a Important Unless you have the Matrox Axio hardware you can use the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec to render to an HDV 10801 1440x 1080 25 fps or 29 97 fps file only The Alpha Matrox MPEG 2 I frame codecs are available only on a system that has Axio hardware 1 Drag the Data Rate slider until your desired data rate is displayed The higher the data rate you select the better the video quality will be Depending on the capabilities of your system however you may not be able to smoothly play back video at a high quality using your Vid
251. ou can eliminate the key color from these dark areas so that they ll become completely opaque Softness Use this to soften the edges of your key by blending parts of your foreground image with your underlying image This makes certain areas of your foreground image partially transparent instead of completely transparent or opaque Spill Removal Use this to remove the contamination spill that your key color may leave on or around the edges of your foreground image Spill is usually caused by light reflecting from your solid color backdrop key color onto your foreground image Spill Removal replaces your key color from the spill areas with the opposite color in the spectrum which returns a more natural look to these areas Chroma Suppression Use this to remove any tint that your key color imposes on your foreground image For example if your solid color backdrop key color is green and you are using a person in your foreground image the person s skin may have a green tint You can adjust the Chroma Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect 156 Suppression to replace the green tint with the opposite color in the spectrum to return the person s skin to a more natural looking color Note The following properties Luminance and Shadow Suppression are only available in the chroma key shadow effect Luminance Use this to adjust the luminance of your shadow Negative values increase the brightness of the shadow while positi
252. ou ve scaled down moved or rotated your mask using the transform controls so that the mask doesn t cover the entire screen Shape Transparency Sets the transparency of the shape and the area around the shape At the default setting 0 the shape is completely opaque and the area around the shape is transparent Dragging the slider to the left increases the transparency of the shape which makes the shine effect less apparent Dragging the slider to the right decreases the transparency of the area around the shape which increases the amount of shine outside the mask area Transform Use these properties to apply or change various transform settings such as the position scale and rotation settings of your mask For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Creating a shine effect 198 Creating a surface finish effect The Matrox surface finish effect allows you to apply various textures to your clips such as metal brick wood or granite with color spot lighting You can also adjust the transform controls to create a rotating slab with a different look on the front and back face gt To set up a Matrox surface finish effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Surface Finish to expand the property list 7 th Matrox Surface Finish e D Surface Control vv Light Control Ambient Light
253. ould be named MyFile Stereol wav MyFile Stereo2 wav etc Remarks The channels that you choose to save to the first stereo wav file or first two mono wav files will be embedded in the associated avi file When you import your avi file to the Project panel the clip s separate wav files will also be imported and the embedded audio in the avi file will be ignored The clip s avi file and first associated wav file however will appear as a single Movie clip in your project The embedded audio in the avi file will be used only if the avi file does not have any associated wav files Therefore if you perform audio post processing on your avi files make sure you delete the associated wav files so that only the embedded audio in the avi files will be used in your project When performing an audio only capture Matrox Axio supports capture of only one stereo pair Your first stereo or first two mono channels will be saved to a single stereo wav file any other channels will be ignored When Axio saves the wav file of an audio only capture it does not assign the Stereo wav suffix to the filename 7 Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 97 Monitoring audio levels for capture If you select Show VU meters on the Audio Capture Settings page each time you configure your Matrox Axio capture settings or open the Capture panel to start
254. our Video Rendering settings for editing on Matrox Axio are automatically set for you You can specify additional Video Rendering settings as explained in your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 91 Defining your Capture settings The Matrox Capture Settings dialog box has pages that you can use to specify your settings for capturing video and audio in Adobe Premiere Pro on Matrox Axio Note When you specify your capture settings on Matrox Axio VU meters will be displayed to let you monitor your audio input levels For more information see Monitoring audio levels for capture on page 97 Specifying your video capture settings Matrox Axio lets you capture your video to various formats depending on your project s video format and Matrox Axio hardware For example if you re working with an SD project such as NTSC you can capture to a DV format such as DVCPRO to create avi files for use in your SD Premiere Pro projects gt To specify your settings for capturing video in Adobe Premiere Pro on Matrox Axio 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt Capture 2 From the Capture Format list select Matrox AVI 3 Click the Configure button then click the Video Capture Settings tab Mises org rcx C C X I 8 c E Matrox D DVCAM v c PE S 4 Under Input Device select one of the following devices the selections available de
255. our clip to create a rectangular area containing the color you want to isolate 2 Under Proc Amps set the Saturation to 0 3 Select Invert Key If you have more than one object of the same color but you want to isolate only one of those objects you can apply a mask and use the Expand Outside Mask option to isolate the area that contains the color you want to remain intact For example if you have a clip that has two roses that are the same red and you would like only one of them to remain red you can do the following gt To perform a color pass effect using the Expand Outside Mask option 1 Click the auto key eyedropper in the selective key graph and click and drag anywhere on your clip to create a rectangular area containing the color you want to isolate 2 Under Proc Amps set the Saturation to 0 3 Select Invert Key 4 Apply a mask surrounding the colored object you want to remain intact see Applying a mask to your effect on page 123 5 Select Expand Outside Mask Creating a secondary color correction 148 Creating a 3D DVE effect The Matrox 3D DVE effect lets you position your clips anywhere in 3D space while adding soft edges and rounded borders with color gradients in real time Note Ifyou want to create a picture in picture effect the move amp scale effect will provide a sharper picture see Creating a move amp scale effect on page 180 To apply rotation to your effect you must use the 3D DVE effect
256. our project s video format for details see Supported video compression formats on page 260 If you re working with a 720p 23 98 fps or 25 fps project Matrox Axio supports capturing Panasonic VariCam material you must select Enable VariCam capture when you perform the capture In this case Axio will remove the redundant frames from the VariCam input during capture and create a clip in the same format as your project for editing You can also choose to import mxf files to your 720p project such as Panasonic 720 24p or 720 25p clips When needed Matrox Axio will convert the clips to your project s video format by removing the redundant frames when the clips are played back on the timeline Depending on your project s video format you can export your project to tape as 720p 50 fps or 59 94 fps video or downconvert the video to NTSC or PAL Note SDI and analog component input is not supported for 720p 23 98 fps 25 fps and 29 97 fps projects Other Matrox Axio HD workflows 258 The following diagram illustrates a typical workflow for a 720p project using Matrox Axio Film footage telecined and transferred to HD video tape HD video footage shot as 720p Matrox finishing quality codec such as MPEG 2 frame HD used to capture clips or HDV and DVCPRO HD clips captured natively over the 1394 interface When needed Matrox Axio will remove redundant frames when the mxf files are played
257. ox For file details after you add or remove details in a specific folder you must apply the change to all folders by choosing View gt Folder Options gt View gt Apply to All Folders Thumbnail preview Matrox Axio allows you to view thumbnails of mxf and avi files in Windows Explorer In a folder containing mxf or avi files simply enable the thumbnails view choose View Thumbnails and the first frame of each clip will be displayed as a thumbnail Without Matrox Axio only the default Windows icon would appear Additional file details Matrox Axio lets you add additional details for mxf and avi files in Windows Explorer gt To add clip details in Windows Explorer 1 Start Windows Explorer and ensure that the details view is selected for the appropriate folder by choosing View gt Details 2 Choose View Choose Details Choose Details Select the details you want to display for the files in this folder Details C Start Timecode Matrox inris NR Codec Matrox Frame Rate Matrox Aspect Ratio Matrox User Clip Name Matrox P2 Top Clip Name Matrox P2 Next Clip Name Matrox P2 Program Name Matrox P2 Scene No Matrox P2 Take No Matrox P2 Shooting Location Matrox P2 Shooter Matrox P2 Start Date Matrox P2 m Width of selected column in pixels 60 Displaying information for cl
258. ox Axio because NTFS overcomes FAT32 file size limitations When a hard drive is formatted using FAT32 files saved to this drive cannot exceed 4 gigabytes in size This translates to approximately 20 minutes of DV DVCAM video which poses a serious limitation to a nonlinear editing platform like your Matrox Axio system With NTFS you also have the option of creating a striped volume which consists of multiple hard drives formatted as a single partition This allows you to work with multiple drives as a single large drive which offers more disk space and enhances hard drive performance NTFS also provides better audio and video synchronization than FAT32 when you play back your clips If you already have Windows installed on your computer you can check the format of your drives In Windows Explorer right click the drive letter such as D then choose Properties Under General check the format of your drive next to File system If you need to format a drive using NTFS right click My Computer then choose Manage Under Computer Management gt Storage select Disk Management In the Disk Management utility right click the appropriate drive and choose Format In the provided dialog box specify a volume label for the partition you are creating From the File System list select NTFS Leave the Allocation unit size at Default Do not select the Enable file and folder compression option If you are formatting the drive for the first time do no
259. p IMX DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 Realtime playback of 32 bit compressed and uncompressed avi files with alpha 24 fps editing in HD and SD with pulldown reverse pulldown and Panasonic VariCam support Realtime high quality downconverting from HD to SD Accelerated media encoding including export to DVD and Adobe Clip Notes WYSIWYG plug ins for many popular compositing and animation programs Matrox EZ MXF utility for native mxf file support in Video for Windows avi file applications Chapter 1 Introducing Matrox Axio Features of Matrox Axio HD 8 bit or 10 bit uncompressed HD and SD editing Dedicated onboard GPU for support of Matrox Flex GPU effects DV 1394 and SD HD SDI video input and output RGB and analog component output 2 input 4 output balanced AES EBU stereo audio pairs 4 input 4 output SDI embedded stereo audio pairs 2 balanced analog XLR audio outputs for monitoring purposes Features of Matrox Axio SD 8 bit or 10 bit uncompressed SD editing and 8 bit uncompressed HD editing Dedicated onboard GPU for support of Matrox Flex GPU effects DV 1394 composite S Video analog component and SD SDI video input and output 2 input 2 output unbalanced analog RCA audio 2 input 2 output balanced analog XLR audio and 4 input 4 output SDI embedded stereo audio pairs Can be easily upgraded to Matrox Axio HD by simply adding the X linkHD breakout box Features of Matrox Axio LE 8 bit uncomp
260. pacity Sets the opacity of the noise pattern Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Color Use this to set the noise color Dust DustPattern Allows you to select a dust pattern Click the button on the right to see the list of available patterns Click here to select a dust o pattern Amount Sets the maximum number of dust particles that can be visible at any given time Lifetime Sets the maximum number of frames that the dust pattern will remain immobile before moving to another random position Opacity Sets the opacity of the dust pattern Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Creating an old movie effect 184 Color Use this to set the dust color Fixed Particle Display Fixed Particle Select this option if you would like one of the dust particles to remain fixed on your image Particle Number Use this to select the particle you want to remain fixed on your image Each dust particle is represented by a value XPosition Sets the position of the fixed particle along the horizontal axis YPosition Setsthe position of the fixed particle along the vertical axis Streak StreakPattern Allows you to select a streak pattern Click the button on the right to see the list of available patterns Click here to select a streak pattern Amount Sets the maximum number of streaks that can be visible at any given time Opacity Sets the opac
261. pend on the particular Matrox Axio hardware you re using X linkHD to capture material from an SDI video source connected to your X linkHD breakout box X linkSD or X linkLE to capture material from an analog or SDI video source connected to your X linkSD or X linkLE breakout box Note Analog and SDI input is not supported for 720p 23 98 fps 25 fps and 29 97 fps projects Defining your Capture settings 92 DV 1394 to capture material from a DV 1394 device connected to your X link breakout box This option is not supported for 1080p 23 98 fps and 24 fps projects If you selected an X link breakout box as your input device from the Input Source list select the type of input you want to capture If you re capturing from X linkSD or X linkLE select SDI Component Composite or S Video If you re capturing from X linkHD the Input Source will be set to SDI Remarks If you selected DV 1394 as your input device the name of the DV 1394 device connected to your breakout box will appear in the Input Source box If Matrox Axio can t detect your source device when you start a capture you ll receive an error message Either black video will be captured or the capture won t be able to start until a valid input signal is present In either case you must make sure that your source device is switched on and properly connected to the breakout box to properly capture the video To capture analog or SDI i
262. ppears outside the mask For example you can define a mask area where you want the keying to be performed and show only your underlying image outside the mask This is useful if you re having problems keying on an area at the edges of your foreground image To adjust the mask properties Click the triangle next to Mask to expand the property list Vv Mask b Left 0 00 D Right 100 0095 b Top 9 00 b Bottom 100 0095 7 Select Select Mask Invert Li The properties under Mask let you control the area on the clip where you want to apply the mask You can enter the values you want in the text boxes or drag the appropriate sliders Left Right Top and Bottom Left Adjusts the left edge of your mask Right Adjusts the right edge of your mask Top Adjusts the top edge of your mask Bottom Adjusts the bottom edge of your mask Select Mask Displays a dialog box in which you can apply your mask settings see Using Select Mask on page 124 Invert Inverts the mask so that your effect is applied outside the mask instead of within the mask Applying a mask to your effect 124 Using Select Mask To apply a mask to your Matrox effect using the Select Mask dialog box click the triangle next to the Select property to expand it then click the Select Mask button Select Mask oe E The Select Mask dialog box allows you to apply a mask in two ways Click
263. project or Matrox HD to create an HD project select the preset that matches the type of project you want to create For example if you want to create an NTSC project in which you ll capture clips to DV DVCAM format and work in a standard 4 3 editing environment expand the NTSC and Standard folders under Matrox SD then select the DV preset Note If you ll be capturing HDV material select the appropriate Matrox HDV preset for your HDV footage such as the Matrox HDV 1080i 29 97 fps HDV preset if your footage was shot in Sony 1080 60i format or the Matrox HDV 1080i 25 fps HDV preset if your footage was shot in Sony 1080 50i format 3 Under Location specify where you want to save the project on your A V drive 4 Under Name specify a name for your project 5 Click OK to apply the settings Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 67 Setting up your scratch disks When specifying the location of your scratch disks in Adobe Premiere Pro make sure you follow the recommendations in your Adobe Premiere Pro User Guide For example always store your video and audio files on an A V drive gt To specify your scratch disks 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Scratch Disks 2 Under Scratch Disks select an appropriate A V drive letter for each scratch disk type L Tip To enhance performance store your media cache files on a drive separate from your video files 3 Click OK to save your preferences Important Ma
264. r 75 bar HD 0 700 V at 100 color bar 75 SD SDI HD SDI Video 2 Compliant with 75 Q second output is SD SMPTE 259M SMPTE 292M only Note Only one composite output is available when using analog component output Composite output cannot be used when outputting HD analog component video Appendix C Matrox Axio Specifications 277 Audio input output signals Analog balanced 1 stereo input pair Input impedance High impedance Nominal levels 4 dBu 18 dB headroom Analog balanced 3 stereo output pairs Output impedance 500 Nominal levels 4 dBu 18 dB headroom Gain boost available 110 Q Analog unbalanced 1 stereo output pair Output impedance 110 Q Nominal levels 10 dBV 18 dB headroom Unbalanced AES EBU 1 stereo input pair Input impedance 75 Q Max input levels 5 Vp Unbalanced AES EBU 3 stereo output pairs Output impedance 75 Q Nominal output levels 1 Vp Audio specifications Sampling frequency 48 kHz using 64x oversampling Quantization 24 bits Environmental specifications e Minimum maximum card ambient operating temperatures 0 to 55 C Minimum maximum storage temperature 40 to 75 C Maximum altitude for operation 3 000 meters Maximum altitude for transport 12 000 meters Operating humidity 20 to 80 relative humidity non condensing Storage humidity 5 to 95 relative humidity non condensing D Important To avoid damage to your Matrox Axio components and or computer syst
265. r To select a different color for the color frame use the color picker button or the eyedropper Tip The Show Color Frame Only option is provided as a viewing aid while setting up your 4 corner pin effect However you can choose to leave it selected to create a unique lighting effect such as to create a flashlight beam Creating a 4 corner pin effect 152 Creating a blur soft focus effect The Matrox blur soft focus effect lets you create unique effects and simulate camera defocus gt To set up a Matrox blur soft focus effect Click the triangle next to Matrox Blur Soft Focus to expand the property list v Matrox Blur Soft Focus e gt Blur Amount Source Blend Factor Lock Colors D Red Color Gain D Green Color Gain D Blue Color Gain D Crop Blur Amount Use this to change the amount of blurring in your clip Source Blend Factor Use this to superimpose the original image on top of your clip after you ve applied blurring A value of zero will show only the blur result and a value of 100 will show only the original image Anything in between will result in a blending of the blurring with the original image therefore creating a soft focus effect Lock Colors Select this option to proportionally increase or decrease the red green and blue color gain For example any adjustments you make to the Red Color Gain will be used for the green and blue color gain as well Red Color Gain Lets you incr
266. r a standard or advanced pulldown for recording material to tape or disk To use the video with Matrox Axio we recommend that you set your camera to use advanced pulldown called 24PA or 24P Advanced mode on some devices to convert the footage to 29 97 fps interlaced video Matrox Axio will then apply an advanced reverse pulldown method to convert the source video to 486p 23 08 fps for editing clips in Adobe Premiere Pro D Important When using a Panasonic P2 camera to shoot 486p 23 98 fps material for use with Matrox Axio you must set the camera to Advanced mode 486 24pA For film footage shot at 24 fps standard 2 3 pulldown is the method most often used in the telecine process to insert the additional video fields required for the 24 fps to 29 97 fps conversion In this case Matrox Axio performs a standard reverse 2 3 pulldown during capture To do this Matrox Axio identifies the A frames of a sequence as those frames that have time code ending in 0 or 5 Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows 237 The output from your 486p 23 98 fps project on Matrox Axio is always NTSC For DV 1394 output Axio provides the option to apply either an advanced pulldown or standard pulldown In most cases you would want to perform an advanced 2 3 3 2 pulldown only if your DV video requires further processing or if it is to be archived Otherwise a standard 2 3 pulldown should be used when you export your 486p 23 98 fps project to tape If you use a
267. r meet broadcast quality standards In this case Matrox Axio will filter the input signal to increase tolerance for sync pulse stability Available when capturing from X linkSD only Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 95 Specifying your audio capture settings You can specify various audio capture settings such as to specify your input source and the type of audio files either stereo wav or mono wav that you want to create when capturing audio on Matrox Axio When you capture a clip on Matrox Axio the clip s video and audio are saved to an avi file and the clip s audio is also saved to one or more separate wav files You could choose to edit the separate wav files using audio post processing software such as Adobe Audition To specify your settings for capturing audio in Adobe Premiere Pro on Matrox Axio 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt Capture 2 From the Capture Format list select Matrox AVI 3 Click the Configure button then click the Audio Capture Settings tab chemnel 2 LD If you selected an X link breakout box as your video input device see Specifying your video capture settings on page 91 you must also select the source from which you want to capture audio From the Input Source list select your audio source For example if you want to capture the embedded audio of your SDI source
268. r of audio frames you want to be played before after the location of the current time indicator when you scrub a sequence This lets you hear more audio to help you better identify sounds when scrubbing For example if you set the number of preroll frames for audio scrubbing to 3 you will hear the audio for the current frame and three previous frames when you scrub a frame in a sequence Note To return a slider to it s default setting click its D button This button is available for all sliders in the Matrox dialog boxes Under Error Reporting select Report dropped frames or lost genlock on playback if you want to be warned each time frames are dropped or the genlock source signal is lost when you play back video from the Timeline panel Otherwise clear this option Note Once playback of the sequence has stopped a red bar will appear over segments of the sequence that have dropped frames even if you don t choose to report dropped frames Under Frame Hold select Enable Frame Hold if you want to use Adobe Premiere Pro s Frame Hold to freeze on a particular frame of a clip ina sequence When you do this any Frame Hold effects applied to your clips will require rendering If you ve selected Enable Frame Hold and encounter repeated frames when playing back nested sequences or clips with negative speed changes or you find that segments are identified with a red bar that don t actually require rendering you can clear this option When you
269. r signals however actually have a display frequency rate close to 29 97 frames per second Drop frame time code compensates for this time difference by dropping two frames from the count every minute except for every tenth minute so that the time code matches clock time DV Digital Video A standard digital bit stream and compression format known as the Blue Book standard used to record video and audio onto a digital tape DV is intra frame based saving each frame separately and uses a fixed 5 1 compression ratio to reduce the size of video files DV s data rate is fixed at 25 Mb sec 2 98 MB sec Video is sampled at 4 1 1 for NTSC sources or 4 2 0 for PAL sources See also DVCAM DVCPRO DVCPROSO and D 9 DVCAM A variant of the DV format developed by Sony that records a 15 micron track on a metal evaporated ME tape at a data rate of 25 Mb sec 2 98 MB sec Video is sampled at 4 1 1 for NTSC sources or 4 2 0 for PAL sources DVCPRO A variant of the DV format developed by Panasonic that records an 18 micron track on metal particle tape at a data rate of 25 Mb sec 2 98 MB sec Video is sampled at 4 1 1 for both NTSC and PAL sources See also DVCPRO HD DVCPRO HD A high definition variant of the DVCPRO format developed by Panasonic that uses a data rate of 100 Mb sec Matrox Axio supports DVCPRO HD for 10801 and 720p projects DVCPROBO A variant of the DV format developed by Panasonic that uses a data rate of 50 Mb s
270. r the duration of the tape Note The format of your DV tape must match the format you re recording For example if you set your DV 1394 device to record in DV DVCAM format your tape must be striped entirely in DV DVCAM format Mixed format tapes are not supported Avoiding missing frames when exporting to DV tape When performing an export to tape on some DV 1394 devices a delay may occur between the time the device starts recording and the time that Adobe Premiere Pro starts to play back your project This may result in the first video frames of your project not being recorded to tape To ensure that your export to DV tape Setting up Matrox DV HDV device control 112 does not miss any frames you can delay the playback of the project that you are exporting To do this you will need to do a test export with your DV 1394 device to determine the number of frames that are missing from the start of your project on the DV tape In the Adobe Premiere Pro Export To Tape dialog box select Delay Movie Start and enter the number of frames you ve determined are missing from your project multiplied by 4 to convert the value to quarter frames If needed adjust this amount until you obtain a frame accurate or near frame accurate export to tape Note If your exported video is frame accurate but you re missing audio at the start of your project on the DV tape simply add a few frames of black and silence at the start of the sequence If you d
271. rcomes FAT32 file size limitations When a hard drive is formatted using FAT32 files saved to this drive cannot exceed 4 gigabytes in size This translates to approximately 20 minutes of DV DVCAM video which poses a serious limitation to a nonlinear editing platform like your Matrox Axio system With NTFS you also have the option of creating a striped volume which consists of multiple hard drives formatted as a single partition This allows you to work with multiple drives as a single large drive which offers more disk space and enhances hard drive performance NTFS also provides better audio and video synchronization than FAT32 when you play back your clips If you already have Windows installed on your computer you can check the format of your drives In Windows Explorer right click the drive letter such as D then choose Properties Under General check the format of your drive next to File system If you need to format a drive using NTFS right click My Computer then choose Manage Under Computer Management gt Storage select Disk Management In the Disk Management utility right click the appropriate drive and choose Format In the provided dialog box specify a volume label for the partition you are creating From the File System list select NTFS Leave the Allocation unit size at Default Do not select the Enable file and folder compression option If you are formatting the drive for the first time do not select the Perform a q
272. rd on page 32 simply remove the screws holding the brackets in place and then carefully remove the brackets Before you install your Matrox Axio LE card 36 Connect the internal analog audio cable to your Axio LE card The Axio LE card includes an internal analog audio cable with an attached audio cable bracket that allows you to connect the balanced analog audio XLR cable at the back of your X linkLE breakout box to your Axio LE card N Caution The internal audio cable connector and the corresponding connector on your Axio LE card are designed to fit together such that the tabs on the cable connector line up with the slots in the card connector Don t try to force the audio cable connector the wrong way Doing so can cause permanent damage by bending the pins on the Axio LE card connector Connect the internal audio cable from the audio cable bracket to the corresponding connector located near the middle of your Axio LE card Align tabs on audio cable connector with slots in Axio LE card connector Internal audio cable bent Audio cable bracket Axio LE card Chapter 4 Installing Your Matrox Axio LE Hardware 37 Install your Matrox Axio LE card Your Matrox Axio LE card is designed to operate in your computer s PCI X slot and an additional PCI slot near the Axio LE card is required to install the analog audio cable bracket If any of the two slots in which you ll be installing your Axio LE card and analog au
273. reases the amount of mosaic outside the mask area Outside Transparency Sets the transparency level of the area outside your mask Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro Note The Outside Transparency setting is applicable only if you ve scaled down moved or rotated your mask using the transform controls so that the mask doesn t cover the entire screen Softness Lets you apply the mosaic effect to the edges of your mask Invert Mask Select this option if you want to invert the opaque and transparent areas of your mask Apply Crop to Video Only Select this if you want the mask to be squeezed to fit your cropped clip If you don t select this option the mask will be cropped by the same amount that you crop your clip Transform Use these controls to apply or change various transform settings for your mask mosaic effect such as the position scale and rotation of the mask For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 179 Creating a mask mosaic effect 180 Creating a move amp scale effect Note picture in picture effect However if you want to apply rotation to your effect you must use the 3D DVE effect as explained in Creating a 3D DVE effect on page 148 To set up a Matrox move amp scale effect Click the triangle next to Matrox Move
274. reating 150 applying a Matrox transition 117 applying a Matrox video effect 117 available effects 116 blur soft focus effect creating 152 chroma key effect creating 154 overview 153 chroma key shadow effect creating 154 overview 153 303 color correction primary 125 secondary 137 cropping your clip 121 crystallize effect creating 163 cube effect creating 160 impressionist effect creating 165 lens flare effect creating 168 luma key effect creating 171 overview 170 mask blur effect creating 176 mask effect creating 174 mask mosaic effect creating 178 move amp scale effect creating 180 old movie effect creating 182 page curl creating 186 pan amp scan effect creating 188 realtime guidelines 207 ripple effect creating 190 selecting speed control method 206 shadow effect creating 192 shine effect creating 194 surface finish effect creating 198 track matte effect creating 201 transforming a clip using the Program Monitor 120 Index 304 using the transform controls 118 twirl effect creating 203 wipe transitions creating 204 Realtime threshold adjusting 71 Reference termination selecting for analog sync signal 89 Registering your Matrox Axio 294 Rendering using Adobe Premiere Pro limitations to realtime effects 208 Rendering using VFW programs before you start 211 selecting color space conversion options 212 selecting compressor 214 Reporting dropped frames during video playback 70 Reporting lost g
275. ressed HD and SD editing Relies on the power of your system s GPU to process Matrox Flex GPU effects DV 1394 composite S Video SD HD analog component and SD HD SDI video input and output Simultaneous HD and SD output 2 input 6 output balanced analog XLR audio 1 input 3 output unbalanced AES EBU stereo audio pairs and 1 input 1 output SDI embedded stereo audio pair 1 unbalanced analog RCA stereo output for monitoring purposes Welcome to Matrox Axio nee EE supplied for Matrox Axio HD and SD X io card input output card X effects card realtime effects co processor card X linkHD breakout box for Matrox Axio HD or X linkSD breakout box for Matrox Axio SD X link cable with attachable ferrite beads 4 to 6 pin IEEE 1394 cable Internal power supply cable for the X io card Internal power supply cable or 12 volt external power supply for the X effects card Note The AC outlet cord for your external power supply is not supplied with Matrox Axio ARAWA supplied for Matrox Axio LE Axio LE card Axio LE internal balanced analog audio cable with attached audio cable bracket X linkLE breakout box X linkLE balanced analog audio cable 6 pin to 6 pin IEEE 1394 cable for connecting X linkLE to your computer s 1394 port Two S Video adapter cables for connecting S Video devices to X linkLE Matrox Axio HD and SD system requirements Matrox Axio HD and SD require a computer with the following mi
276. rojects HDV is supported only for 1080i HDV 10801 and 720p projects DV 1394 export to HDV is not supported for 720p projects Realtime playback is also supported when mixing SD and HD clips in the same project as explained in Mixing SD and HD clips in a project on page 68 When exporting an HD project to disk you can choose to downconvert the HD video to any of the supported SD video formats For details see Exporting to a Matrox avi file on page 99 and Exporting to a Matrox mxf file on page 102 When working with an HDV 1080i 1440x 1080 project MPEG 2 I frame HD is the only supported compression format for exporting to disk and rendering previews Supported video compression formats 262 Matrox Axio LE Capture SD project video processing is set to 8 bit DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD project video processing is set to 8 bit DV 1394 and SDI input DVCPRO HD DV 1394 input only HDV SDI and analog component input only 8 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD Offline HD Playback DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame Legacy Matrox DigiSuite and RT series files DVCPRO HD HDV 8 and 10 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD Offline HD Export to disk DV DVCAM DVCPRO and DVCPRO50 8 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame DVCPRO HD 8 bit Uncompressed MPEG 2 I frame HD Offlin
277. rokes clockwise and negative values rotate the brush strokes counterclockwise Rotation Variation Use this to set the maximum percentage that a brush stroke will rotate in relation to the Mean Rotation value For example if you set the Rotation Variation value to 596 the brush strokes will randomly rotate between 5 and 546 of the Mean Rotation value Some brush strokes will rotate clockwise and some will rotate counterclockwise Size X Mean Size Specifies the size of the breaststroke along the x axis X Size Variation Use this to set the maximum percentage that a brush stroke will grow in relation to the X Mean Size value For example if you Creating an impressionist effect 166 set the X Size Variation value to 5 the brush strokes will randomly grow between 0 and 5 of the X Mean Size value Y Mean Size Specifies the size of the brush stroke along the y axis Y Size Variation Use this to set the maximum percentage that a brush stroke will grow in relation to the Y Mean Size value For example if you set the Y Size Variation value to 5 each brush stroke will randomly grow between 0 and 546 of the Y Mean Size value Link X amp Y If you select this option you only need to adjust the x size values and the y size values will be identical Preserve AspectRatio Select this option to keep the shape of your brush strokes similar For example if your brush strokes are rectangular adjusting the variati
278. roup of I B and P frames Used for broadcast transmissions and distribution on DVD See also GOP MPEG 2 I frame An MPEG 2 compression type that uses only intra frame compression that is only I frames are created Used for high quality distribution and for archiving mV Abbreviation for millivolt one thousandth of a volt Unit of measurement sometimes used to define the amplitude of a video signal See also IRE unit MXF Material eXchange Format A file exchange format standardized by SMPTE that assures interoperability among devices and systems Panasonic P2 Professional Plug in as well as Sony XDCAM and XDCAM HD use mxf files rather than mov avi or mpg files for example MXF is designed for today s file based workflows and provides a common way of packaging video and audio along with metadata so that information about the content is maintained as it flows through the production process N nonlinear editing Random access editing that generally uses video and audio clips stored on disks Nonlinear editing programs let you rearrange and edit clips without having to redo the entire production and provide instant cueing to any frame in a clip without waiting for tapes to rewind NTSC National Television Systems Committee The NTSC RS 170A standard defines a method of broadcasting a color signal that can be received by both monochrome and color TVs It uses a composite interlaced display comprised of 525 scan
279. rox Axio LE card 38 Your notes Chapter 4 Installing Your Matrox Axio LE Hardware Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio LE This chapter shows you how to connect external devices to Matrox Axio LE 40 X linkLE breakout box connections The X linkLE breakout box provides you with the maximum flexibility possible for connecting external video and audio devices to your Matrox Axio LE system Cables are provided for connecting the X linkLE breakout box to your Axio LE card and balanced analog audio cable bracket and a 1394 cable is included with your Axio LE kit to connect X linkLE to your computer S Video adapter cables are also provided for connecting S Video devices X linkLE video connections e One 4 222 SDI input output with embedded audio support Second 4 2 2 SDI output with embedded audio support SD SDI only One analog component input or one S Video input or one composite input One analog component output and one composite output or one S Video output and two composite outputs Note Composite output cannot be used when outputting HD analog component video EEE 1394 interface Analog black burst reference input X linkLE audio connections Two balanced analog XLR inputs Six balanced analog XLR outputs Oneunbalanced AES EBU stereo input Three unbalanced AES EBU stereo outputs Oneunbalanced analog RCA stereo output for preview Chapter 5 Connecting External Devices to Matrox
280. rror notification on page 230 Chapter 12 Monitoring Your Matrox Axio System 229 Monitoring your Axio hardware operating temperatures As shown in the X info Hardware section each page displays the current and maximum operating temperatures for your various Matrox Axio hardware components To avoid damage to your Axio components and or computer system make sure that you don t operate your Axio hardware at or near the maximum temperature for a prolonged period of time You should target your Axio hardware to operate at least 10 C below the maximum operating temperature You should monitor the temperature of your Axio hardware components periodically and take measures as needed to lower the room temperature and or improve the ventilation in your Axio system For details on how to ensure your system is properly ventilated see Providing adequate ventilation on page 10 for Matrox Axio HD or SD and Providing adequate ventilation on page 32 for Matrox Axio LE Enabling and disabling the Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro On Matrox Axio LE the X info program will provide a page to display hardware information about your display card On this page you can also choose to enable or disable the Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro If your display card supports the Matrox hardware accelerated effects Enable Matrox hardware accelerated effects in Adobe Premiere Pro will be selected by
281. rueba y se ha comprobado que cumplen con las normas EN55022 CISPR22 y EN55024 CISPR24 En entornos residenciales estos productos pueden causar interferencias en las comunicaciones por radio en tal caso el usuario deber adoptar las medidas adecuadas Para satisfacer las disposiciones de la CE deber n utilizarse cables apantallados para conectar el equipo y dem s perif ricos a la tarjeta Estos productos han sido sometidos a prueba en un t pico sistema anfitri n que responde a los requisitos de la clase A Se supone que estos productos cumplir n tambi n con las normas en cualquier sistema que responda a los requisitos de la clase A Digital Video Solutions www matrox com video
282. s If you want to apply additional effects to your chroma key you will get more desirable results by using the chroma key effect without shadow controls For example if you want to apply a DVE to your chroma key you should use the chroma key effect and not the chroma key shadow effect Overview of the chroma key effects 154 Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect To set up a Matrox chroma key or chroma key shadow effect click the triangle next to Matrox Chroma Key Matrox Chroma Key Shadow to expand the property list Graphical Provides a graphical representation of the chroma key controls that you can use to select your key colors and also lets you perform an auto key Map Lets you select your key colors within a circular graph that contains a color spectrum Plot Displays a plot of the colors present in your clip so that you can select the particular colors on which you want to key Show Key Click this button to display the matte used to create your key effect This enables you to further refine your key For example when you display the matte your key color such as green appears as black and opaque areas appear as white If you notice some white spots that you want to key you can adjust the key controls until the undesired white spots disappear Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 155 Auto Key Click this button to automatically key on the most common color a
283. s such as Adobe After Effects On a system without the Matrox Axio hardware this codec can be used to render and play back HDV 10801 1440x1080 25 fps and 29 97 fps clips only For examples of workflows that use the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec see Using the Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec on page 247 Working with HD material 240 Matrox 8 bit and 10 bit Uncompressed HD codecs Capture and export video to full resolution finishing quality HD video for online editing projects The Matrox VFW Uncompressed HD codecs allow you to render material to full resolution finishing quality HD video for use with Matrox Axio using VFW applications such as Adobe After Effects For an example of a workflow that uses the Matrox 8 bit or 10 bit Uncompressed HD codec see Using the Matrox 8 bit and 10 bit Uncompressed HD codecs on page 249 Axio LE supports 10 bit uncompressed video for playback only e Matrox DVCPRO HD codec Captures and exports video to full resolution finishing quality DVCPRO HD format for online editing projects This codec is supported only for 10801 and 720p projects in 1080p projects DVCPRO HD clips are supported for playback only The Matrox VFW DVCPRO HD codec lets you render material to DVCPRO HD format using VFW applications such as Adobe After Effects This codec can be used only on a system that has Matrox Axio hardware installed Note The Matrox VFW MPEG 2 I frame and Uncompressed codecs are also available
284. s 274 Axio utils See Matrox Axio utils B Blur soft focus effect creating 152 Breakout box available connections to X linkHD 22 available connections to X linkLE 40 available connections to X linkSD 22 connecting X linkHD or X linkSD to computer 25 connecting X linkLE S Video adapter cables 45 connecting X linkLE to 1394 port on computer 45 connecting X linkLE to audio cable bracket 44 connecting X linkLE to Axio LE card 43 mounting X linkHD or X linkSD 22 mounting X linkLE on desktop 41 mounting X linkLE to rack 41 typical Matrox Axio HD and SD connections 26 typical Matrox Axio LE connections 47 X linkHD specifications 271 X linkSD specifications 268 Broadcast quality source using with Matrox Axio 94 C Capture format selecting for audio capture 95 selecting for video capture 92 Capturing using Adobe Premiere Pro monitoring audio levels for 97 specifying settings for 91 Card installation Matrox Axio card set 17 Matrox Axio LE card 37 safety precautions 10 32 Chroma clamper effect using 206 Chroma filtering and chroma interpolation for rendering to VFW files 213 Chroma key effect creating 154 overview 153 using the chroma key graph 157 Chroma key graph using 157 Chroma key shadow effect creating 154 overview 153 Chroma sampling for fast motion video for rendering to VFW files 214 Codec Matrox 10 bit Uncompressed 93 100 Matrox 8 bit Uncompressed 93 100 Matrox DV DVCAM 93 100 103 Matrox DVCPRO
285. s an alpha channel such as a Matrox chroma key or 3D DVE When using a grayscale clip as your matte areas of black in the matte create transparent areas in your foreground clip areas of white create opaque areas that prevent the underlying clip from showing through and gray areas create semi transparent areas in your foreground clip gt To set up a Matrox track matte effect 1 Place your background clip underlying image on the appropriate lower track in your sequence such as on the Video 1 track 2 Place your matte clip directly above your background clip such as on the Video 2 track and apply the Matrox Source Identifier effect to this clip Note This effect is used only to identify which clip you re using as the matte for your track matte effect If you set up another effect in the same segment that also uses the Matrox Source Identifier effect such as for another track matte effect or an additional source for a Matrox cube effect you must assign a unique ID number to each source clip 3 In the Effect Controls panel click the triangle beside Matrox Source Identifier to expand the property list then select a unique ID number for your matte clip from the Identify As list as shown below sz Matrox Source Identifier e Identify As v ID4H ae a unique ID number ID 2 for your matte source D Important Any effect applied to your matte after applying the Matrox Source Identifier effect will be ignored Therefore if you w
286. s colors Contrast Adjusts the difference in luminance between the lightest and darkest areas of the image Brightness Adjusts the level of black in the image Color Balance These controls let you adjust the mixture of colors in your clip Graphical Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes when you adjust the color balance settings You can also adjust and modify most of the color balance settings directly within the graph For more information see Using the color balance graph on page 129 Numerical Lets you adjust your color balance settings numerically by entering values in the text boxes or by dragging the corresponding sliders You can adjust the Hue Saturation and Luminance for each tonal range Master Hue Saturation and Luminance Affects all areas of your clip from the lightest white to the darkest black Shadows Hue Saturation and Luminance Affects the darkest areas of your clip Midtones Hue Saturation and Luminance Affects the areas with tones between the darkest and lightest areas of your clip Highlights Hue Saturation and Luminance Affects the lightest areas of your clip Luma Mapping Graphical Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes when you adjust the luma mapping settings You can also modify the luminance of your clip directly within the graph For more information see Using the luma mapping graph on page 135 Numerical Lets
287. s format When working in a 1080p 23 98 fps project you can capture 1080i 29 97 fps source video and use it in your 1080p 23 98 project as long as the material was originally acquired at 23 98 fps or 24 fps This includes film footage that was shot at 24 fps then transferred to tape as 1080i 29 97 fps using a telecine process In this case Matrox Axio performs a standard reverse pulldown when it captures 10801 29 97 fps material for use in a 1080p 23 98 fps project Matrox Axio also supports HD video footage recorded directly to disk as mxf files If you import Panasonic P2 1080 24pA mxf files to a Matrox Axio 1080p 23 98 fps project Axio will perform an advanced reverse pulldown when the files are played back on the timeline You can output your completed 1080p 23 98 fps project to 1080p 23 98 fps 1080i 29 97 fps or NTSC format To output the project as 10801 29 97 fps or NTSC a standard 2 3 pulldown is performed to convert your video to the appropriate format Remarks Material shot by an HD video camera at 1080i 9 29 97 fps non telecined material is not suitable for use in a 1080p 23 98 fps project Instead use a 10801 29 97 fps project for working with this material When using a Panasonic P2 camera to shoot 1080p 23 98 fps material for use with Matrox Axio you must set the camera to Advanced mode 1080 24pA Applying pulldown in HD projects 252 1080p 23 98 fps workflow example The follow
288. scriptions are used to help explain the specific workflow details of working with some popular SD and HD video formats Working with SD 24P material Matrox Axio allows you to choose a Premiere Pro preset to work with SD material originally acquired at 23 98 fps or 24 fps When you select the Matrox 486p 23 98 fps project preset you can edit SD material as 23 98 fps progressive video as long as the source video was originally acquired at 23 98 fps or 24 fps This includes video that was captured to tape by a camera capable of shooting 486p 23 98 fps video Panasonic P2 or other footage shot at 486p 23 98 fps and recorded directly to disk as mxf files or SD film footage that was shot at 24 fps then transferred to tape by telecine processing You cannot use the 486p 23 98 fps project preset to capture or edit video that was originally acquired as NTSC or PAL Regardless of its origin SD material that is acquired at 23 98 fps or 24 fps then transferred to video tape must undergo a format conversion to NTSC 486i 29 97 fps when it is recorded to tape or recorded to disk in the case of mxf files This means that the output from your source device and input to Matrox Axio is always NTSC Your source device outputs the 23 98 fps material as NTSC by applying a pulldown method when it records the material to tape or disk Some DV cameras that are capable of shooting 23 98 fps progressive video have the option of performing eithe
289. se from many different patterns that you can use to make your image or text appear as if it is made of crystals gt To set up a Matrox crystallize effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Crystallize to expand the property list v ik Matrox Crystallize e D Select Shape b Smoothness 0 0 D Crystal Opacity 0 0 Crystallize Alpha Channel D Mask Settings D Crop Select Shape Click the button to the right of the current pattern to see the list of available crystal patterns Click here to 7 Select Shape select a new pattern Smoothness Sets the smoothness applied to the colors in the crystal pattern The higher the value the less sharp the colors become Crystal Opacity Sets the opacity of the crystals Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Crystallize Alpha Channel Enables alpha for the crystallize effect so the crystals will remain visible even on the anti aliased edges of a title or DVE This option is enabled by default but can be cleared if you find that the crystals make your title difficult to read Note Crystallize Alpha Channel is applicable only when your source clip or an effect applied to your source clip contains alpha key information For example if you apply the crystallize effect to a clip with no alpha key information and scale it down using Adobe s Motion effect the crystals will not be visible on the edges of your clip because the Motion effect is the last effect appl
290. ssed using MPEG 1 at 1100 Kbps and audio is compressed as MPEG 1 layer II at 224 Kbps A VCD can hold about 60 minutes of material Video CDs can play back on most DVD set top players See also SVCD vectorscope A device that measures the phase and amplitude of the color components of a video signal VITC Vertical Interval Time Code Time code that is encoded onto the vertical blanking interval of a video signal VITC can be read by a VTR whenever an image is displayed but not usually during high speed operation See also LTC voice over Narration added to a video segment and mixed in louder than the original background sounds W WAV An audio data file format developed by Microsoft and IBM This format is the standard for Windows and can be played by most applications that can support sound white balancing A color correction technique that adjusts the color levels of an image using white or gray as a color reference point White balancing assumes that when a white object can be made to look white the other color levels will also be accurate White balancing is used to correct improper color levels of an image that are due to varying lighting conditions or incorrect camera settings White balancing can be performed using the Matrox color correction effect and is also available as a setting on most cameras white level The brightest legal level of a video signal reference white which is at 100 IRE See also bl
291. sta acies 222 Autodesk COMbBUSHON csse o ao RE SERE een Rr EO HRK TEX Ed A 222 yoon FUSION T E I I LITT 222 NewTek LightWave 3D tora ERE Ihe be Re prar RU FER pEERN EX REN RR K OR 223 Chapter 12 Monitoring Your Matrox Axio System Using X info to display Axio information sues 226 Monitoring your Adobe Premiere Pro memory usage 226 Displaying syster KTOTTUIBEOD 2esesce oro eta etit iiaeiai iiini 226 Displaying hardware InfortTiationt iiie cerea ina iin en ned E enun Pure 228 Monitoring your Axio hardware operating temperatures 229 Enabling and disabling the Matrox hardware accelerated effects inm Adobe Premiere PEPo icc iesise ERA pe RE Dia RR A RS PIER 229 EbhOr MOMNGCANON Scarciliccre tetas Ed 230 Contents xii Appendix A Understanding Standard and Advanced Pulldown OVVIE ow sds 232 Standard 2 3 HUNG OW isc siccsdendsngensancasrssgencesganesedentangenvesioaaetseimenses 232 Matrox Axio implementation of standard reverse pulldown 233 Advanced 2 9 9 2 pulldOWTk iiesestrkUr e RU pERUEREERUDRERRURKDE RU EEXUFF PERDE 233 Matrox Axio implementation of advanced reverse pulldown 234 Appendix B Matrox Axio Workflows OVS POW is Saree dacs as timed cept apiece ped nbd nn eet ed E 236 Working with SD 24P material eerie eere nenne 236 486p 23 98 fps workflow example
292. t 1 From the Project Format menu select the format that matches your composition or animation such as NTSC 4 3 2 From the Output Format menu select the format you want for your preview output The available output formats depend on your project format For example if you chose an NTSC project format you can select an NTSC output format only If you chose an HDV 1080i 29 97 fps project format you can select an HDV 1080i 29 97 fps output format or you can select an NTSC output format to downconvert the HD video to NTSC Note If Adobe Premiere Pro is running the Project Format and Output Format will be determined by your Premiere Pro project s video output settings Chapter 11 Using the Matrox WYSIWYG Plug ins 221 3 From the Preview Type menu select one of the following options for the preview Video Select this to view your composition or animation Alpha Channel Select this to view only your composition s or animation s grayscale alpha key matte information 4 From the Sealing menu select one of the following options for your preview output Scale to fit Select this to scale your output to fit your video monitor The aspect ratio of your project format will be preserved Original Size Select this to output your video without any scaling If you are playing back HD clips in an SD project your output will be centered on your video monitor Configuring the Matrox WYSIWYG Control Panel 222
293. t General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Genlock tab r Internal v 3 From the Genlock Source list select one of the following Internal Genlock to Matrox Axio s internal reference signal Select this option only if you don t have an external sync generator or other reliable external video sync source Black Burst Broadcast Quality Genlock to an external sync generator connected to REF IN on your X link breakout box Black Burst VTR Quality Genlock to your analog source VTR connected to REF IN on your X linkSD breakout box This option is not available on X linkHD or X linkLE SDI Video Genlock to your SDI video source Use this option only if your SDI video source is very stable that is it has a built in TBC This option is not available on X linkLE Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings Remarks When capturing embedded SDI audio on a Matrox Axio SD system you must set your genlock source to SDI Video to avoid audio glitches in your captured audio When capturing from an SDI device on Matrox Axio LE you must set your genlock source to Black Burst VTR Quality The status of your genlock source will be displayed such as Locked or Not Locked to indicate whether or not Matrox Axio is presently locked to your selected genlock source When you change the genlock source distorted video and silent audio will be output until Matrox Axio loc
294. t select the Perform a quick format option either Important All information on the designated drive will be lost For more information on how to format your storage devices using NTFS see your Windows documentation Disk defragmentation It s important to make sure that your storage does not become too fragmented Overly fragmented drives will lead to a major reduction in your system s performance which will in turn seriously reduce Matrox Axio s ability to work properly Important To ensure that your storage is operating at optimal levels defragment your hard drives regularly daily or several times a week For information on how to defragment your storage devices see your Windows documentation Chapter 4 Installing Your Matrox Axio LE Hardware 35 Use the PCI retainer brackets Many computers contain card guides at the front end of the computer chassis These help to stabilize cards Since PCI X cards are neither long enough nor correctly centered to use these guides the Axio LE card is equipped with a PCI retainer bracket The following diagram depicts the retainer bracket s use Axio LE card Cd PCI retainer we is bracket Card guide Removing the PCI retainer bracket With some computer models you may have to remove the PCI retainer bracket In such a case once you ve drained static electricity from your body and removed the Axio LE card from its antistatic bag see Before you install your Matrox Axio LE ca
295. t the current frame in your clip except gray For details on selecting key colors within the graph or performing an auto key see Using the chroma key graph to modify key colors and perform an auto key on page 157 Note You must expand the Graphical property in order to see the indicator when adjusting the chroma key controls Hue Use this to rotate the indicator around the perimeter of the color spectrum so that you can select different hues colors on which to key Aperture Use this to widen or narrow the aperture of the indicator to increase or decrease the range of colors on which you want to key Saturation Use this to select colors that have a particular saturation value Pale colors have a low saturation value and are located at or near the center of the spectrum Vivid colors have a high saturation value and are located at or near the perimeter of the spectrum Because pale colors have low saturation you ll find them more difficult to key on than the vivid colors Saturation Threshold Use this to proportionally increase or decrease the region outside of your saturation range This controls how closely the Saturation value must match the key color before a region becomes transparent For example after applying a chroma key effect to a foreground image that includes dark areas or shadows that you want to preserve in your effect you may find that these areas have become semi transparent By adjusting the Saturation Threshold y
296. tance of dedicated hardware to play back in real time Matrox Flex GPU effects such as 3D DVEs and page curls are hardware accelerated effects Compare with CPU based effect HD Short for HDTV HDTV High Definition Television A digital television format with image resolutions up to 1080 vertical scan lines HDTV has a 16 9 aspect ratio Also called HD See also SDTV HDV A high definition video format that uses MPEG 2 video compression at a data rate of about 19 Mb sec for HDV 1 or 25 Mb sec for HDV 2 and records to standard DV format digital video cassettes hue The tint or tone of a color For example the difference between the color green and red is its hue l IBP compression See MPEG 2 IBP IEEE 1394 An international standard data transfer protocol created by Apple Computer under the FireWire trademark and standardized by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE It enables simple low cost realtime data transfer between computers and consumer and prosumer electronics products such as DV camcorders and DV decks Commonly referred to as 1394 l frame compression See MPEG 2 I frame l frame Intra frame A frame created during the MPEG or MPEG 2 compression process that contains all the information required to reproduce a complete image It allows random access points within a video stream and acts as a reference point for B frames and P frames to be built I frames are editable because
297. ter with the following minimum system configuration Intel Xeon dual CPU at 3 4 GHz or faster or AMD Opteron 250 dual CPU or faster 2 GB or more of physical memory RAM 1 free PCI X expansion slot and a free PCI slot near the Axio LE card to install the Axio LE balanced analog audio cable bracket Added ventilation fan as explained in Providing adequate ventilation on page 32 Display card that supports Microsoft DirectX 9 and has at least 256 MB of onboard memory 512 MB of onboard memory is recommended DVD ROM drive for the software installation Microsoft Windows XP with Service Pack 2 Adobe Premiere Pro 2 0 For up to date information about Matrox Axio LE system requirements check the Matrox Video Support site at www matrox com video support Matrox Axio LE system requirements About this manual This manual provides you with information about installing and using your Matrox Axio hardware and software including how to use your Matrox Axio system with Adobe Premiere Pro Style conventions The following style conventions are used in this manual The names of files directory paths and manuals appear in italics For example The data is stored in the sample wav file The file is located in your C Windows System directory Please refer to your Adobe Premiere Pro User Guide Menus and commands that you need to choose are displayed in the form Menu Command For example File Save mea
298. that these products will also achieve compliance in any class A compliant system Francais Informations aux utilisateurs Europ ens D claration de conformit Remarque sur les produits mat riels Matrox couverts par ce guide Ces unit s sont conformes la directive communautaire 89 336 EEC pour les unit s num riques de classe A Les tests effectu s ont prouv qu elles sont conformes aux normes EN55022 CISPR22 et EN55024 CISPR24 Le fonctionnement de ces produits dans un environnement r sidentiel peut causer des interf rences radio dans ce cas l utilisateur peut tre amen prendre les mesures appropri es Pour respecter les imp ratifs communautaires les c bles de connexion entre l quipement ou autres p riph riques et la carte doivent tre blind s Ces produits ont t test s dans un syst me h te typique compatible classe A On suppose qu ils pr senteront la m me compatibilit dans tout syst me compatible classe A Deutsch Information f r europ ische Anwender Konformitatserklarung Anmerkung f r die Matrox Hardware Produktunterst tzung durch dieses Handbuch Diese Ger te entsprechen EC Direktive 89 336 EEC f r ein digitales Ger t Klasse A Sie wurden getestet und entsprechen demnach EN55022 CISPR22 und EN55024 CISPR24 In einer Wohnumgebung k nnen diese Produkte Funkinterferenzen erzeugen und der Benutzer kann gen tigt sein entsprechende MaBnahmen zu ergreifen Um EG Anforderungen zu entsprechen m ssen
299. the less sharp the colors become This is useful if you want to remove artifacts that may appear when using a brightly colored image Use Original Alpha Select this option if you would like the brush strokes to be confined within the transparent areas in your clip This is useful if you are using a title Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 167 Blend Over Original Use this to blend the brush strokes with your original image This is useful when you are using smaller brush strokes and want to reduce any semi transparent areas around the brush strokes Texture Map Method Use the menu on the right to choose how your brush stroke colors will be processed Preprocess The brush stroke colors are based on the underlying pixels of the original image When you move the brush strokes they retain their original color Postprocess The brush stroke colors change with the underlying colors of the clip For example if your brush strokes are mostly blue and then they are moved to an area of the clip that contains red they will turn red Random Seed Adjust this setting to change the placement of brush strokes in your clip The brush strokes are randomly affected based on the value you select For example if you notice the brush strokes in your clip are always in the same place you can use this setting to move them Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip
300. the selective key graph The selective key graph allows you to modify your selective key settings Hue Key Saturation Key and Luma Key directly in the graph You can also perform an auto key e Map This is the default view when you first expand the graphical property You can drag the handles to move the indicator to different regions in the graph to adjust the Hue Key Saturation Key and Luma Key settings Map Plot Hue sa CO Lum Show Key Auto Key H c Handles In order to see the indicator and handles you have to enable the key setting you want to use For example if you want to adjust the Hue Key properties you need to click the Hue button in the selective key graph or select the Enable option in the Hue Key numerical properties In the following graph the Hue properties have been enabled Map Plot Hue e Sat C Lum Show Key Auto Key EET Handles e Plot Click this button to plot the colors and luminance values that are present in the current frame of your clip You can drag the handles to move the indicator to different regions in the graph to adjust the Hue Key Saturation Key and Luma Key properties The luma plot histogram shows Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 143 each luminance value present in your image as a vertical line A longer line indicates a higher amount of pixels in your image of that line s luminance value Map Plot Hue e Sat
301. ting humidity 20 to 80 relative humidity non condensing Storage humidity 5 to 95 relative humidity non condensing Important To avoid damage to your Matrox Axio components and or computer system make sure that you don t operate your Axio cards at or near the maximum operating temperature for a prolonged period of time see Monitoring your Axio hardware operating temperatures on page 229 for more information X effects card 268 X linkSD breakout box General Video standards Dimensions NTSC PAL NTSC EIAJ 12 875 x 3 5 x 2 975 Typical operating voltages and current consumption Voltage 3 3V 5V 12 V 12V Current 0A 1 2A 0 9A 0 18 A Total power consumption 19 watts Video input signals Signal Type Qty Voltage Impedance Composite Video 1 1 0 V 75 0 Y C Video 1 Luminance signal Y 1 0 Vp 750 oot signal PAL 0 300 Vp burst 75 Q NTSC 0 286 V p burst 75 Q NTSC EIAJ 0 286 V p burst 75 Q Component Video 1 Luminance signal Y 1 0 Vp p 750 Chrominance signal PAL 0 700 V at 100 color bar 75 Q B Y R Y NTSC 0 700 V at 75 color bar 750 NTSC EIAJ 0 757 V at 75 color 750 bar SDI Video 1 Compliant with SMPTE 259M 75 0 1394 1 200 mV 110 0 Reference In 1 10V 75 Q Appendix C Matrox Axio Specifications 269 Video output signals Signal Type Qty Voltage Impedance Composite Video 1 1 0 V
302. tion see Using the color balance graph on page 129 Numerical Lets you adjust your color balance settings numerically by entering values in the text boxes or by dragging the corresponding sliders You can adjust the Hue Saturation and Luminance for each tonal range Master Hue Saturation and Luminance Affects all areas of your clip from the lightest white to the darkest black Shadows Hue Saturation and Luminance Affects the darkest areas of your clip Midtones Hue Saturation and Luminance Affects the areas with tones between the darkest and lightest areas of your clip Highlights Hue Saturation and Luminance Affects the lightest areas of your clip Luma Mapping Graphical Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes when you adjust the luma mapping settings You can also modify the luminance of your clip directly within the graph For more information see Using the luma mapping graph on page 135 Numerical Lets you adjust the luma mapping settings numerically by entering values in the text boxes or by dragging the corresponding sliders Input Levels Black and White These controls let you fine tune your clip s brightness and contrast by changing the luminance value that represents black white or gray Doing so expands or compresses the range of luminance levels in your clip which increases or decreases your clip s tonal range For example by increasing the black va
303. tion 12 34 Display card checking for Matrox validated on Axio LE 229 Drivers installing for Axio hardware 52 Dropped frames in realtime effects reporting 70 DV material capturing native 92 DV DVCAM codec See Matrox DV DVCAM codec DV HDV device control setting 111 DV 1394 device as source in Adobe Premiere Pro 92 settings in Adobe Premiere Pro 90 DV 1394 device control exporting to tape with 112 setting 111 DV 1394 output settings 90 DVCPRO codec See Matrox DVCPRO codec DVCPRO HD codec See Matrox DVCPRO HD codec DVCPROS0 codec See Matrox DVCPROS0 codec E Effect presets 117 Error notification in Events panel 67 with X info 230 Events panel displaying warnings in 67 Exporting enabling DV 1394 output for 90 Index Matrox avi files in Adobe Premiere Pro 99 Matrox mxf files in Adobe Premiere Pro 102 to tape using Adobe Premiere Pro 111 using Matrox Media Encoder 110 External power supply connecting to X effects card 19 eyeon Fusion WYSIWYG plug in about 220 required steps 222 See also Matrox WYSIWYG plug ins EZ MXF See Matrox EZ MXF F Fan installing 11 33 Ferrite beads attaching to X link cable 24 Fixed effects applying in Adobe Premiere Pro 206 Flex CPU effects See Matrox CPU based effects Flex GPU effects See Matrox hardware accelerated effects Fusion WYSIWYG plug in See eyeon Fusion WYSIWYG plug in G General settings in Adobe Premiere Pro 69 Genlock settings 88 Genlock source reporting lost
304. tion a fan directly facing the end of the Matrox Axio LE card with the PCI retainer bracket You should make sure the fan directs air over the card When installed this fan works in conjunction with your PC exhaust fan located at the back of the PC case to blow warmed air away from your Axio LE card a _ _ _ Airflow Choose a fan that has a minimum rating of 40 CFM CFM stands for cubic feet of air displaced per minute and is a measurement standard for fans An example of a fan that meets this requirement well is the Sunon model KD1208PTB1 which is a 12 VDC fan with a rating of 42 5 CFM Make sure to mount the fan as close to the card as possible In most systems you should be able to place the fan directly behind the card guide slots Make sure to close your computer s cover once you ve finished installing your hardware This ensures that the airflow generated by the fan is directed over the card and does not escape through the top of your system AY Caution Fan installation should be done by a qualified technician Improper installation procedures can result in damage to your Axio LE components and or your computer system Matrox Electronic Systems Ltd is not responsible for any damage caused by faulty installation Before you install your Matrox Axio LE card 34 Format your A V drives using NTFS Your A V drives must be formatted using NTFS for use with Matr
305. tions Restore Default Click this button to restore the default settings you specified using the Set as Default button For more information about setting up transitions see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Creating a wipe transition 206 Using the Matrox chroma clamper effect You can use the Matrox chroma clamper effect to ensure that when you ve applied effects that perform color space conversion on part of a clip the clip s colors remain constant throughout Some effects such as Matrox hardware accelerated effects and Adobe Premiere Pro native effects perform color space conversions YUV to RGB that will clip RGB values to the acceptable range of 0 255 per color component The clipping however is usually only required on clips that have very bright or highly saturated colors For example if you split a clip that contains very bright or highly saturated colors and apply a Matrox 3D DVE to one portion of the clip you may notice minor color differences between the two halves on your video monitor Applying the Matrox chroma clamper effect to the portion of the clip that does not have the 3D DVE effect ensures that colors remain constant throughout the clip Selecting your speed control method You can choose the type of speed control that s best suited for individual clips in your Premiere Pro projects By default the speed control method of each clip in the Timeline panel is set to Frame Blend which interpolates
306. to same pair if you want both the center and subwoofer surround channels to be output to the same stereo pair the two channels will be represented as a single button This setting is required for some equipment 4 To mute the output for a particular channel click its speaker button To re enable the channel you must assign a surround channel to it 5 Under SDI you can assign surround channels to a maximum of four SDI audio pairs two pairs from any two groups To assign a surround channel to Defining your General settings 84 an audio pair for a group that is presently not available you must mute both audio pairs from one of the currently selected groups 6 Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 85 Specifying your audio output settings X linkLE Matrox Axio LE lets you customize your audio output settings such as to adjust the volume of your analog audio output You can also display audio mapping settings that show which channels are used to output your audio when playing mono stereo and 5 1 surround audio tracks lt gt To specify your audio output settings 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the Audio Output tab then click the General tab 3 Under Analog Audio Volume drag the sliders to adjust the volume of your analog audio output By defau
307. top left corner color Top Left Corner Opacity Sets the opacity of the top left corner Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Bottom Left Corner Color Use this to set the bottom left corner color Bottom Left Corner Opacity Sets the opacity of the bottom left corner Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Bottom Right Corner Color Use this to set the bottom right corner color Bottom Right Corner Opacity Sets the opacity of the bottom right corner Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Note The shadow corner colors are applied based on the size of the full screen Therefore corner colors of your shadow may vary depending on the size and position of your DVE For example if you choose red for your shadow s top right corner color and scale down and position your DVE to take up only the top right quarter of the screen the shadow will reflect red for each corner of the shadow even though you may have selected different colors for all four corners Shadow Softness Use this to set the softness of your shadow The higher the value the softer your shadow becomes Note Shadow Softness is applied starting from the borders of the full screen therefore the Shadow Softness may be less apparent based on the size and position of your DVE Blur Use this to apply blurring to your shadow Camera Field of Vision Specifies the field of vision of the camera in reference to the shado
308. tput signals Analog balanced 1 stereo output pair Output impedance Nominal levels Gain boost available 500 4 dBu 18 dB headroom 110 Q Balanced AES EBU 2 stereo input pairs Input impedance Max input levels 110 Q 10 Vp p diff Balanced AES EBU 4 stereo output pairs Output impedance Nominal output levels 110 Q 5 Vp p diff Appendix C Matrox Axio Specifications 273 Audio specifications Sampling frequency 48 kHz using 64x oversampling Quantization 24 bits Environmental specifications D Minimum maximum X linkHD ambient operating temperatures 0 to 35 C Minimum maximum storage temperature 40 to 75 C Maximum altitude for operation 3 000 meters Maximum altitude for transport 12 000 meters Operating humidity 20 to 80 relative humidity non condensing Storage humidity 5 to 95 relative humidity non condensing Important To avoid damage to your Matrox Axio components and or computer system make sure that you don t operate your X linkHD at or near the maximum operating temperature for a prolonged period of time see Monitoring your Axio hardware operating temperatures on page 229 for more information X linkHD breakout box 274 Axio LE card General PClinterface Full size PCI X 66 MHz card Regulatory compliance FCC Class A CE Mark Class A ACA Class A Video standards NTSC PAL NTSC EIAJ 1080i 1080p PsF 720p Nominal card dimensions Card 12 2 x 4 2 Card i
309. ttach the rackmount brackets to your X link breakout box If you use screws that are larger or longer than the ones supplied you can damage your equipment 2 Use the guide tabs on the bracket to help line up each bracket with its respective screw holes on the back of the breakout box Note Be aware that the mounting brackets are different The left bracket is wider than the right bracket in order to accommodate the width of the left side of the breakout box 3 Using a hand screwdriver only no power screwdrivers carefully tighten each screw until snug Do not overtighten Attach the ferrite beads to the X link cable The ferrite beads prevent electromagnetic interference from other electronic devices 1 Position an open ferrite bead no more than 1 from one end of the X link cable 2 Snap the ferrite bead shut enclosing the cable within Chapter 3 Connecting External Devices to Matrox Axio HD and SD 25 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 with the second ferrite bead at the opposite end of the X link cable Connect your X link breakout box to your computer 1 Connect one end of the X link cable to the X link connector on the backside of your X link breakout box Tighten the thumb screws until snug to ensure a stable connection X link cable X link cable connector 2 Attach the opposite end of the X link cable to the bracket connector on the backplate of your installed X io card X link cable X io card E
310. ttern Global Settings X Y Scale Use these controls to make your lens flare smaller or larger Full screen size is represented as 100 You can shrink your lens flare to 096 or enlarge it to 100096 Note however that by enlarging your clip the resolution may become blurry You can adjust the size controls individually or if you select Fixed Aspect Ratio you only need to adjust the x axis Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 169 Adjusting the percentage on the x and y axes changes the lens flare s width and height respectively Intensity Sets the opacity of the light refractions Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Enable Alpha Select this option to enable alpha for the lens flare so it will remain visible even on transparent keyed areas of your clip Flare Settings Adjusting these settings will change the appearance of the flare usually the brightest spot in the lens Note While most of the lens flare patterns contain a flare some of them do not If you choose a pattern without a flare these settings aren t applicable Size Sets the size of the flare Intensity Sets the opacity of the flare Levels range from completely transparent 0 to opaque 100 Color Sets the color of the flare Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Creating a lens flare effect 170 Over
311. u select a data rate higher than 125 Mb sec 3 To apply advanced settings to your MPEG 2 I frame file click the Advanced button Note The default advanced settings should provide good results for most applications We recommend that you change these settings only when needed for special purposes 4 Under Rounding Type select one of the following MPEG 2 Rounds the AC coefficients up to the nearest whole number when calculating the quantization coefficient Matrox Custom Truncates the AC coefficients to the lowest whole number when calculating the quantization coefficient In some cases this setting may yield less artifacts in graphics 5 Under DC Precision select the bit depth precision of the DC intra block Selecting your MPEG 2 I frame settings 106 Note The higher the DC precision value that s used to capture or render your video the more likely that the DC content will be increased at the expense of the AC content in the encoded stream This may result in lowering the overall quality of the compressed stream at a specified data rate Under Zig Zag Type select one of the following Regular Sets the regular default zig zag scanning pattern of the AC coefficient of the DCT block as defined in the ISO IEC 13818 2 figure 7 2 specification documentation Alternate Sets an alternate zig zag scanning pattern of the AC coefficient of the DCT block as defined in the ISO IEC 13818 2 figure 7
312. u will not be able to see the Curl Softness on your page curl if you adjust the scale or rotation settings in the transform controls Highlight There is a white illuminated line that highlights each page curl The following settings allow you to manipulate this highlight Position Sets the location in the page curl where the highlight appears Intensity Sets the brightness of the highlight as a percentage Shadow Intensity Sets the darkness of the page curl shadow as a percentage Transform Allows you to apply or change various transform settings such as to change your clip s size position and rotation For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Crop Allows you to crop the edges of your clip For more information see Cropping your clip on page 121 Creating a page curl effect 188 Creating a pan amp scan effect The Matrox pan amp scan effect lets you easily convert footage from one aspect ratio to another Tracking on screen action to make accurate judgements is easy because you see the entire source clip and the section of it that will become the final result You can use the Matrox pan amp scan effect to convert your entire production to another aspect ratio To do this you should apply the pan amp scan effect to a nested sequence 1 Choose File gt New gt Sequence 2 Give your new sequence a name and click OK 3 Drag your original sequence from the Project panel into the new sequence
313. uick format option either Important All information on the designated drive will be lost For more information on how to format your storage devices using NTFS see your Windows documentation Disk defragmentation It s important to make sure that your storage does not become too fragmented Overly fragmented drives will lead to a major reduction in your system s performance which will in turn seriously reduce Matrox Axio s ability to work properly Important To ensure that your storage is operating at optimal levels defragment your hard drives regularly daily or several times a week For information on how to defragment your storage devices see your Windows documentation Chapter 2 Installing Your Matrox Axio HD or SD Hardware 13 Use the PCI retainer brackets Many computers contain card guides at the front end of the computer chassis These help to stabilize cards Since PCI X cards are neither long enough nor correctly centered to use these guides the Axio cards are equipped with a PCI retainer bracket The following diagram depicts the retainer bracket s use Axio card C Se LJ PCI retainer bracket Card guide Removing the PCI retainer bracket With some computer models you may have to remove the PCI retainer bracket In such a case once you ve drained static electricity from your body and removed the Axio cards from their antistatic bags see Before you install your Matrox Axio card set on
314. uration value while vivid colors have a high saturation value Enable Select this to enable the Saturation Key properties and saturation key indicator in the selective key graph Low Clip Use this to select the lower saturation values to be keyed Low Gain Use this to set the range of saturation values you want to be partially affected based on the value set by the Low Clip control As you increase the Low Gain setting more pixels are partially Creating a secondary color correction 140 affected by the color correction If you decrease the Low Gain control less pixels are partially affected A Low Gain setting of 100 provides the widest range for maximum color correction Alternately a gain setting of 0 creates a key where saturation values are either completely affected or left untouched You can think of the Low Gain control as defining an Affected to Untouched range for keying the pale colors in your image High Gain This control is similar the Low Gain setting except you use it to set the range of higher saturation values you want to be partially affected based on the value set by the High Clip control As you increase the High Gain setting less pixels are partially affected by the color correction If you decrease the High Gain setting more pixels are partially affected You can think of the High Gain control as defining an Untouched to Affected range for keying the vivid colors of your image
315. ut settings X linkHD ssssu 74 Specifying your video output settings X linkSD 76 Specifying your video output settings X linkLE ssuse 78 Specifying your audio output settings X linkHD and X linkSD 81 Specifying your audio output settings X linkLE ssususee 85 Specifying your genlock settings i eeieoiieceecicea eiie teg ise eere anra pua 88 Selecting your DV 1394 output settings ccc eee eee eee eee ee eeee eee eeeeeeee 90 Defining your Video Rendering settings Lees 90 Defining your Capture settings eeeeeeeeeeeeereesee 91 Specifying your video capture settings uses 91 Specifying your audio capture settings eesseeeeeeeeeeeeesse 95 Specifying your audio monitoring settings X linKHD and X linkSD 98 Exporting to a Matrox avi file Leeuueeue eee eee esee 99 Exporting to a Matrox mmi file eret rra Rr nnns 102 Selecting your MPEG 2 I frame settings ees 105 Adding a voice over to your sequence useesee 107 Caonmnesctori ang Setbip ui acce ene eiost ueni hx E d eAdDLda iC UR aD M EMREa UE 107 Recording your VOIlGB OVIBE sarnana EE QNM Dis EabnR ERA EA NM An 108 Contents Export
316. utput Format Use this to specify whether you want the format for the analog video outputs from X linkLE to be the same as the main or the secondary SDI output If you re working with an SD project or a 1080p 24 fps project however the analog output format will be set to Same as Main SDI Out Setup NTSC Select the setup level you want for your NTSC analog video e OIRE Applies a setup level of 0 IRE You should select this option only when working with a commercial DV 1394 device that uses the Japanese analog NTSC setup of 0 IRE For example if the video appears too bright when you play back DV clips on your NTSC monitor you can change the setup to 0 IRE to output your DV clips at the correct brightness e 7 b IRE Applies the standard NTSC setup level of 7 5 IRE Output Type Select the type of analog video output you want If you re outputting SD analog video you can select Composite amp Component or Composite amp S Video If you re outputting HD analog video the analog output type will be set to Component and the composite output will be invalid 7 Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box Defining your General settings 80 Specifying advanced video output settings X linkLE You can specify advanced video output settings for X linkLE such as to make horizontal delay and SC H phase adjustments gt To specify your advanced video output settings 1 Choose Project Pro
317. ve set up Matrox DV HDV device control as explained in Setting up Matrox DV HDV device control on page 111 Chapter 8 Defining Your Adobe Premiere Pro Settings 13 7 Choose File gt Export gt Export to Tape For information about exporting your sequence to tape using Adobe Premiere Pro see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Exporting your sequence to tape 114 Creating an SD project in 16 9 format When editing on Matrox Axio you can choose to work with SD source video that s been recorded in either the 4 3 standard TV screen format or the widescreen 16 9 format gt To create an SD project in 16 9 format on Matrox Axio do the following 1 Record your video onto tape with your camera set to the widescreen 16 9 format The video will be recorded as horizontally compressed 4 3 anamorphic video Start Adobe Premiere Pro and select the appropriate Matrox widescreen preset such as DVCPRO Widescreen This ensures that the effects you create on Matrox Axio will be displayed with the correct proportions when viewed in 16 9 format Capture your video clips as you normally would Select the 16 9 display option on your NTSC or PAL video monitor to unsquish the video and play it back in widescreen format without distortion If you create animations titles or graphics for your project using a program that lets you set the pixel aspect ratio use the appropriate setting for 16 9 display For NTSC or 486p
318. ve values decrease the brightness Shadow Suppression Use this to make shadows in your clips less apparent A higher value indicates less shadow Mask Allows you to apply a mask to your effect For more information see Applying a mask to your effect on page 123 Transparent Outside Mask Select this option to apply transparency outside the mask area This allows you to define a mask area where you want the keying to be performed and show only your underlying image outside the mask For more information see Applying a mask to your effect on page 123 Invert Key Select this to invert the key selection giving you the opposite result of what you originally selected Show Key as Output Select this to display the matte used to create your key effect This enables you to further refine your key For example when you display the matte your key color such as green appears as black and opaque areas appear as white If you notice some white spots that you want to key you can adjust the key controls until the undesired white spots disappear Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 157 Using the chroma key graph to modify key colors and perform an auto key To modify your key colors directly within the chroma key graph or perform an auto key click the triangle next to the Graphical property to expand it e Map This is the default view when you first expand the Graphical property You can drag the handles in t
319. via any device that has an IEEE 1394 interface Digital S See D 9 digital signal A signal representing video or audio information as binary digits that can be easily regenerated with no noise or distortion See also analog signal Digital Video See DV digitize To convert analog information such as a video signal from a VTR or camera into digital information that can be processed and stored by a computer Direct memory access DMA A technique used to rapidly transfer data between an attached device such as a disk drive and the computer s main memory without needing to pass the data through the CPU DirectX A Microsoft developed program that enables interfaces to support advanced hardware features without being written specifically for each hardware model DirectShow formerly called ActiveMovie is part of DirectX display card A card that has its own memory and processor to handle graphics and enhance display capabilities Also called graphics card See also GPU dissolve A transition in which one image smoothly fades to another image It is characterized by the gradual ending of one image occurring simultaneously with the gradual beginning of another A so called crossfade driver Software that controls a device such as a display card and enables it to work with other software drop frame time code For NTSC video time code is normally produced by a generator that counts at 30 frames per second NTSC colo
320. view of the luma key effect You can use the Matrox realtime plug in to apply a luma key to make certain areas of a foreground image transparent based on the luminance in that image so that an underlying image can show through In the following example of a luma key effect two video clips are combined to produce the effect of two cowboys riding through fire Our foreground image is a video clip of a ring of fire against a black background and our underlying image is a video clip of two men riding horses Foreground image Underlying image By luma keying on the particular luminance brightness of the black areas in the foreground clip these areas become transparent and the corresponding areas of the underlying image show through in the composite image as follows Result of luma key Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 171 Creating a luma key effect To set up a Matrox luma key effect click the triangle next to Matrox Luma Key to expand the property list Graphical Allows you to see a graphical representation of your changes when you adjust the property settings You can adjust the luma key properties directly in the graph to select the luminance values on which you want to key For more information see Using the luma key graph on page 172 Transparency Use this control to set the transparency level of your key effect Higher values indicate higher transparency For example a Transpar
321. w X Camera Position Moves the camera around the x axis Y Camera Position Moves the camera around the y axis Z Camera Position Moves the camera inward or outward from the shadow Transform Allows you to apply or change various transform settings for your shadow such as the size position and rotation of the shadow For more information see Transforming your clip on page 118 Creating a shadow effect 194 Creating a shine effect The Matrox shine effect allows you to create rays that shine through text or add shimmer to an object in your clip You can also use the shine effect to make two dimensional text appear as three dimensional text gt To set up a Matrox shine effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Shine to expand the property list 7 ik Matrox Shine e Light Source Volume Preprocessing Color Remapping Noise Postprocessing Mask Settings Crop VVVVV VV VV Light Source X Position Sets the position of the light source along the horizontal axis Y Position Sets the position of the light source along the vertical axis Z Position Sets the depth of the light source Rotation Rotates the light source Positive values rotate the light source counterclockwise and negative values rotate the light source clockwise Volume Length Specifies how far the light rays shine outward from the light source Positive values make the rays shine outward while negative values make the rays shine i
322. w Gain and High Gain properties Any adjustments made affect the shape and size of the luminance selector in the Luma Plot 173 Creating a luma key effect 174 Creating a mask effect The Matrox mask effect lets you choose from dozens of soft edged cutout shapes that you can apply to a clip to superimpose it onto another clip gt To set up a Matrox mask effect Click the triangle beside Matrox Mask to expand the property list Select Shape Click the button to the right of the current pattern to see the list of available mask patterns V Click here to selecta new pattern Shape Transparency Sets the transparency of the shape and the area around the shape At the default setting 0 the shape is completely opaque and the area around the shape is transparent Dragging the slider to the left increases the transparency of the shape Dragging the slider to the right decreases the transparency of the area around the shape Outside Transparency Sets the transparency level of the area outside your mask Note The Outside Transparency setting is applicable only if you ve scaled down moved or rotated your mask using the transform controls so that the mask doesn t cover the entire screen When Outside Transparency is applied the Shape Transparency sets the overall transparency of the entire clip Softness Applies softness to the edges of your mask Invert Mask Select this option if you want to invert the opaque an
323. w by clicking the Split View button You can then drag the handles on the corners of the split rectangle to define the area you want to split You can also drag the split rectangle to move it to a specific region of your clip The area within the split view rectangle will display any color correction you make while the area outside remains unchanged 127 Creating a primary color correction 128 In the following example the split view rectangle has been moved to display the color correction in the area surrounding part of the Chinese character on the wall Remarks The Split View option is for preview only You should disable it before rendering your material otherwise the split will appear in your video output If you are working in Adobe After Effects you should enable Live Update mode so that any movement of the split rectangle is reflected in the Composition panel as it occurs If you enable Split View and create a mask outside the split view rectangle you will not be able to see it The mask will only be visible when you move the split view rectangle directly over it If you invert a mask that is not in the split view rectangle area the whole clip will be inverted since the mask is ignored Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 129 Using the color balance graph The color balance graph allows you to modify the Color Balance settings for each tonal range directly within the color maps You c
324. with Adobe Premiere Pro You can select luminance values on which to key by adjusting the Low Clip and High Clip handles or you can use the luminance eyedropper to automatically pick the luminance value you want to key on The eyedropper can be used in two ways Click the eyedropper button and click on the color with the desired luminance value in your clip Click the eyedropper button and click and drag anywhere on your clip to create a rectangular area containing the luminance values you want to select The selected luminance will be an average of the luminance values contained within the rectangle Note Any luma key displayed in the Program Monitor will be temporarily deactivated when using the luminance eyedropper This allows you to see the colors of your clip before any modifications were made You can also adjust the softness of your key with the Low Gain High Gain and Transparency handles All these adjustments affect the shape and size of the luminance selector as follows LOW CLIP P O HIGH CLIP gt gt TRANS Xx K_A LOW GAIN HIGH GAIN e Plot Click this button to see the luminance spectrum with a plot that shows each luminance value present in your image as a vertical line in the histogram A longer line indicates a higher amount of pixels in your image of that line s luminance value You can drag the handles in the luma plot spectrum to adjust the Transparency Low Clip High Clip Lo
325. wo separate mono mzxf files From the Compressor list select the compression format you want for the export Note The SD and HD formats available depend on your project s video format and the type of mxf files you re creating The format is shown in brackets beside the codec name such as NTSC Only supported formats will appear in the Compressor list Matrox DV DVCAM Renders video to DV or DVCAM format Matrox DVCPRO Renders video to DVCPRO format supported only for Panasonic P2 files Exporting to a Matrox mxf file 104 Matrox DVCPRO50 Renders video to DVCPROSO or D 9 format supported only for Panasonic P2 files Matrox DVCPROHD Renders video to DVCPRO HD format supported only for Panasonic P2 files and HD projects with a format of 1080i or 720p Matrox IMX Renders video to IMX D10 format supported only for Sony XDCAM files If you selected Matrox IMX click the Configure button and from the displayed dialog box select the date rate you want for the export such as 40 Mb sec From the Aspect Ratio list select the aspect ratio you want for your exported video 4 3 Exports video to the standard TV screen format If you re downconverting HD video to NTSC or PAL the video will be exported in letterbox mode 16 9 Exports video to the widescreen 16 9 format If you re downconverting HD video to NTSC or PAL the video will be exported as anamorphic horizontally compressed 4 3 vide
326. x Playback Settings dialog box you must not use the Audio Output Mapping settings in Adobe Premiere Pro s Preferences dialog box to change your audio output mapping settings for the Matrox ASIO driver Connection and setup 1 Connect the microphone to the audio input on your source device and connect the audio output from the source device to the corresponding audio input on your X link breakout box Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Audio Hardware From the Default Device list select Matrox ASIO Driver then click OK Choose Project gt Project Settings gt Capture Make sure that the Capture Format is set to Matrox Axio Click the Configure button then click the Video Capture Settings tab N 0 5B W NM From the Input Device list select your X link breakout box such as X linkHD Note The Matrox voice over feature does not support DV 1394 devices 8 From the Input Source list select the video input that you re using as your genlock source for the voice over For example if the video input is connected to the composite video input on your X linkSD breakout box select Composite 9 Click the Audio Capture Settings tab 107 Adding a voice over to your sequence 108 10 11 12 From the Input Source list select the audio source type corresponding to the device to which the microphone is connected For example if the microphone is connected to an XLR device on X linkSD select XLR balanced analog Test the
327. xcept you use it to set the range of luminance values you want to be partially affected Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro 141 based on the value set by the High Clip control You can think of the High Gain control as defining an Untouched to Affected range for keying the lighter areas of your image High Clip This control is similar to Low Clip except you use it to select the higher brighter luminance values to be keyed Note The values you can select using the Low Clip and Low Gain controls are dependent on the High Clip and High Gain controls and vice versa This prevents the low and high controls from keying on the same luminance values Invert Key Select this to invert the key selection giving you the opposite result of what you originally selected Show Key as Output Select this to display the matte used to define your selective key region This enables you to further refine your key Areas that are completely affected by the color correction are white untouched areas are black and gray areas are partially affected Expand Outside Mask Applies the color correction settings outside the mask area This setting is especially useful when setting up a color pass effect where you have several objects of the same color but want to retain the color for only one object For more information see Creating a color pass effect on page 147 Creating a secondary color correction 142 Using
328. xio will perform a standard reverse pulldown on your input video during capture For more information about how pulldown can be applied in your HD project see Applying pulldown in HD projects on page 251 About the Matrox HD codecs When creating an HD video project there are a number of editing decisions that must be made including the selection of an appropriate HD video codec Your Matrox Axio system provides you with different HD video codecs to perform offline edits and finishing quality online edits The following provides a summary of some Matrox HD video codecs and their most suitable uses Matrox Offline HD codec Captures and exports video to a proxy HD format to create offline edits that use less disk space A Video for Windows VFW version of the offline HD codec is available for use with VFW applications When this codec is installed on a system without Matrox Axio hardware such as a laptop computer the system can be used to complete offline editing projects in Adobe Premiere Pro For some examples of workflows that use the Matrox Offline HD codec see Using the Matrox Offline HD codec on page 240 Matrox MPEG 2 I frame HD codec Captures and exports video to an MPEG 2 I frame HD format that produces high quality low bit rate video that can be used for either offline editing projects or online editing projects The Matrox VFW MPEG 2 I frame HD codec allows you to render material to full HD video using VFW application
329. you display the matte your key color such as green appears as black and opaque areas appear as white If you notice some white spots that you want to key you can adjust the key controls until the undesired white spots disappear e Auto Key Click this button to automatically key on the most common color at the current frame except gray Selecting Auto Key affects values for Hue Aperture Saturation and Saturation Threshold If your clip consists of a uniform key color that is evenly lighted Auto Key will usually give you a good quality chroma key Alternately you can use the eyedropper to select a color on which you want to key eyedropper Aut i y pp You can use the eyedropper in two ways Click the eyedropper button and click on a color on which you want to key Chapter 9 Setting Up Realtime Effects with Adobe Premiere Pro N 159 Click the eyedropper button and click and drag anywhere on your clip to select a rectangular area containing colors on which you want to key Note The Show Key mode and any chroma key applied will be temporarily deactivated in the Program Monitor when using the auto key eyedropper This allows you to see the original colors of your clip before any modifications were made Indicator Click this button to turn the indicator on or off Handles Click this button to turn the handles for the indicator on or off Creating a chroma key or chroma key shadow effect 160 Creating a cube effe
330. you control DV 1394 devices when capturing or exporting material to tape in Adobe Premiere Pro gt To set up Matrox DV HDV device control 1 Choose Edit gt Preferences gt Device Control 2 From the Devices list select Matrox DV HDV Device Control 3 Click Options and make sure that your device control options are correctly set as explained in your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation the options are the same as those provided for Adobe Premiere Pro s DV HDV device control 4 Click OK to save your settings You can now use device control when capturing or exporting material over the 1394 interface make sure that your device is set to Remote or VTR mode For details on how to capture material in Adobe Premiere Pro see your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation For information about exporting material to tape using device control see the next section Exporting your sequence to tape Your Matrox Axio system lets you export your Adobe Premiere Pro sequence to tape using DV 1394 or RS 422 device control You can use Matrox DV HDV device control to control DV 1394 devices For RS 422 devices you can use Adobe Premiere Pro s serial device control as explained in your Adobe Premiere Pro documentation Preparing your tapes for recording To use device control the tape on which you ll be recording your material must contain continuous and consecutive time code You can stripe your entire tape with time code by recording black video fo
331. you select Show only active camera on video monitor any non realtime segments previewed on the Multi Camera Monitor will display as black video on your video monitor On an Axio LE system selecting this option may result in decreased realtime performance during multi camera editing Click OK to save your settings and return to the Project Settings dialog box 71 Defining your General settings 72 Selecting options for accelerated Premiere Pro effects To select your options for processing accelerated Premiere Pro effects on Matrox 1 Choose Project gt Project Settings gt General and click the Playback Settings button 2 Click the General tab Premiere Pro Accelerated Effects Disable accelerated scaling to Frame size Disable accelerated transitions v Accelerate Motion using Matrox move amp scale v 3 Under Premiere Pro Accelerated Effects select the options you want Disable accelerated scaling to frame size Select this if you want to disable the realtime playback of clips that are scaled to your project s frame size as explained in Mixing SD and HD clips in a project on page 68 When you apply a DVE or other effect that resizes a realtime scaled clip the full screen image is resized including any letterbox or pillarbox black bars By disabling the accelerated scaling to frame size any black bars in your scaled clips will become transparent but your scaled clips will require rendering

Matrox Axio Installation and User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents